FolioCorpusBhagavad-gītā

13 · Nature, the Enjoyer, and Consciousness

35 verses
Sanskrit Recitation
Reciter: His Grace Rādhā-Gopīnātha Prabhu
Reading along — Chapter 13
13.1-2
arjuna uvāca
prakṛtiṁ puruṣaṁ caiva
kṣetraṁ kṣetra-jñam eva ca
etad veditum icchāmi
jñānaṁ jñeyaṁ ca keśava
śrī-bhagavān uvāca
idaṁ śarīraṁ kaunteya
kṣetram ity abhidhīyate
etad yo vetti taṁ prāhuḥ
kṣetra-jña iti tad-vidaḥ
13.3
kṣetra-jñaṁ cāpi māṁ viddhi
sarva-kṣetreṣu bhārata
kṣetra-kṣetrajñayor jñānaṁ
yat taj jñānaṁ mataṁ mama
13.4
tat kṣetraṁ yac ca yādṛk ca
yad-vikāri yataś ca yat
sa ca yo yat-prabhāvaś ca
tat samāsena me śṛṇu
13.5
ṛṣibhir bahudhā gītaṁ
chandobhir vividhaiḥ pṛthak
brahma-sūtra-padaiś caiva
hetumadbhir viniścitaiḥ
13.6-7
mahā-bhūtāny ahaṅkāro
buddhir avyaktam eva ca
indriyāṇi daśaikaṁ ca
pañca cendriya-gocarāḥ
icchā dveṣaḥ sukhaṁ duḥkhaṁ
saṅghātaś cetanā dhṛtiḥ
etat kṣetraṁ samāsena
sa-vikāram udāhṛtam
13.8-12
amānitvam adambhitvam
ahiṁsā kṣāntir ārjavam
ācāryopāsanaṁ śaucaṁ
sthairyam ātma-vinigrahaḥ
indriyārtheṣu vairāgyam
anahaṅkāra eva ca
janma-mṛtyu-jarā-vyādhi-
duḥkha-doṣānudarśanam
asaktir anabhiṣvaṅgaḥ
putra-dāra-gṛhādiṣu
nityaṁ ca sama-cittatvam
iṣṭāniṣṭopapattiṣu
mayi cānanya-yogena
bhaktir avyabhicāriṇī
vivikta-deśa-sevitvam
aratir jana-saṁsadi
adhyātma-jñāna-nityatvaṁ
tattva-jñānārtha-darśanam
etaj jñānam iti proktam
ajñānaṁ yad ato ’nyathā
13.13
jñeyaṁ yat tat pravakṣyāmi
yaj jñātvāmṛtam aśnute
anādi mat-paraṁ brahma
na sat tan nāsad ucyate
13.14
sarvataḥ pāṇi-pādaṁ tat
sarvato ’kṣi-śiro-mukham
sarvataḥ śrutimal loke
sarvam āvṛtya tiṣṭhati
13.15
sarvendriya-guṇābhāsaṁ
sarvendriya-vivarjitam
asaktaṁ sarva-bhṛc caiva
nirguṇaṁ guṇa-bhoktṛ ca
13.16
bahir antaś ca bhūtānām
acaraṁ caram eva ca
sūkṣmatvāt tad avijñeyaṁ
dūra-sthaṁ cāntike ca tat
13.17
avibhaktaṁ ca bhūteṣu
vibhaktam iva ca sthitam
bhūta-bhartṛ ca taj jñeyaṁ
grasiṣṇu prabhaviṣṇu ca
13.18
jyotiṣām api taj jyotis
tamasaḥ param ucyate
jñānaṁ jñeyaṁ jñāna-gamyaṁ
hṛdi sarvasya viṣṭhitam
13.19
iti kṣetraṁ tathā jñānaṁ
jñeyaṁ coktaṁ samāsataḥ
mad-bhakta etad vijñāya
mad-bhāvāyopapadyate
13.20
prakṛtiṁ puruṣaṁ caiva
viddhy anādī ubhāv api
vikārāṁś ca guṇāṁś caiva
viddhi prakṛti-sambhavān
13.21
kārya-kāraṇa-kartṛtve
hetuḥ prakṛtir ucyate
puruṣaḥ sukha-duḥkhānāṁ
bhoktṛtve hetur ucyate
13.22
puruṣaḥ prakṛti-stho hi
bhuṅkte prakṛti-jān guṇān
kāraṇaṁ guṇa-saṅgo ’sya
sad-asad-yoni-janmasu
13.23
upadraṣṭānumantā ca
bhartā bhoktā maheśvaraḥ
paramātmeti cāpy ukto
dehe ’smin puruṣaḥ paraḥ
13.24
ya evaṁ vetti puruṣaṁ
prakṛtiṁ ca guṇaiḥ saha
sarvathā vartamāno ’pi
na sa bhūyo ’bhijāyate
13.25
dhyānenātmani paśyanti
kecid ātmānam ātmanā
anye sāṅkhyena yogena
karma-yogena cāpare
13.26
anye tv evam ajānantaḥ
śrutvānyebhya upāsate
te ’pi cātitaranty eva
mṛtyuṁ śruti-parāyaṇāḥ
13.27
yāvat sañjāyate kiñcit
sattvaṁ sthāvara-jaṅgamam
kṣetra-kṣetrajña-saṁyogāt
tad viddhi bharatarṣabha
13.28
samaṁ sarveṣu bhūteṣu
tiṣṭhantaṁ parameśvaram
vinaśyatsv avinaśyantaṁ
yaḥ paśyati sa paśyati
13.29
samaṁ paśyan hi sarvatra
samavasthitam īśvaram
na hinasty ātmanātmānaṁ
tato yāti parāṁ gatim
13.30
prakṛtyaiva ca karmāṇi
kriyamāṇāni sarvaśaḥ
yaḥ paśyati tathātmānam
akartāraṁ sa paśyati
13.31
yadā bhūta-pṛthag-bhāvam
eka-stham anupaśyati
tata eva ca vistāraṁ
brahma sampadyate tadā
13.32
anāditvān nirguṇatvāt
paramātmāyam avyayaḥ
śarīra-stho ’pi kaunteya
na karoti na lipyate
13.33
yathā sarva-gataṁ saukṣmyād
ākāśaṁ nopalipyate
sarvatrāvasthito dehe
tathātmā nopalipyate
13.34
yathā prakāśayaty ekaḥ
kṛtsnaṁ lokam imaṁ raviḥ
kṣetraṁ kṣetrī tathā kṛtsnaṁ
prakāśayati bhārata
13.35
kṣetra-kṣetrajñayor evam
antaraṁ jñāna-cakṣuṣā
bhūta-prakṛti-mokṣaṁ ca
ye vidur yānti te param
Connection between Chapter 12 and Chapter 13 / Introduction to Jnana Section
In Chapters six through twelve, Lord Krishna concluded His description of bhakti-yoga. In Chapters thirteen to eighteen, He describes jnana-yoga
One may ask, “If bhakti is the culmination of the yoga-ladder, why is jnana presented after the section on bhakti?”
Understanding the connection between the bhakti section and the jnana section will help reveal the reason. In Text 12.7, Lord Krishna promised to save His devotees from the path of birth and death. Chapters Thirteen to Eighteen fulfill this promise by supplying the philosophical knowledge necessary to extricate oneself from material entanglement
We call this section the “Jnana Section” but in truth the entire Bhagavad-gita is bhakti. The first six chapters discuss how to achieve bhakti through one’s works (karma-yoga). The last six chapters discuss how to achieve bhakti through knowledge. The middle six chapters discuss bhakti itself
Jnana has its use in assisting our detachment from maya and our subsequent attachment to Krishna. When we utilize knowledge as a means to attain devotion it becomes a part of bhakti
Without the touch of bhakti both karma and jnana are useless. This is another reason why the discussion of bhakti comes in the middle of Bhagavad-gita, where it can remain in contact with both, karma and jnana, and thus lend them value
— Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Chapter Quiz · 12 questions
12 questions · Chapter 13
1. What is the kṣetra (field) and who is the kṣetrajña (knower of the field) per BG 13.1-2?
BG 13.2-3 — the body is kṣetra; one who knows it is kṣetrajña; Kṛṣṇa is kṣetrajña in all fields.
Refs: 13.2, 13.3
2. How does BG 13.6-7 enumerate the field (kṣetra)?
BG 13.6-7 details the constituents of the kṣetra.
Refs: 13.6, 13.7
3. Which qualities are described as jñāna in BG 13.8-12?
BG 13.8-12 — 20 qualities such as amānitvam adambhitvam etc. are declared 'knowledge'; what is contrary is ignorance.
Refs: 13.8, 13.9, 13.10, 13.11, 13.12
4. What is the Supreme Brahman described as in BG 13.13-18?
BG 13.13-18 describes the jñeyam — the object of knowledge — paradoxically as having senses yet none, near yet far, etc.
Refs: 13.13, 13.14, 13.15, 13.16
5. Per BG 13.20, what is prakṛti the cause of?
BG 13.20 — prakṛti causes effects, puruṣa is cause of experiencing happiness and distress.
Refs: 13.20
6. Why does the soul transmigrate to good or bad births, per BG 13.22?
BG 13.22 — 'kāraṇaṁ guṇa-saṅgo 'sya sad-asad-yoni-janmasu'.
Refs: 13.22
7. What is the upadrasta-anumantā in BG 13.23?
BG 13.23 — 'upadraṣṭānumantā ca bhartā bhoktā maheśvaraḥ' — Paramātmā is described thus.
Refs: 13.23
8. How may one see Paramātmā, per BG 13.25?
BG 13.25 — 'dhyānenātmani paśyanti kecit ātmānam ātmanā; anye sāṅkhyena yogena karma-yogena cāpare'.
Refs: 13.25
9. What is the realisation that liberates per BG 13.28-29?
BG 13.28-29 — equal vision of the Supersoul and recognition that prakṛti, not the self, performs activities.
Refs: 13.27, 13.28, 13.29
10. BG 13.32 compares the supreme soul to what regarding contamination?
BG 13.32 — 'yathā sarva-gataṁ saukṣmyād ākāśaṁ nopalipyate'.
Refs: 13.32
11. What analogy does BG 13.33 give for the sun and the body / field?
BG 13.33 — 'yathā prakāśayaty ekaḥ kṛtsnaṁ lokam imaṁ raviḥ; kṣetraṁ kṣetrī tathā kṛtsnaṁ prakāśayati bhārata'.
Refs: 13.33
12. What is the conclusion of Chapter 13 (BG 13.35)?
BG 13.35 — 'kṣetra-kṣetrajñayor evam antaraṁ jñāna-cakṣuṣā ... te yānti paramaṁ padaṁ'.
Refs: 13.35
Section 1 (13.1–13.7)
ARJUNA’S SIX QUESTIONS & KRISHNA EXPLAINS THE FIELD OF
Section overview

ACTIVITIES AND THE KNOWER OF THE FIELD

(Text 13.2 – 13.7 answers the 3rd, 4th and 5th questions)

Krishna explains the field of activities as the body, by which the soul engages within his allotted sphere of activities within the material world
The soul, the knower of the field, has knowledge of his own field of activities
Krishna, as the Supersoul, is the knower of all fields of activity of all living entities
Knowledge is to know the field and its knowers
ARJUNA’S SIX QUESTIONS AND KRISHNA EXPLAINS
THE FIELD OF ACTIVITIES AND THE KNOWER OF THE FIELD

Bhagavad-gītā 13.1-2

↗
అర్జున ఉవాచ ప్రకృతిం పురుషం చైవ క్షేత్రం క్షేత్రజ్ఞమేవ చ । ఏతద్వేదితుమిచ్ఛామి జ్ఞానం జ్ఞేయం చ కేశవ ॥ ౧ ॥ శ్రీభగవానువాచ ఇదం శరీరం కౌన్తేయ క్షేత్రమిత్యభిధీయతే । ఏతద్యో వేత్తి తం ప్రాహు: క్షేత్రజ్ఞ ఇతి తద్విద: ॥ ౨ ॥
arjuna uvāca
[arjuna uvaacha]
prakṛtiṁ puruṣaṁ caiva
[prakritim purusham chaiva]
kṣetraṁ kṣetra-jñam eva ca
[kshetram kshetra-jnam eva cha]
etad veditum icchāmi
[etad veditum ichchaami]
jñānaṁ jñeyaṁ ca keśava
[jnaanam jneyam cha keshava]
śrī-bhagavān uvāca
[shree-bhagavaan uvaacha]
idaṁ śarīraṁ kaunteya
[idam shareeram kaunteya]
kṣetram ity abhidhīyate
[kshetram ity abhidheeyate]
etad yo vetti taṁ prāhuḥ
[etad yo vetti tam praahuh]
kṣetra-jña iti tad-vidaḥ
[kshetra-jna iti tad-vidah]
arjunaḥ uvāca — Arjuna said prakṛtim — nature puruṣam — the enjoyer ca — also eva — certainly kṣetram — the field kṣetra - jñam — the knower of the field eva — certainly ca — also etat — all this veditum — to understand icchāmi — I wish jñānam — knowledge jñeyam — the object of knowledge ca — also keśava — O Kṛṣṇa śrī - bhagavān uvāca — the Personality of Godhead said idam — this śarīram — body kaunteya — O son of Kuntī kṣetram — the field iti — thus abhidhīyate — is called etat — this yaḥ — one who vetti — knows tam — he prāhuḥ — is called kṣetra - jñaḥ — the knower of the field iti — thus tat - vidaḥ — by those who know this .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
arjuna uvāca
arjunaḥ uvāca
Arjuna said
prakṛtiṁ puruṣaṁ caiva
prakṛtim
nature
puruṣam
the enjoyer
ca
also
kṣetraṁ kṣetra-jñam eva ca
eva
certainly
etad veditum icchāmi
jñānaṁ jñeyaṁ ca keśava
śrī-bhagavān uvāca
idaṁ śarīraṁ kaunteya
kṣetram ity abhidhīyate
kṣetram
the field
etad yo vetti taṁ prāhuḥ
kṣetra-jña iti tad-vidaḥ
kṣetra - jñam
the knower of the field
eva
certainly
ca
also
etat
all this
veditum
to understand
icchāmi
I wish
jñānam
knowledge
jñeyam
the object of knowledge
ca
also
keśava
O Kṛṣṇa
śrī - bhagavān uvāca
the Personality of Godhead said
idam
this
śarīram
body
kaunteya
O son of Kuntī
kṣetram
the field
iti
thus
abhidhīyate
is called
etat
this
yaḥ
one who
vetti
knows
tam
he
prāhuḥ
is called
kṣetra - jñaḥ
the knower of the field
iti
thus
tat - vidaḥ
by those who know this .
  • kṣetram — the field
    Neuter accusative. The body is named kṣetra — a cultivated plot — not deha (mere flesh). The word carries the weight of agriculture: something sown, tended, and harvested by karma. Every action plants a seed in this field.
  • kṣetra - jñaḥ — the knower of the field
    Compound of kṣetra + jña (knower). The very form establishes the categorical distinction Kṛṣṇa wants Arjuna to grasp: jña is not the field, jña owns it. The whole chapter unpacks this single word.
  • prakṛtim — nature
    Arjuna's opening question. Prakṛti is the technical Sāṅkhya term for material substance — root of all transformation. The Gītā will redefine it as Kṛṣṇa's energy, not an independent principle.
  • puruṣam — the enjoyer
    The conscious counterpart to prakṛti. Originally Sāṅkhya's silent witness; in the Gītā, the living being who experiences the field's modifications and, ultimately, the Supreme Puruṣa Himself.
  • jñeyam — the object of knowledge
    Gerundive — "that which is to be known." Knowledge in this chapter is not a state of mind; it is a relation to a definite object. The object will turn out to be Brahman, then Kṛṣṇa.
Arjuna said: O my dear Kṛṣṇa, I wish to know about prakṛti [nature], puruṣa [the enjoyer], and the field and the knower of the field, and of knowledge and the object of knowledge. The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: This body, O son of Kuntī, is called the field, and one who knows this body is called the knower of the field.

Arjuna was inquisitive about prakṛti (nature), puruṣa (the enjoyer), kṣetra (the field), kṣetra-jña (its knower), and knowledge and the object of knowledge. When he inquired about all these, Kṛṣṇa said that this body is called the field and that one who knows this body is called the knower of the field. This body is the field of activity for the conditioned soul. The conditioned soul is entrapped in material existence, and he attempts to lord it over material nature. And so, according to his capacity to dominate material nature, he gets a field of activity. That field of activity is the body. And what is the body? The body is made of senses. The conditioned soul wants to enjoy sense gratification, and, according to his capacity to enjoy sense gratification, he is offered a body, or field of activity. Therefore the body is called kṣetra, or the field of activity for the conditioned soul. Now, the person, who should not identify himself with the body, is called kṣetra-jña, the knower of the field. It is not very difficult to understand the difference between the field and its knower, the body and the knower of the body. Any person can consider that from childhood to old age he undergoes so many changes of body and yet is still one person, remaining. Thus there is a difference between the knower of the field of activities and the actual field of activities. A living conditioned soul can thus understand that he is different from the body. It is described in the beginning – dehino ’smin – that the living entity is within the body and that the body is changing from childhood to boyhood and from boyhood to youth and from youth to old age, and the person who owns the body knows that the body is changing. The owner is distinctly kṣetra-jña. Sometimes we think, “I am happy,” “I am a man,” “I am a woman,” “I am a dog,” “I am a cat.” These are the bodily designations of the knower. But the knower is different from the body. Although we may use many articles – our clothes, etc. – we know that we are different from the things used. Similarly, we also understand by a little contemplation that we are different from the body. I or you or anyone else who owns the body is called kṣetra-jña, the knower of the field of activities, and the body is called kṣetra, the field of activities itself. In the first six chapters of Bhagavad-gītā the knower of the body (the living entity) and the position by which he can understand the Supreme Lord are described. In the middle six chapters of the Bhagavad-gītā the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the relationship between the individual soul and the Supersoul in regard to devotional service are described. The superior position of the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the subordinate position of the individual soul are definitely defined in these chapters. The living entities are subordinate under all circumstances, but in their forgetfulness they are suffering. When enlightened by pious activities, they approach the Supreme Lord in different capacities – as the distressed, those in want of money, the inquisitive, and those in search of knowledge. That is also described. Now, starting with the Thirteenth Chapter, how the living entity comes into contact with material nature and how he is delivered by the Supreme Lord through the different methods of fruitive activities, cultivation of knowledge, and the discharge of devotional service are explained. Although the living entity is completely different from the material body, he somehow becomes related. This also is explained.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Translation
Arjuna said: O my dear Krsna, I wish to know about prakrti [nature], purusa [the enjoyer], and the field and the knower of the field, and of knowledge and the object of knowledge.
Commentary

And Krsna answers:

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Arjuna asks 6 questions about the following subject matters;

1. ‘Prakrti’ – Material Nature

2. ‘Purusha’ – The Enjoyer of matter

3. ‘Kshetra’ – Field in which one can act within the material world

4. ‘Kshetra-jna’ – Entity which experiences the field of actions

5. ‘Jnana’ – Knowledge and the process of acquiring knowledge (Explained in Texts 13.3, 13.8 – 13.12 and

13.24 – 13.25)

6. ‘Jneyam’ – Object of knowledge

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.1 Sri Sankaracharya did not comment on this sloka. Many editions of the Bhagavadgita do not contain this sloka৷৷ If this sloka is included, the total number of slokas in the Bhagavadgita is 701.
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.1 No commentary.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.1 Inclusion of this sloka, spoken by Arjuna, brings the total number of slokas in the Bhagavadgita to 701. Many versions of the Bhagavadgita, including the current commentary by Dr. S Sankaranarayan, do not include this sloka.
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.1 Arjuna said I wish to learn about Nature (matter) and the Spirit (soul), the field and the knower of the field, knowledge and that which ought to be known, O Kesava.
Commentary

13.1 प्रकृतिम् the Prakriti (matter)? पुरुषम् the Purusha (Spirit or Soul)? च and? एव even? क्षेत्रम् the field? क्षेत्रज्ञम् the knower of the field? एव even? च and? एतत् this? वेदितुम् to know? इच्छामि (I) wish? ज्ञानम् knowledge? ज्ञेयम् what ought to be known? च and? केशव O Kesava.Commentary In some of the books you will not find this verse. If you include this verse also? the number of verses of the Bhagavad Gita will come to 701. Some commentators look upon this verse as an interpolation.We have come to the beginning of the third section of the Gita. Essentially the same knowledge is taught in this section but there are more details.This discourse on Kshetra (matter) is commenced with a view to determine the essential nature of the possessor of the two Prakritis (Natures)? the lower and the higher? described in chapter VII? verses 4 and 5.In the previous discourse a description of the devotee who is dear to the Lord is given from verse 13 to the end. Now the estion arises What sort of knowledge of Truth should he possess The answer is given in this discourse.Nature is composed of the three alities. It transforms itself into the body? senses and the sensual objects to serve the two purposes of the individual soul? viz.? Bhoga (enjoyment) and Apavarga (liberation).The Gita is divided into three sections illustrative of the three words of the Mahavakya or Great Sentence of the Sama Veda -- TatTvamAsi (That thou art). In accordance with this view the first six chapters deal with the path of action or Karma Yoga and the nature of the thou (TvamPada). The next six chapters explain the path of devotion or Bhakti Yoga and the nature of That (TatPada). The last six chapters treat of the path of knowledge or Jnana Yoga and the nature of the middle term art (AsiPada) which establishes the identity of the individual and the Supreme Soul (Jiva Brahma Aikyam).Arjuna now wishes to know in detail the difference between Prakriti and Purusha (Matter and Spirit). He desires to have a discriminative knowledge of the difference between them.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.1 Swami Gambhirananda has not translated this sloka. Many editions of the Bhagavadgita do not contain this sloka, including the commentary by Sankaracharya. If this sloka is included, the total number of slokas in the Bhagavadgita is 701.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.1 "Arjuna asked: My Lord! Who is God and what is Nature; what is Matter and what is the Self; what is that they call Wisdom, and what is it that is worth knowing? I wish to have this explained.
Related values
Kshama (Forgiveness / Patience)Shraddha (Faith / Reverence)Adambhitva (Non-hypocrisy / Authenticity)
Related verses
BG 2.13 BG 13.3 BG 13.27 SB 3.26.10 SB 11.13.24 SB 7.7.19 CC Madhya 20.108 CC Madhya 8.128 CC Ādi 7.119 Kaṭha Upaniṣad 1.3.3Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.16
The body is called the field; one who knows the body is called the knower of the field — knowing the difference between field and knower is real knowledge.
Practical Applications
  • Practice distinguishing between the body (field) and yourself (knower).
  • Use this distinction during physical discomfort.
  • Cultivate witness consciousness as a daily anchor.
Reflection Questions
  • Where do I confuse the field with the knower?
  • What does sustained witnessing reveal?

Imagine a farmer surveying his field at sunrise. The soil, the furrows, the standing crop — all of this is the field. The one who walks its edges, knows what was sown and what has sprouted, is something other than the field itself. The body is that soil; you are the one who walks its edges. Real knowledge begins the moment you stop confusing the two.

Yājñavalkya teaches Maitreyī

When the sage Yājñavalkya prepared to leave home for the forest, he offered to divide his wealth between his two wives. Maitreyī asked the famous question: "If the whole earth were mine, would it make me immortal?" Yājñavalkya said no — wealth can enrich the field, but it cannot touch the knower.

He then taught her that the ātman, the knower within, is what is truly to be heard, reflected upon, and meditated upon. The field changes, decays, and is left behind; the knower remains. The Bṛhad-āraṇyaka preserves this exchange as the seed-teaching that the Gītā here unfolds in technical form.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.3

↗
క్షేత్రజ్ఞం చాపి మాం విద్ధి సర్వక్షేత్రేషు భారత । క్షేత్రక్షేత్రజ్ఞయోర్జ్ఞానం యత్తజ్జ్ఞానం మతం మమ ॥ ౩ ॥
kṣetra-jñaṁ cāpi māṁ viddhi
[kshetra-jnam chaapi maam viddhi]
sarva-kṣetreṣu bhārata
[sarva-kshetreshu bhaarata]
kṣetra-kṣetrajñayor jñānaṁ
[kshetra-kshetrajnayor jnaanam]
yat taj jñānaṁ mataṁ mama
[yat taj jnaanam matam mama]
kṣetra - jñam — the knower of the field ca — also api — certainly mām — Me viddhi — know sarva — all kṣetreṣu — in bodily fields bhārata — O son of Bharata kṣetra — the field of activities (the body) kṣetra - jñayoḥ — and the knower of the field jñānam — knowledge of yat — that which tat — that jñānam — knowledge matam — opinion mama — My .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
kṣetra-jñaṁ cāpi māṁ viddhi
kṣetra - jñam
the knower of the field
ca
also
api
certainly
mām
Me
viddhi
know
sarva-kṣetreṣu bhārata
sarva
all
kṣetreṣu
in bodily fields
bhārata
O son of Bharata
kṣetra-kṣetrajñayor jñānaṁ
kṣetra
the field of activities (the body)
kṣetra - jñayoḥ
and the knower of the field
jñānam
knowledge of
yat taj jñānaṁ mataṁ mama
yat
that which
tat
that
jñānam
knowledge
matam
opinion
mama
My .
  • mām — Me
    The pivot of the verse. Kṛṣṇa identifies Himself — personally, with the first-person pronoun — as the knower in every body. Impersonal Brahman cannot say mām. This single word ruins every reading that strips the personhood from the Supersoul.
  • viddhi — know
    Imperative from √vid. Not a request, not a suggestion — a command. Kṛṣṇa does not invite Arjuna to consider; He orders him to recognize.
  • sarva — all
    Universalizes the claim. Not in some bodies, not in pure bodies — in all bodies, including the body of one's enemy on the battlefield. The word will return again and again in this chapter.
  • kṣetreṣu — in bodily fields
    Locative plural — Kṛṣṇa is in *every* kṣetra. The plural plants the seed for the equal-vision teaching of verses 27–29.
  • jñānam — knowledge
    Re-defined here on Kṛṣṇa's own authority (matam mama, "My opinion"). Knowledge is not data about the world; it is grasping the field/knower distinction with the Lord at its apex.
O scion of Bharata, you should understand that I am also the knower in all bodies, and to understand this body and its knower is called knowledge. That is My opinion.

While discussing the subject of the body and the knower of the body, the soul and the Supersoul, we shall find three different topics of study: the Lord, the living entity, and matter. In every field of activities, in every body, there are two souls: the individual soul and the Supersoul. Because the Supersoul is the plenary expansion of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa says, “I am also the knower, but I am not the individual knower of the body. I am the superknower. I am present in every body as the Paramātmā, or Supersoul.” One who studies the subject matter of the field of activity and the knower of the field very minutely, in terms of this Bhagavad-gītā, can attain to knowledge. The Lord says, “I am the knower of the field of activities in every individual body.” The individual may be the knower of his own body, but he is not in knowledge of other bodies. The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is present as the Supersoul in all bodies, knows everything about all bodies. He knows all the different bodies of all the various species of life. A citizen may know everything about his patch of land, but the king knows not only his palace but all the properties possessed by the individual citizens. Similarly, one may be the proprietor of the body individually, but the Supreme Lord is the proprietor of all bodies. The king is the original proprietor of the kingdom, and the citizen is the secondary proprietor. Similarly, the Supreme Lord is the supreme proprietor of all bodies. The body consists of the senses. The Supreme Lord is Hṛṣīkeśa, which means “the controller of the senses.” He is the original controller of the senses, just as the king is the original controller of all the activities of the state; the citizens are secondary controllers. The Lord says, “I am also the knower.” This means that He is the superknower; the individual soul knows only his particular body. In the Vedic literature, it is stated as follows: kṣetrāṇi hi śarīrāṇi bījaṁ cāpi śubhāśubhe tāni vetti sa yogātmā tataḥ kṣetra-jña ucyate This body is called the kṣetra, and within it dwells the owner of the body and the Supreme Lord, who knows both the body and the owner of the body. Therefore He is called the knower of all fields. The distinction between the field of activities, the knower of activities, and the supreme knower of activities is described as follows. Perfect knowledge of the constitution of the body, the constitution of the individual soul, and the constitution of the Supersoul is known in terms of Vedic literature as jñāna. That is the opinion of Kṛṣṇa. To understand both the soul and the Supersoul as one yet distinct is knowledge. One who does not understand the field of activity and the knower of activity is not in perfect knowledge. One has to understand the position of prakṛti (nature), puruṣa (the enjoyer of nature) and īśvara (the knower who dominates or controls nature and the individual soul). One should not confuse the three in their different capacities. One should not confuse the painter, the painting and the easel. This material world, which is the field of activities, is nature, and the enjoyer of nature is the living entity, and above them both is the supreme controller, the Personality of Godhead. It is stated in the Vedic language (in the Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.12), bhoktā bhogyaṁ preritāraṁ ca matvā/ sarvaṁ proktaṁ tri-vidhaṁ brahmam etat. There are three Brahman conceptions: prakṛti is Brahman as the field of activities, and the jīva (individual soul) is also Brahman and is trying to control material nature, and the controller of both of them is also Brahman, but He is the factual controller. In this chapter it will also be explained that out of the two knowers, one is fallible and the other is infallible. One is superior and the other is subordinate. One who understands the two knowers of the field to be one and the same contradicts the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who states here very clearly, “I am also the knower of the field of activity.” One who misunderstands a rope to be a serpent is not in knowledge. There are different kinds of bodies, and there are different owners of the bodies. Because each individual soul has his individual capacity for lording it over material nature, there are different bodies. But the Supreme also is present in them as the controller. The word ca is significant, for it indicates the total number of bodies. That is the opinion of Śrīla Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa. Kṛṣṇa is the Supersoul present in each and every body apart from the individual soul. And Kṛṣṇa explicitly says here that real knowledge is to know that the Supersoul is the controller of both the field of activities and the finite enjoyer.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
3. O descendent of Bharata, know that I also am the knower of the field in all bodies. According to Me, knowledge means knowledge of the field and knowledge of the two types of knowers of the field.
Commentary

It has been said that the jīva is the knower of the field because of his knowledge of his body. But the Paramātmā also is the knower of the field because He knows all bodies completely. “Know that I, the Paramātmā situated as the monitor in all the bodies, am the knower of the field. Each jīva has knowledge of his particular body, but not of all bodies. But I, though one person, have knowledge of all bodies completely.” This distinction should be understood. What is knowledge? Knowledge of the jīva and Paramātmā, both knowers of the field, along with knowledge of the field, is called knowledge according to Me. Explaining this verse in a different way, saying that there is only one jīva in existence, one knower of the field, [Note: This is the case in Māyāvāda philosophy. Baladeva in his commentary explains and defeats this interpretation.] cannot be accepted, since that opinion is contradicted by the later statement uttamaḥ puruṣas tv anyaḥ paramātmety udāhṛtaḥ: but there is another supreme person called the Paramātmā. (15.17)

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
3. O descendent of Bharata, know that I alone am the knower of the field in all bodies. According to Me, knowledge means knowledge of the two knowers and the field.
Commentary

The Lord has spoken of the jīva as the “knower of the field,” since he has knowledge about the body. Now the Lord says that the paramātmā is also the knower of the field. O Bhārata, know that I alone am the knower of the field in all fields (bodies.) The word api indicates exclusivity. The jīvas know their own individual bodies as means of enjoyment and liberation, as citizens know the field they own and cultivate. But I alone, the Lord of all, know all these fields (bodies) which must be supported by Me for their very existence. Thus I am the knower of all fields, like a king. Smṛti states that the Lord of all, being the lord of all the fields, is the knower of aḷl the fields: kṣetrāṇi hi śarīrāṇi bījaṁ cāpi śubhāśubhe tāni vetti sa yogātmā tataḥ kṣetrajṣa ucyate The Supreme Lord, yogātmā, knows these bodies as fields and as the source of piety and sin. He is called the knower of the field. Mahābhārata 12.339.6 What is knowledge? I consider knowledge to be the ability to distinguish between the two knowers of the field—the jīva and the Lord— and relation of these two with the field (prakṛti or the body). What is other than this I consider ignorance. The following should be understood in this regard. Though prakṛti, jīva and the Lord combine together, there is no mixture of their respective qualities as the enjoyed, the enjoyer and the controller, as would happen in a dyed cloth. Thus the writer of Vedānta says na tu dṛṣṭānta-bhāvāt: the Lord is not tainted by the material world, as there are examples showing this. (Vedānta Sūtra 2.9) The śrutis also speak of the distinction of qualities between the items: pṛthag ātmānaṁ preritāraṁ ca matvā juṣṭas tatas tenāmṛtatvam eti Knowing himself to be different from He who inspires actions, invoking the pleasure of the Lord, that person attains liberation. Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.6 jṣājṣau dvāv ajāv īśānīśānāv ajā hy ekā bhoktṛ-bhogārtha-yuktā One is omniscient, the other ignorant. One is the controller, the other is controlled. Both are without birth. The unborn prakṛti is associated with the jīva for his enjoyment. Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.9 kṣaraṁ pradhānam amṛtākṣaraṁ haraḥ kṣarātmānāv īśate deva ekaḥ The pradhāna is mutable. The jīva (hara—taker of prakṛti) is immutable, being eternal. The one Lord controls the pradhāna and the jīva. Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.10 bhoktā bhogyaṁ preritāraṁ ca matvā sarvaṁ proktaṁ trividhaṁ brahmam etat This brahman has been described as three: the enjoyer, the object of enjoyment and the inspirer. Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.12 ajām ekām lohita-śukla-kṛṣṇāṁ bahvīḥ prajāḥ sṛjamānāṁ sarūpāḥ ajo hy eko juṣamāṇo’nuśete jahāty enāṁ bhukta-bhogāṁ ajo’nyaḥ The unborn is situated with the one unborn prakṛti which is red, white and black and which produces many entities of similar form. One jīva enjoys and associates closely with those forms, while another jīva, having enjoyed, gives up those objects of enjoyment. Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 4.5 pradhāna-kṣetrajṣa-patir guṇeśaḥ He is the master of matter and jīva, endowed with all good qualities. Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.16 From these verses it should understood that the Lord maintains distinction from matter and jīva (kṣetra and kṣetra jṣa), indicated by the words kṣara and akṣara, even though He associates with them. As will be shown by verses like dvāv imau puruṣau (BG 15.16), real knowledge means understanding the separate existence of the Lord, jīva and prakṛti, though they mix together. Those who advocate existence of only one ātmā (such as Śaṅkara) make the following claim. Taking the identity of knower of the field previously defined as the jīva with the Lord by grammatical identity of case (kṣetera jṣam = mām, know that the knower of the field (jīva) is I), they say that when the Lord says “Know that I am the knower of all fields,” it means “Know that I am the jīva. The jīva and the Lord are the same.” Even the Supreme Lord, by ignorance, takes Himself to be a knower of the field, a jīva, just as a person in error takes a rope to be a snake. In order to dispel that illusion of being a mere jīva, this statement of oneness is made by the Lord, the highest authority of truth. By the statement “I, Supreme Brahman, am the jīva” the error of thinking Himself to be an individual jīva (different from other jīvas and the Lord) is destroyed, just as illusion of a snake is destroyed by saying “this rope is not a snake.” That argument is rejected, because of the impossibility of teaching anything in this way. [Note: If the Lord is in ignorance how can He teach? If he is beyond duality, then He has no other object to whom He can teach.] One should consult the commentary on dehino’smin (BG 2.13) for the explanation. In this manner, another interpretation is apt. The word ca indicates “all fields.” Know that I alone am the field as a whole and knower of the field in all bodies. Know that the field and knower of the field are not different from Me since I pervade everything and everything is dependent on Me for its manifestation and continued existence. Thus I consider knowledge as knowing Me to be the field and knower of the field as I am one with them by maintaining and pervading them both. This I consider knowledge. Other ideas are not.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

Three questions have been answered. The first one: What is ksetra? and then: What is ksetrajna?. One kind is the soul and the other kind is the Supersoul. What is the difference between the soul and the Supersoul? The Supersoul knows all bodies, all fields. He is like the King who knows what is going on in everyone's field. But the soul only knows what is going on in his own field, his own body. What is jnana? ‑ To know the difference between the field and the knower of the field, specially the Supersoul. To know about the body, the soul and the Supersoul ‑ this is knowledge. We have already come in contact with this point in Chapter Five (a more jnana type of chapter), where we have understood the difference between these three aspects: the soul, the Supersoul and the body. If one knows that he is not this body, he is enlightened ‑ this is jnana, coming from the mo goodness ‑ but this is not enough. In order to bring one to the platform of brahma‑bhuta, one needs knowledge of the Supersoul ‑ the Supreme Lord. Also the living entity knows only his own body but imperfectly. And the Supersoul knows all bodies and perfectly. Srila Prabhupada says in his Purport: "Perfect knowledge of the constitution of the body, the constitution of the individual soul, and the constitution of the Supersoul is known in terms of Vedic literature as jnana. That is the opinion of Krsna. To understand both the soul and the Supersoul as one yet distinct is knowledge. One who does not understand the field of activity and the knower of activity is not in perfect knowledge. One has to understand the position of prakrti (nature), purusa (the enjoyer of nature) and isvara (the knower who dominates or controls nature and the individual soul). One should not confuse the three in their different capacities." Srila Prabhupada in his Purport is actually giving the answers to questions 1 and 2, because he is saying what is prakrti and what is purusa. And he is explainning the two kinds of purusas.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

The body, in this chapter, is often referred to as a kṣetra, a field. Just as different crops grow in a

farmer’s field according to the seeds he has planted, a living entity’s happiness and distress similarly

grow in his body—his field of activities—according to his previous actions. The living entity, as the

kṣetra-jña, knows his own body, but Kṛṣṇa says that another kṣetra-jña knows all bodies. That

kṣetra-jña is the Supersoul. A farmer, like the soul, knows all about his own field, but the king, like

the Supersoul in everyone’s heart, is the ultimate controller and knower of each and every field in

his kingdom. In addition, the soul can only imperfectly know his own body; the Supersoul has com-

plete and perfect knowledge of all bodies.

Kṛṣṇa in this verse has defined knowledge (jñāna) as knowing the body, the soul and the Supersoul.

He will complete His description of knowledge in texts 8–12 and 24–37, by explaining the process

of achieving knowledge.

Kṛṣṇa already discussed this point in Chapter Five: The living entity’s realization that “I am not this

body” constitutes enlightenment. Such enlightenment, however, born of the mode of goodness, is

insufficient for liberation. When his knowledge increases to include knowledge of the Supersoul, he

becomes liberated. Thus to come to the brahma-bhūta (liberated) platform, one needs to know the

Supersoul.

Śaìkarācārya and other impersonalists have commented extensively on this verse. They say that

the word ca means: “You should know that he who is the knower within the body is also (ca) Me.

i.e., the soul is the same as the Supersoul.” Were that true, however, Kṛṣṇa would be contradicting

His own statements in Chapter Fifteen wherein He clearly makes distinctions between the soul and

the Supersoul. If the soul and the Supersoul are factually one, as Māyāvādīs claim, how could one

aspect of the “one,” which is by definition undifferentiated, give knowledge to the other aspect of

the “one”? How could the other aspect be lacking? How could something undifferentiated even

possess an aspect? If both were “one,” absolutely no differentiation (even in terms of knowing and

not knowing) could exist.

Śrīla Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura explains:

This body, equipped with senses, is the facility for material contact and is the so-called field

because it is the ground on which the tree of material existence grows. The jīva who knows it is

called the kṣetra-jña, both in his condition of bondage, wherein he identifies himself with the body

(thinking in terms of “I” and “mine”), and in his liberated condition, in which he does not indentify

with the body (or conceptions of “I” and “mine”).

Like a farmer, the kṣetra-jña is also the enjoyer of the fruits of the tree in his field, as de-

scribed by the Personality of Godhead: “The village vultures eat one fruit of this tree, while the for-

est swans eat another. One who, by the grace of worshipable souls, understands this tree,

composed of māyā and appearing in many forms, is an actual knower of the Vedas.” This verse

means: Vultures, who live outside a village, are called vultures (ghṛdhra) because they “seize”

[sense gratification], and they are like the conditioned jīvas, who eat one fruit of this tree—misery.

Even if they attain heaven, their experience is ultimately miserable. The swans living in the forest,

however, are like liberated jīvas. They eat the fruit of happiness. The complete enjoyment of libera-

tion is derived from their experience.

Bhagavad Gita Notes

Thus the one tree of material existence appears in many forms, as the means of attaining

hell, heaven and liberation. Because it is born from the Lord’s external energy, it is called māyā-

mayam. By the grace of the worshipable spiritual masters, one is made to understand this tree.

Those who are in knowledge of the kṣetra and kṣetra-jña actually know the Vedas.

Śrīla Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa explains: “This body is percieved by ignorant persons as different kinds

of selves: ‘I am a demigod,’ ‘I am a human,’ ‘I am stout’ and so on. Nonetheless, one who knows

that in all conditions (sleeping, sitting, etc.) the body is separate from the self and is the means of

the self’s enjoyment and liberation—that person, distinct as the knower of the body, which is his

object of knowledge—is called the kṣetra-jña by experts in knowledge of the factual identity of the

field and the knower of the field.”

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.3 Ca api, and; viddhi, understand; mam, Me, the supreme God who is transcendental; to be the ksetrajnam, 'Knower of the field' with the characterisitics noted above; sarva-ksetresu, in all the fields. The idea is this: Know the 'Knower of the field'- who has become diversified by limiting adjuncts in the form of numerous 'fields' ranging from Brahma to a clump of grass-as free from differentiations resulting from all the limiting adjuncts, and as beyond the range of such words and ideas as existece, nonexistence, etc. O scion of the Bharata dynasty, since there remains nothing to be known apart from the true nature of the field, the knower of the field and God, therefore; tat, that; is jnanam, Knowledge, right knowledge; yat, which; is the jnanam, knowledge; ksetra-ksetrajnayoh, of the field and the knower of the field-which are the two knowables-, and by which Knowledge the field and the knower of the field are made objects of knowledge. This is mama, My, God Vishu's; matam, opinion. Objection: Well, if it be that in all the field there exists God alone, and none else other than Him, as the enjoyer, then God will become a mundane being; or, due to the absence of any mundane creature other than God, there will arise the contingency of the negation of mundance existence. And both these are undesirable, since the scriptures dealing with bondage, Liberation and their causes will become useless, and also becuase they contradict such valid means of knowledge as direct perception. In the first place, mundane existence which is characterized by happiness, sorrow and their cause is apprehended through direct perception. Besides, from the perception of variety in the world it can be inferred that mundane existence results from virtue and vice. All this becomes illogical if God and the individual soul be one. Reply: No, because this becomes justifiable owing to the difference between Knowledge and ignorance. 'These two, viz that which is know as Knowledge and that which is known as ignorance are widely contradictory, and they follow divergent courses' (Ka. 1.2.4.); and similarly, the different results, viz Liberation and enjoyment, belonging (respectively) to those Knowledge and ignorance, have also been pointed out to be contrary by saying that Liberation is the goal of Knowledge, and enjoyment is the result of ignorance (see Ka. 1.2.2). Vyasa, also has said so: 'Now, there are these two paths' (Mbh Sa. 241.6) etc. and, 'There are only these two paths,' etc. Here (in the Gita) also, two kinds of steadfastness have been stated. And it is understood from the Vedas, the Smrtis and reason that ignorance together with its effects has to be destroyed by Knowledge. As for the Vedic texts, they are: 'If one has realized here, then there is truth; if he has not realized here, then there is great destruction' (Ke. 2.5); 'Knowing Him in this way, one becomes Immortal here' (Nr. Pu. 6); 'There is no other path to go by' (Sv. 3.8); 'The enlightened man is not afraid of anything' (Tai. 2.9.1). On the other hand, (the texts) with regard to the unenlightened person are: 'Then, he is smitten with fear' (Tai. 2.7.1); 'Living in the midst of ognorance' (Ka. 1.2.5); One who knows Brahman becomes Brahman indeed. In his line is not born anyone who does not know Brahman' (Mu. 3.2.9); '(While he who worships another god thinking,) "He is one, and I am another," does not know. He is like an animal to the gods' (Br. 1.4.10). He who is a knower of the Self, 'He becomes all this (Universe)' (Br. 1.4.10); 'When men will fold up space like (folding) leather, (then) there will be cessation of sorrow, without knowing the Deity' (Sv. 6.9). There are thousands of texts like these. And the Smrti texts (from the Gita) are: 'Knowledge remains covered by ignorance. Thery the creatures become deluded' (5.15); 'Here itself is rirth conered by them whose minds are established on sameness' (5.19); 'Since by seeing eally the God who is present alike everywhere (he does not injure the Self by the Self, therefore he attains the supreme Goal)' (13.28), etc. And as for reason, there is the text, 'Men avoid snakes, tips of kusa-grass as also well when they are aware of them. Some fall into them owing to ignorance. Thus, see the special result arising from knowledge' (Mbh. Sa. 201.17). Similarly, it is known that an unelightened person, who identifies himself with the body etc. and who practises righteousness and unrighteousness under the impulsion of attachment and aversion, takes birth and dies. It cannot be reasonably denied by anyone that, those who see the Self as different from the body etc. become liberated as a result of the cessation of righteous and unrighteous conduct, which depends on the destruction of attachment and aversion. The being so, the Knower of the field, who is reality is God Himself, appears to have become a mundane soul owing to the various adjuncts which are products of ignorance; as for instance the individual soul becomes identified with the body etc. For it is a well-known fact in the case of all creatures that their self-identify with the body etc. which are not-Self is definitely caused by ignorance. Just as, when a stump, of a tree is firmly regarded as a man, the alities of a man do not thery come to exist in the stump, nor do the alities of the stump come to the person, similarly the property ofconsciousness does not come to the body, nor those of the body to consciousness. It is not proper that the Self should be identified with happiness, sorrow, delusion, etc., since they, like decrepitude and death, are eally the products of ignorance. Objection: May it not be said that this is not so, becuase of dissimilarity? The stump and the man, which are verily objects of perception, are superimposed on each other through ignorance by their perceiver. On the other hand, in the case of the body and the Self,, the mutual superimposition occurs verily between a knower and an object of perception. Thus, the illustration is not eally applicable. Therefore, may it not be that the properties of the body, though objects of knowledge, belong to the Self which is the knower? Reply: No, since there arises the contingency of (the Self) becoming devoid of consciousness! If alities such as happiness, sorrow, delusion, desire, etc. of the body etc., which are the field and are objects of knowledge, indeed belong to the knower, then it will be necessary to explain the particular reason why some of the alities of the object of knowledge-the field-superimposed through ignorance belong to the Self, while decrepitude, death, etc. do not. (On the contrary) it is possible to infer that they (happiness etc.) do not pertain to the Self, since, like decrepitude etc., they are superimposed on the Self through ignorance, and because they are either avoidable or acceptable. This being so, the mundane state, consisting of agentship and enjoyership pertaining to the objects of knowledge, is superimposed on the knower through ignorance. Hence, nothing of the knower is affected thery-in the same way as nothing of the sky is affected by the superimposition of surface, diret, etc. (on it) by fools. Such being the case, not the least touch of the mundane state is to be apprehended with regard to the almighty [see footnote on p.5, and p.168.] God, the Knower of the field, even though He exists in all the fields. For it is nowhere seen in the world that anybody is benefitted or harmed by a ality attributed to him through ignorance. As for the statement that the illustration is not eally applicable-that is wrong. Objection: How? Reply: Because what is intended as common between the illustration and the thing illustrated is merely the superimposition through ignorance. There is no disagreement as to that. However, as for your contention that the illustration fails with regard to the Knower, that too has been shown to be inapt by citing the example of decrepitude etc. [If it be held that objects of experience may be superimposed on one another, but they cannot be superimposed on the experiencer, the answer is that this cannot be a universal proposition. For decrepitude and death, which are matters of experience, are superimposed on the Self, the experiencer.] Objection: May it not be that the Knower of the field becomes a mundane being owing to his having ignorance? Reply: No, because ignorance is of the nature of tamas. Since ignorance has the nature of covering, it is indeed a notion born of tamas; it makes one perceive contrarily, or it arouses doubt, or it leads to non-perception. For it disappears with the dawn of discrimination. And the three kind of ignorance, viz non-perception etc. [Etc: false perception and doubt.], are experienced when there are such defects as blindness etc. which are forms of tamas and have the nature of veiling. [It is known through the process of agreement and difference that false perception etc. arise from some defects,and they are not the alities of the Self.] Objection: Here it is asserted that if this be the case, then ignorance is a ality of the knower? Reply: No, for the defects such as blindness are seen to belong to the eye which is an organ. As for your notion that 'ignorance is a ality of the experiencer, and the very fact of being possessed of the ality of ignorance is what constitutes the mundane state of the Knower of the field; the assertion which was made (by the Vedantin) in that connection, "that the Knower of th field is God Himself and not a mundane being, " is improper,'-this is not so. As for example: Since such defects as false perception etc. are seen to belong to the organ eye, therefore false perception etc. or their causes, viz defects like blindness etc., do not belong to the perceiver. Just as blindness of the eyes does not pertain to the perceiver since on being curved through treatment it is not seen in the perceiver, similarly notions like non-perception, false perception, doubt, and their causes should, in all cases, pertain to some organ; not to the perceiver, the Knower of the field. And since they are objects of perception, they are not alities of the Knower in the same way that light is of a lamp. Just because they are objects of perception, they are cognized as different from one's own Self. Besides, it is denied by all schools of thought that in Liberation, when all the organs depart, there is any association with such defects as ignorance etc. If they (the defects) be the alities of the Self Itself, the Knower of the field, as heat is of fire, then there can never be a dissociation from them. Again, since there can be no association with or dissociation from anything for the immutable, formless Self which is all-pervading like space, therefore it is established that the Knower of the field is ever identical with God. This follows alos from the utternance of the Lord, 'Being without beginning and without alities' (31), etc. Objection: Well, if this be so, then, owing to the nonexistence of the world and the mundane creatures, there will arise the defect of the uselessness of the scriptures, etc. Reply: No, since this (defect) is admitted by all. A defect that is admitted by all who believe in the Self is not to be explained by one alone! Objection: How has this been admitted by all? Reply: People of all schools of thought who believe in the Self admit that there is no worldly behaviour or the behaviour of a worldling in the liberated ones. Yet, in their case (i.e. in those various schools), it is not admitted that there is any possibility of such a defect as the scriptures becoming useless, etc. Similarly, in our case let the scriptures be useless when the knowers of the field become identified with God; and purposeful within the sphere of ignorance. This is just as in the case of all the dualists, where it is admitted that the scriptures etc. become useful in the state of bondage, not in the state of Liberation. Objection: Well, for us all dualists, bondage and Liberation of the Self are real in the truest sense. So, when things to be renounced or accepted as also the means thereto are real, the scriptures etc. become meaningful. On the other hand, may it not be that for the non-dualists, since duality deos not exist in truest sense, it being the creation of ignorance, therefore the state of bondage of the Self is not ultimately real, and hence the scriptures etc. become purposeless as they remain shorn of a subject-matter? Reply: No, since it is not logical that the Self should have different states. If this were possible at all, then the states of bondage and freedom of the Self should be simultaneous, or successive. As to that, they cannot occur simultaneously, since they are contradictory-like rest and motion in the same object. Should they occur successively and without being caused, then there will arise the contingency of there being no Liberation; if they occur through some cause, then, since they do not exist inherently, there arises the contingency of their being ultimately unreal. In this case also the assumption becomes falsified. Moreover, when ascertaining the precedence and succession of the states of bondage and Liberation, the state of bondage will have to be considered as being the earlier and having no beginning, but an end. And that is contrary to valid means of knowledge. Similarly it will have to be admitted that the state of Liberation has a beginning, but no end- which is certainly opposed to valid means of knowledge. And it is not possible to established eternality for something that has states nd undergoes a change from one state to another. On the other hand, if for avoiding the defect of non-eternality the different states of bondage and Liberation be not assumed, then, even for the dualists such defects as the purposelessness of the scriptures become certainly unavoidable. Thus, the situation being similar (for both), it is not for the Advaitin (alone) to refute the objection. Nor do the scriptures become purposeless, because the scriptures are applicable to the commonly known unenlightened person. It is indeed in the case of the ignorant person-not in the case of the enlightened one-that there occurs the perception of identity of the Self with the effect (i.e. enjoyership) and the cause (i.e. agentship) which are not-Self. For, in the case of the enlightened persons, it is impossible that, after the dawn of the realization of non-identity of the Self with effect and cause, they can have Self identification with these as 'I'. Surely, not even a downright fool, or a lunatic and such others, see water and fire or shade and light as identical; what to speak of a discriminating person! Therefore, such being the case, the scriptures dealing with injunction and prohibition do not concern a person who sees the distinction of the Self from effect and cause. For, when Devadatta is ordered to do som work with the words, 'You do this,' Visnumitra who happens to be there does not, even on hearing the ?nd, conclude, 'I have been ordered.' But this conclusion is reasonable when the person for whom the order is meant is not understood. So also with regard to cause and effect. Objection: Can it not be that, even after having realized the Self as different from effect and cuase, it is ite reasonable from the standpoint of natural relationship, [Natural relationship-Self-identification with the body through ignorance.] that with regard to the scriptures one should have the understanding, 'I am enjoined to adotp the means that yields a desired result, and am porhibited from adopting the means that leads to an undesirable result'? As for instance, in the case of a father and son, or between others, even though there exists the awareness of the distinction between each other, still there is the comprehension of the implication of the injunctions and prohibitions meant for one as being also meant for the other. [In the (Br. (1.5.17) we read, 'Now therefore the entrusting: When a man thinks he will die, he says to his son, "You are Brahman, you are the sacrifice, and you are the world,"' etc. It has been enjoined here in this manner that the son should accept as his own all the duties thus entrusted to him by the father. Similarly, it is understood that when a son in unable to perform his own duties, the father has to accept them. So also in the case of brothers and others. Thus, in the case of the enlightened person also, though there is a comprehension of his own distinction from effect and cause, still, owing to his earlier relationship with ignorance, body, etc., there is no contradiction in his understanding that the injunctions and prohibitions are meant for him.] Reply: No, since identification of the Self with effect and cause is possible only before attaining the knowledge of the Self as distinct (from them). It is only after one has followed (or eschewed) what is enjoined or prohibited by the scriptures that he comprehends his own distinction from the effect and cause; not before. [In B.S. (3.4.26-7) it is said that the merit earned by the performance of scriptural duties helps to generate knowledge of Brahman. Therefore these duties are not meant for the enlightened. (By following what is enjoined, and avoiding what is prohibited, one's mind becomes purified, and then only one understands he is different from cause and effect-agentship and enjoyership.-Tr.)] Therefore it is established that the scriptures dealing with injunctions and prohibitions are meant for the ignorant. Objection: Well, if (injunctions and prohibitions) such as, 'One who desires heaven shall perform sacrifices', 'One should not eat poisoned meat,' etc. be not observed by those who have realized the Self as distinct and by those who view only the body as the Self, then, from the absence of any observer of those (injunctions etc.) there would follow the uselessness of the scriptures. Reply: No, because engagement in or abstention from actions follows from what is ordained by the scriptures. As for one who has realized the identity of the Lord and the knower of the field, one who has realized Brahman-he does not engage in action. Similarly, even the person who does not believe in the Self does not engage in action, under the idea that the other world does not exist. However, one who has inferred the existence of the Self on the ground of the wellknown fact that study of the scriptures dealing with injunctions and prohibitions becomes otherwise purposeless, who has no knowledge of the essential nature of the Self, and in whom has arisen hankering for the results of actions-he faithfully engages in action. This is a matter of direct perception to all to us. Hence, the scriptures are not purposeless. Objection: May it not be that the scriptures will become meaningless when, by noticing abstention from action in the case of men with discrimination, their followers too will abstain? Reply: No, because discrimination arises in some rare person only. For, as at present, some rare one among many people comes to possess discrimination. Besides, fools do not follow one who has discrimination, because (their) engagement in action is impelled by defects such as attachment etc. And they are seen to get engaged in such acts as black magic. Moreover, engagement in action is natural. Verily has it been said (by the Lord), 'But it is Nature that acts' (5.14). Therefore, the mundane state consists of nothing but ignorance, and is an object of perception (to the ignorant man who sees it) just as it appears to him. Ignorance and its effects do not belong to the Knower of the feild, the Absolute. Moreover, false knowledge cannot taint the supreme Reality. For, water in a mirage cannot taint the supreme Reality. For, water in a mirage cannot make a desert muddy with its moisture. Similarly, ignorance cannot act in any way on the Knower of the field. Hence has this been said, 'And understand Me to be knower of the field,' as also, 'Knowledge remains covered by ignorance' (5.15). Objection: Then, what is this that even the learned say like the worldly people, 'Thus [Possessed of aristorcracy etc.] am I,' 'This [Body, wife, etc.] verily belongs to Me'? Reply: Listen. This is that learnedness which consists in seeing the field as the Self! On the contrary, should they realize the unchanging Knower of the field, then they will not crave for enjoyment or action with the idea, 'May this be mine.' Enjoyment and action are mere perversions. This being so, the ignorant man engages in action owing to his desire for results. On the other hand, in the case of an enlightened person who has realized the changeless Self, engagement in aciton in impossible because of the absence of desire for results. Hence, when the activities of the aggregate of body and organs cease, his withdrawal from action is spoken of in a figurative sense. Some may have this other kind of learnedness: 'The Knower of the field is God Himself; and the field is something different and an object of knowledge to the Knower of the field. But I am a mundane being, happy and sorrowful. And it is my duty to bring about the cessation of worldly existence through the knowledge of the field and the Knower of the field, and by continuing to dwell in His true nature after directly perceiving through meditation God, the Knower of the field,' and he who, understands thus, and he who teaches that 'he (the taught) is not the Knower of the field,' and he who, being under such an idea, thinks, 'I shall render meaningful the scriptures dealing with the worldly state and Liberation'-is the meanest among the learned. That Self-immolator, being devoid of any link with the traditional interpreters of the purport of the scriptures, misinterprets what is enjoined in the scriptures and imagines what is not spoken there, and thery himself becoming deluded, befools others too. Hence, one who is not a knower of the traditional interpretation is to be ignored like a fool, though he may be versed in all the scriptures. As for the objection that, if God be one with the knower of the field, He will then become a mundane being, and that, if the knowers of the fields are one with God, then from the nonexistence of mundane beings will follow the absence of the mundane state, -these two objections have been refuted by admitting Knowledge and ignorance as having different characteristics. Objection: How? Reply: By saying that any defect imagined through ignorance does not affect the supreme Reality which is the substratum of that (imagination). In accordance with this an illustration was cited that a desert is not made muddy by water in a mirage. Even the defect of the possibility of nonexistence of the mundange state, conseent on the nonexistence of individual souls, stands refuted by the explanation that the mundane state and the individual souls are imagined through ignorance. Objection: The defect of mundane existence in the knower of the field consists in his being possessed of ignorance. And sorrowfulness etc. which are its products are matters of direct experience. Reply: No, since whatever is known is an attribute of the field, therefore the knower-the knower of the field-cannot reasonably be tainted by the defects arising from it. Whatsoever blemish-not existing in the knower of the field-you attribute to It is logically an object of experience, and hence it is verily a ality of the field; not the ality of the knower of the field. Nor does the knower of the field become tainted thery, because of knower cannot possibly have any conjunction with an object of knowledge. Should there be a conjunction, then there will be no possibility at all of its (the latter's) becoming a knowable. Oh! Sir, if being ignorant, sorrowful, etc. be alities of the Self, how is it that they are directly perceived? Or how can they be alities of the Knower of the field? If the conclusion be that all that is known consititutes the field, and that the one who knows is verily the knower of the field, then, to say that being ignorant, sorrowful, etc.are the alities of the knower of the field and that they are directly perceived is a contradictory statement having only ignorance as its basis. Here, (the opponent) asks: To whom does ignorance belong? (The answer is that) it belongs verily to him by whom it is experienced! Objection: In whom is it perceived? Reply: Here the answer is: It is pointless to ask, 'In whom is ignorance experienced?' Objection: How? Reply: If ignorance be perceived (by you), then you perceive its possessor as well. Moreover, when that possessor of ignorance is perceived it is not reasonable to ask, 'In whom is it perceived?' For, when an owner of cattle is seen, the estion, 'To whom do the cattle belong', does not become meaningful. Objection: Well, is not the illustration dissimilar? Since, the cattle and their owner are directly perceived, their relation also is directly perceived. Hence the estion is meaningless. Ignorance and its possessor are not directly perceived in that manner, in which case the estion would have been meaningless. Reply: What will it matter to you if you know the relation of ignorance with a person who is not directly perceived as possessed of ignorance? Opponent: Since ignorance is a source of evil, therefore it should be got rid of. Reply: He to whom ignorance belongs will get rid of it! Opponent: Indeed, ignorance belongs to myself. Reply: In that case, you know ignorance as also yourself who possess it? Opponent: I know, but not through direct perception. Reply: If you know through inference, then how is the connection (between yourself and ignorance) known? Surely it is not possible for you the knower to have at that time ['When you are knowing your own ignorance.'] the knowledge of the relation (of the Self) with ignorance which is an object of knowledge; ['After having perceived ignorance as an object of your knowledge, how can you who continue to be the knower cognize yourself as the knower of that ignorance? For this would lead to the contradiction of the same person becoming the subject and the object of cognition.'] because the cognizer is then engaged in cognizing ignorance as an object. Besides, there cannot be someone who is a (separate) cognizer of the relation between the knower and ignorance, and a separate cognition of that (relation), for this would lead to infinite regress. If the knower and the relation between the knower and the thing known be cognizable, then a separate cognizer has to be imagined. Of him, again, another knower has to be imagined; of him again a separate cognizer would have to be imagined! Thus, an infinite regress be comes unavoidable. Again, whether the knowable be ignorance or anything else, a knowable is verily a knowable; similarly, even a knower is surely a knower; he does not become a knowable. And when this is so, [Since the knower cannot be known, therefore his relation with ignorance also cannot be known by himself or by anybody else] nothing of the cognizer-the knower of the field-is tainted by such defects as ignorance, sorrowfulness, etc. Objection: May it not be said that the (Self's) defect is surely this, that the field, which is full of defects, is cognized (by It)? Reply: No, because it is the Immutable, which is consciousness, by nature, that is figuratively spoken of as the cognizer. It is just like figuratively attributing the act of heating to fire merely because of its (natural) heat. Just as it has been shown here by the Lord Himself that identification with action, cause and effect are absent in the Self, and that action, cause, etc. are figuratively attributed to the Self owing to their having been superimposed (on It) through ignorance, so has it been shown by Him in various places: 'He who thinks of this One as the killer৷৷.' (2.19), 'While actions are being done in ever way by the gunas of Nature' (3.27), 'The Omnipresent neither accepts anybody's sin৷৷.' (5.15), etc. It has been explained by us, too, in that very way, and in the following contexts also we shall explain accordingly. Objection: Well, in that case, if identification with action, cause and effect be naturally absent in the Self, and it they be superimpositions through ignorance, then it amounts to this that actions are meant for being undertaken only by the ignorant, not by the enlightened. Reply: It is true that is comes to this. This very fact we shall explain under the verse, 'Since it is not possible for one who holds on to a body৷৷.' (18.11). And, in the context dealing with the conclusion of the purport of the whole Scripture, we shall explain this elaborately under the verse, '৷৷.in brief indeed, O son of Kunti,৷৷.which is the supreme consummation of Knowledge' (ibid. 50) It is needless here to expatiate further, Hence we conclude. The next verse, '(Hear about)৷৷.what that field is,' etc., summarizing the purport of the chapter dealing with the 'field' taught in the verses begining from 'This body৷৷.'etc., is being presented. For it is proper to introduce briefly the subject-matter that is sought to be explained.
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.3 Know as Myself the Field-knower also who is the only form of the Knower in all the bodies like divinities, men etc., i.e., know them as ensouled by Me. By the expression 'also' (Api) in, 'Know Me also (Api) as the Field-Knower,' it is inferable that 'Know Me as the Field-Knower in all Fields' has also been taught by implication. Just as the body, on account of its being the attribute of the knower, cannot exist separately, and is conseently denoted by way of co-ordinate predication (Samanadhikarnya) with it, in the same manner both the Field and the Field-Knower, on account of their being My attributes, cannot exist as entities separate from Me, and hence can be denoted as 'one with Me' by way of co-ordinate predication. Both the Ksetra (Field) which is an aggregate of earth etc., and the Ksetrajna (the Jiva) have the Lord for their Self, because of their being of the nature of the body of the Lord. Such is the teaching of the Sruti passages beginning from 'He who dwelling in the earth, is within the earth, whom the earth does not know, whose body is the earth, who controls the earth from within - He is your inner Controller and immortal Self' (Br. U., 3.7.3), and ending with 'He who, dwelling in the individual self as the self within, whom the self does not know, whose body the self is, who controls the self from within - He is your inner Controller and immortal Self' (Br. U. Madh., 3.7.22). It is the dwelling in of the Lord as the Self of all the knowers of the bodies (Field-Knowers or the Jivas) on account of His being the inner Controller, that is the justification for describing Him as in co-ordinate predication (Samanadhikaranya) with them. In the beginning and later on, it was taught to the effect, 'I am the self, O Arjuna, dwelling in the hearts of all beings' (10.20), and 'Nothing that moves or does not move exists without Me' (10.39) and 'I, with a single aspect of Myself, am sustaining the whole universe' (10.42). In the middle He describes Himself by way of co-ordinate predication as, 'Of Adityas, I am Visnu' etc. In the teachings concerning the difference between the body and its knower and concerning both of them as having Me for their Self - this knowledge of unity by co-ordinate predication alone is taught as 'My view.' Some (the followers of Advaita and Bhedabheda) say: The sentence 'And know Me as the Knower' should be understood as co-ordinate predication expressing identity between the individual self and the Supreme Self. Thus according to their view, the Lord (Isvara), who is Existence-Knowledge-Bliss Absolute must be admitted to have become the individual self, as it were, through nescience (Ajnana). According to their docrine the teaching of identity given here in the Text seeks to sublate that nescience. Just as teaching by a reliable person to the effect, 'This is a rope, and not a snake,' sublates the erroneous notion of a snake, the teaching of the Lord, who is most reliable, sublates the erroneous notion of the individual self (Ksetrjna) being different from Him. Such interpreters are to be estioned thus: Is this Teacher, Bhagavan Vasudeva, the Supreme Ruler, one whose nescience has been sublated by the exact knowledge of the Self or not? If His nescience has been sublated, then the perception of duality like Arjuna as the taught, and of actions like teaching, becomes impossible, because of the impossibility of superimposing a flase form on the Self which is in reality mere undifferentiated Consciousness. If, however, His nescience has not been sublated on account of His not having realised the Self, then, because of His ignorance, it is utterly impossible for Him to teach the knowledge of the Self. Elsewhere it has been stated: 'The wise, who have realised the truth, will instruct you in knowledge' (4.34). Thus, the polemics of this nature are to be ignored as having been set forth to misguide the world by these ignorant daters whose arguments are contradicted by all Vedas, Smrtis, Itihasas, the Puranas, logic and their own words. The truth is this: Some of the Sruti texts declare that non-conscient matter, the conscient entity (the individual self) and the Supreme Brahman are different in nature from one another in the relation of object of enjoyment, the enjoyer (subject) and the Supreme Ruler as follows: 'From Prakrti, the Possessor of Maya projects this world, in which another (i.e. the individual self) is confined by Maya (Sve. U., 4.9); 'Know then Maya to be the Prakrti and the Possessor of Maya to be the Great Lord' (Sve. U., 4.10); 'The perishable is Prakrti; the immortal and imperishable is Hara (the individual self); and the Lord alone rules over both the perishable Prakrti and the imperishable individual self' (Sve. U., 1.10). Here, the expression, 'The immortal and the imperishable is Hara,' points out the enjoyer (i.e., individual self); It is called Hara because the individual self siezes matter as an object of It own experience. Again, 'He is the cause, the Lord of the lord of senses' (Ibid., 6.9); 'He has no progenitor and no Lord' (Ibid., 6.9); 'He is the ruler of Prakrti, of the individual self, and the Lord of alities' (Ibid., 6.16); 'He is the Lord of the Universe, the Ruler of individual selves, the eternal, the auspicious and the unchanging' (Ma. Na., 13.3); 'The two unborn - the knowing Lord and the unknowing individual self, the omnipotent and the impotent' (Sve. U.,1.9); 'The Constant among inconstants, the Intelligent among the intelligents, the one who grants the desires of the many' (Ibid., 6.13. & Ka. U., 5.13); 'When one knows the enjoyer, the object of enjoyment and Actuater ৷৷.' (Sve. U., 1.12); 'Regarding the individual self and the Actuater to be different, and blessed by Him, It attains immortality' (Ibid., 1.6), and 'Ot these two, the one eats the sweet Pippala fruit, the other shines in his splendour without eating' (Ibid., 4.6 and Mun. U., 3.1.1). Further, 'There is one unborn female, red, white and black, who produces many creatures like herself; there is another unborn being who loves her and is close to her; there is yet another male unborn who after having enjoyed here, gives her up' (Ibid., 4.5); 'The cow (i.e. Prakrti) that has no beginning or end, is the mother and source of all beings' (Cha. U., 4.5) and 'On the self-same tree, the individual self sits sunken in grief, and being ignorant and impotent, It grieves. When It sees the other, the gracious Lord and His glory, It attains freedom from grief (Sve. U., 4.7). The following passages of the Gita are alos to the point: 'This Prakrti, thus divided eightfold, composed of Ahankara etc., is Mine.' 'This is My lower Prakrti. Know My higher Prakrti to be distinct from this - the Life Principle, by which the universe is sustained (7.4-5); 'All beings, O Arjuna, enter into My Nature at the end of a cycle. These I send forth again at the beginning of a cycle. Resorting to Prakrti, which is My own, I send forth again and again all this multitude of beings, helpless under the sway of Prakrti' (9.7-8); 'Under my control, Prakrti gives birth to all that moves, and that which does not move. And because of this, O Arjuna, does the world spin' (9.10); 'Know that Prakrti and the individual self are without beginning' (13.19) 'The great Brahman (or Prakrti) is My womb; in that I lay the germ; from it, O Arjuna, is the birth of all beings' (14.3). The great Brahman of Mine, which is the womb of this world, called Prakti, non-conscient matter, consisting of elements in a subtle state - in it I lay the germ called conscient entity. From that, namely, from the compound between conscient and unconscient entities, which is willed by Me, are born all these beings beginning with the gods and ending with the immobile things mixed up with the unconscient matter. Such is the meaning. In the Sruti also, the subtle original state of material elements is signified as Brahman: 'From Him are produced Brahman as also the world of matter and soul (Anna) having name and form' (Mun. U., 1.1.9). Likewise, Sruti Texts declare that the Supreme Person constitutes the Self of all, and the conscient and non-conscient entities are inseparable from Him; for, those conscient and unconscient entities, which abide in the form of the experiencer and the experienced abiding in all states, form the body of the Supreme Person; conseently they are under His control. These Texts are as follows: 'He who, dwelling in the earth, is within the earth, whom the earth does not know, whose body the earth is, who is the Inner Ruler of the earth' and ending with, 'He who, dwelling in the self, is within the self, whom the self does not know, whose body the self is and who is the Inner Controller of the self' (Br. U. Madh., 3.7.3-22). Likewise another passage declares: 'He who is moving withing the earth, to whom the earth is the body, whom the earth does not know ৷৷. he who is moving within the Mrtyu (Nature), to whom Mrtyu is the body, whom Mrtyu does not know ৷৷. He is the Inner Self of all beings, sinless; He is the divine Lord, He is of the one Narayana' (Sub. U., 7). Here the term Mrtyu denotes the subtle state of non-conscient entity which is expressed by the term Tamas, because in the same Upanisad, it is declared, 'The unmanifest (Avyakta) merges into Aksara (the imperishable), and the Aksara merges into Tamas (Ibid., 2). Elsewhere it is stated thus: 'Entering within, is the Ruler of all creatures, the self of all (Tai. A., 3.21). Therefore, the Supreme Person, who posseses conscient and non-conscient entities abiding in all states as His body, is in the form of the world, whether in the state of cause or of effect. So, with the purpose of making this explicit, some Srutis declare that the world in its states as cause and effect, is He Himself. They begin with, 'This Existence (Sat) alone was in the beginning, one only without a second ৷৷. It thought, "May I become many, may I multiply". It creates Tejas' (Cha. U., 6.2.1.2), and ends with 'All creatures here, my dear, have their root in the Sat (Being), have their home in the Sat, have Sat as their support. All this has Sat for its self. That is Existence. He is the Self. That you are, O Svetaketu' (Cha. U., 6.8.4.6-7). Elsewhere is the following text beginning with, 'He desired, "May I become many"; He performed austerity; having performed austerity, He created all this,' and concluding with, 'He became both the Satya (individual self) and Anrta (matter), He has remained true to His nature' (Tai. U., 2.6.1). The difference in nature between conscient and unconscient entities and the Supreme Person, established in the other Sruti passages, is asserted here also: 'Lo! Entering into these three divinities (i.e. the Tejas, water and earth) in the form of living self (individual self), which is Myself, I distinguish name and form? (Cha. U., 6.3.2) and also in the text, 'Having created it, He entered into it. Having entered it, He became Sat and Tyat ৷৷. He became both conscious and unconscious, both the Satya (individual self) and Anrta (matter). He has remained true to His own nature' (Tai. U., 2.6.1). It is in this way that all the distinctions of names and forms are brought about: The Sruti also declares, 'Then, this was undifferentiated. Now, it has been differentiated by names and forms' (Br. U., 1.4.7). Therefore, He who exists in the states of effect and cause, and who has the conscient and unconscient entities in their gross and subtle states as His body, is the Supreme Person. Because the effect is not other than the cause, the effect becomes known when the cause is known, when the One becomes known, everything is known - thus what is posited by the Srutis stands explained. In the text, 'Entering into these three divinities by way of living self (individual self) which is My self, I distinguish name and form' (Cha. U., 6.3.2) - all the non-conscient entities are pointed out by the expression, 'the three divinities', and then the distinguishing of names and forms arises on account of the individual selves having Him for Their Self, entering into those entities. Thus all expressive terms signify the Supreme Self who is alified by the individual selves and non-conscient matter. Therefore, co-ordinate predication (Samanadhikaranya) of a term denoting an effect with a term denoting the Supreme Self as cause, is ite appropriate. Thus the Supreme Brahman, who has conscient and non-conscient entities in their gross and subtle conditions as His modes, is Himself the effect and the cause; so Brahman is the material cause of the world. Brahman Himself constitutes the material cause of the world, because Brahman, who has the conscient and unconscient entities in their subtle state as His body, forms the cause of all. Still as that material cause is a composite entity (i.e., of individual selves, Prakrti aand Isvara), there is no mixing up of the natures of Brahman, conscient entities and non-conscient entities. This is perfectly tenable. Thus, for example, although the material cause of a multi-coloured cloth is a combination of white, black and red threads, the connection of whiteness etc., with the cloth is to be found only in the place where a particular kind of thread is woven in it; in the state of effect also, there is no mixing up of the colours everywhere. Similarly, although the world has for its material cause a combination of the Lord, conscient and non-conscient entities, still in its condition as an effect also, there is no mixing up of the respective alities of experiencer (subject), the experienced (object) and the Controller (God). Though these threads can exist separately they are brought together at a time by man's will and acire the character and effect as a conseence. But in the case of the world manifestation, there is a unieness. It consists in that the intelligent and insentient entities in both causal and effect conditions derive their existential nature only from, and as, modes of the Supreme Person, by forming His body. Thus the Supreme Person having those entities as His body, is always signified by all these terms indicating them. As for the differences in nature, their respective speciality of character holds good here (i.e., in the production of world as of the coloured cloth). Such being the case, though the Supreme Brahman enters the effect, owing to absence of transformation of His nature, the unchangeability is well established. To signify Brahman as effect is also very appropriate, because He is the Self sustaining the conscient and non-conscient entities from within their gross condition when they are differentiated by name and form: What is called effect is nothing other than the cause passing into another state of existence. The various scriptural statements that the Supreme Brahman is without attributes are also tenable in the sense that He is not associated with evil attributes, as the Sruti text, 'He is free from evil, ageless, deathless, sorrowless, hungerless, thirstless' eliminates all evil attributes, and then says that He is full of auspicious attributes: 'Whose desire is real, whose will is real' (Cha. U., 8.7.1). This Sruti text itself settles here what was generally declared elsewhere that negation of attributes (Guna-nisedha) pertains to evil attributes in Brahman. The doctrine that Brahman is of the nature of knowledge is also ite appropriate, because it amounts to saying that the true nature of Brahman, who is omniscient and omnipotent, who is antagonistic to all that is evil, and who is the mine of all auspicious attributes, can be adeately defined only as Knowledge, as one whose nature is Knowledge, since He possesses self-luminosity. The following texts teach that Brahman is the Knower: 'He who is all-knowing, all wise' (Mun. U., 1.1.9); 'His high power is revealed, indeed, as various and natural, as consisting of knowledge, strength and activity' (Sve.U., 6.8); 'My dear, by what means has one to understand the Knower?' (Br. U., 2.4.14); and the text, 'Brahman is Existence, Knowledge and Infinity' (Tai. U., 2.1.1). All these teach that Brahman is of the nature of Knowledge in as much as He can be defined only as Knowledge, and because also He is self-luminous. In the texts 'He desired, "May I become many" ' (Tai. U., 2.6.1), 'It thought, "May I become many" ' (Cha. U., 6.2.3), 'It became differentiated by names and forms' - it is affirmed that Brahman thus exists of His own Will in a wonderful plurality of modes on account of His having the immovable and movable entities as His body. Conseently it is false to affirm the opposite view that the manifold entities do not have Brahman as their self in a real sense. Thus, it is the unreality of manifold existence (i.e., of entities without Brahman for the Self) that is denied in the following texts: 'He obtains death after death who sees difference here' (Ka. U., 2.4.10), 'There is nothing here that is manifold' (Ka. U., 2.4.11), 'But where there is duality, as it were, there one sees another ৷৷. but where everything has become the self ৷৷. there, by what can one see what ৷৷. who shall know which by what?' (Br. U., 4.5.15). There is also no denial of the manifoldness of modes of the Brahman resulting from His assumption of various names and forms by His will. This is established in Sruti texts such as, 'May I become manifold' (Tai. U., 2.6.1 and Cha. U., 6.2.3) etc. This manifold modality is proved to be existent in the commencement of even that passage which negates multiplicity by asserting. 'But where everything has become the self' (Br. U., 4.5.15). 'Everything deserts Him who knows everything to be apart from Him' (Br. U., 4.5.7), and 'Lo, verily, from this great Being has been breathed forth that which is Rg veda' (Ibid., 2.4.10). Thus there is no contradiction whatsoever among the Srutis which assert difference in essence and in nature between the conscient self, non-conscient matter and the Lord, whose body the former entities are. There is no contradiction also in the scriptural statement that they are identical. The relation of the body and the self exists at all times between the Lord and the conscient and non-conscient entities. The Sruti texts themselves establish that those entities, which constitute the body (of the Lord), acire in causal condition, a subtle state, in which they cannot be differentiated. In the effect condition they are in a gross state with names and forms, and are capable of differentiation into a multiplicity of entities as modes of the Supreme. Thus there is no room whatsoever for entertaining such doctrines which ascribe nescience to Brahman (as in Advaita), for describing the differences in Brahman as due to limiting adjuncts (as in Bhedabheda) and other tenets (Yadavaprakasa's). All these proceed from unsound logic and are in viloation of all Srutis. Let this over-long polemic be terminated here. The object of this long polemical passage is to refute the Advaitic interpretation of the statement Know the Field-Knower in all bodies as Myself' as one of absolute identity between the Jiva and Isvara. The thesis of the author of the commentary is that the relation is not oneof absolute identity but only one of identity of reference of several inseparable entities to a comon substratum known technically as Samandadhikaranya or co-ordinate predication, also translated sometimes as grammatical co-ordination. The literal meaning of the expression is 'the relation of abiding in a common substratum.' The relation of the Jiva and Prakrti to Isvara is as of body and soul or as a mode (Prakara) and its substratum (Prakari). The relation between the body and soul of an ordinary being is, however, separable at death. But it is inseparable in the case of Isvara and this Jiva-cum-Prakrti body. In this sense Isvara is the Field-knower (Ksetrajna) of the Field (Ksetra) constituted of all individual entities conscient and inconscient, just as in each individual personality the Jiva and the body are the field-knower and the field respectively. [Being in co-ordinate predication (Samanadhikaranya), Brahman is an inseparable but mutually distinct complex of Prakrti, Jiva and Isvara. The cosmic mode of body constituted of Prakrti and Purusa is at intervals in alternate states of latency and patency (Pralaya and Srsti or dissolution and manifestation). As the soul of a complex whole, He can be denoed by any of the terms entering into it - Isvara, Prakrti or Jiva. Brahan is sometimes mentioned in the Srutis as Asat when everything is in latency in Pralaya, and as Sat when all entities are in manifestations (Srsti). All these expressions denote Him only. He is described in some texts as attributeless. It means only that He is without any undesriable evil alities. He is on the other hand endowed with countless auspicious attributes. All these contentions are supported by numerous Vedic passages, which are oted in the commentary.]
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.2-3 Somewhere in the scriputures it is heard that 'The Field-sensitizer must be worshipped'. Is He the same as the Soul, or the Lord or an altogether different third entity ? On a doubt regarding this problem - The Bhagavat instructs-Idam etc. Ksetrajnam etc. For persons of wordly life their body is the Ksetra 'Field' where the seeds of action grow. That is why their personal Soul covered with incoming (or foreign, not-natural) dirt, is called Field-sensitizer. In the case of the enlightened persons, the self-same body is [again] the Ksetra, But there is difference in etimological meaning viz : It decays the fetters of the result of action by means of consuming [it]; and it protects [them] from the fear of birth-and-death [cycle]. With reference to these persons, the Supreme Soul, Vasudeva is the Field-sensitizer. He who sensitizes this Field : He who causes it to know. Here the root vid includes within itself, the meaning of the causal suffix ni. Therefore [the meaning is :] He, on account of Whose grace this insentient [body] attains the status of being sentient, He alone, an no one else, is the Field-sensitizer. But, the [only] difference is this : Taking into consideration th aspect of limited pervaisveness, He is taken to be Soul; and on account of [His] unlimited pervasiveness in all the Fields, [He is called] the Supreme Soul, the Bhagavat Vasudeva. Of Me : the Sixth Case here is in the objective sense. Hence the idea is : I may be known by means of this knowledge.
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.3 Do thou also know Me as the knower of the field in all fields, O Arjuna. Knowledge of both the field and the knower of the field is considered by Me to be ï1the ï1 knowledge.
Commentary

13.3 क्षेत्रज्ञम् the knower of the field? च and? अपि also? माम् Me? विद्धि know? सर्वक्षेत्रेषु in all fields? भारत O descendant of Bharata (Arjuna)? क्षेत्रक्षेत्रज्ञयोः of the field and of the knower of the field? ज्ञानम्,knowledge? यत् which? तत् that? ज्ञानम् knowledge? मतम् is considered to be? मम My.Commentary The fields are different but the knower of the field is one. The individual souls (Jivatmas) are different but the Supreme Soul (Paramatma) is one. Wherever there is mind? there are lifreath? egoism and the individual consciousness or reflected intelligence side by side. He who has the sense of duality will take birth again and again. This delusion of dulaity can only be removed by knowledge of the identity of the individual soul and the Absolute. I am happy? I am miserable? I am the doer of this action? and I am the enjoyer of this experience -- these are the experiences of all human beings. Therefore the individual soul is bound to Samsara and is subject to pleasure and pain? and the individual souls are in different bodies. But? the Supreme Soul is free from pleasure and pain. It is not bound to Samsara. It is eternally free. It is one without a second.If there is only one individual soul in all bodies? all should have the same experience at the same time. If Rama suffers from abdominal colic? Krishna also should experience the pain at the same time. If John experiences joy? Jacob also should have a similar experience. If Choudhury is stung by a scorpion? Banerjee also should suffer from the pain. But this is not the case. When Rama suffers? Krishna rejoices. When John is jubilan? Jacob is depressed. When Choudhury suffers from the sting of a scorpion? Banerjee is enjoying his breakfast. Fields are different? bodies are different? minds are different and the individual souls are different from each other. But the knower in all these fields is one. Pleasure and pain are the Dharmas (functions) of the mind only. The individual soul is in essence identical with the Supreme Soul.The knower of the field or the Self is not affected by pleasure and pain? virtue and vice. He is the silent witness only. Pleasure and pain are the functions of the mind. They are ascribed to the Self through ignorance. The ignorant man regards the physical body as the Self. He is swayed by the two currents of likes and dislikes? he does virtuous and vicious actions and reaps the fruits of these actions? viz.? pleasure and pain? and takes birth again and again. But the sage who knows that the Kshetrajna or the knower of the field or the Self is distinct from the body is not swayed by likes and dislikes. He identifies himself with the pure? eternal? Absolute or the Supreme Self and is always happy and actionless? though he performs actions for the welfare of humanity.The disease of Timira (partial blindness) which causes perception of what is contrary to truth pertains to the eye but not to the man who perceives. If the disease is removed by proper treatment he perceives things in their true light. Even so ignorance? doubt? pleasure and pain? virtue and vice? likes and dislikes? false perceptions as well as their cause belong to the instrument (the mind) but not to the silent witness? the knower of the field? the Self.In the state of liberation wherein there is annihilation of the mind? there is no ignorance and the play of the two currents of likes and dislikes does not exist there. If false perception? ignorance? pleasure and pain? doubt? bondage? delusion? sorrow? etc.? were the essential properties of the Self? just as heat is the essential property of fire? they could not be got rid of at any time. But there have been sages of Selfrealisation in the past like Sankara? Dattatreya? Jada Bharata and Yajnavalkya who possessed extraordinary supersensual or intuitional knowledge? who were free from false perception? doubt? fear? delusion? sorrow? etc. They were not conscious of Samsara but they had perfect awareness of the Self. Therefore? we will have to conclude that the Self is ever free? pure? perfect? eternal and that ignorance inheres in the instrument (the mind) and not in the Self.Ignorance born of Tamas acts as a veil and prevents man from knowing his essential nature as,the ExistenceKnowledgeBliss Absolute. It causes perception of what is ite the contrary of truth and causes doubt or nonperception of truth. As soon as knowledge of the Self dawns these three forms of ignorance vanish in toto. Therefore these three forms of ignorance are not the attributes of the Self. They belong to the mind? the organ or the instrument. Mind is only an effect or a product of ignorance.The wheel of Samsara or the worldprocess rotates on account of ignorance. It exists only for the ignorant man who perceives the world as it appears to him.There is no Samsara for a liberated sage. Any disease of the eye cannot in any way effect the sun (the dity presiding over the eye). The breaking of the pot will not in any way affect the ether or space in the pot. The water of the mirage cannot render the earth moist. Even so ignorance and its effecs cannot in the least affect the pure? subtle? attributeless? formless? limbless? partless and selfluminous Kshetrajna or the Self. Ignorance does not touch the Self. (Cf.X.20XIII.32XVIII.61)

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.3 And, O scion of the Bharata dynasty, under-stand Me to be the 'Knower of the field' in all the fields. In My opinion, that is Knowledge which is the knowlege of th field and the knower of the field.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.3 I am the Omniscient self that abides in the playground of Matter; knowledge of Matter and of the all-knowing Self is wisdom.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 10.20 BG 15.15 BG 18.61 SB 1.2.11 SB 3.28.41 SB 6.4.24 CC Madhya 20.157 CC Ādi 2.5 CC Madhya 24.71 Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 3.1.1Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.11
Understand that I am also the knower of the field within all bodies — knowledge of the field and the knower of the field is true knowledge.
Practical Applications
  • Recognize Kṛṣṇa as the supreme knower in every body, including yours.
  • Address Him as the inner witness, not just outer Lord.
  • Cultivate awareness of the Supersoul within.
Reflection Questions
  • When did I last consciously recognize the inner witness?
  • What practice keeps that recognition alive?

A single sun stands in the sky, yet every pot of water on every roof of the city holds its reflection. The pots differ, the reflections differ in clarity, but the sun is one. Kṛṣṇa, the Supersoul, is that one sun, knowing every body from within as His own field of light.

Kapila instructs Devahūti

Lord Kapila, born to Devahūti, taught His mother that the Paramātmā dwells in every heart as witness — distinct from the individual soul, yet accompanying it like a second bird on the same tree. The Bhāgavatam preserves this teaching in the Third Canto.

Devahūti, hearing this, wept — not from sorrow, but from the recognition that the Lord she had been searching for had been seated within her all along. Kṛṣṇa's words here echo Kapila's: "Know Me also as the knower in every body."

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.4

↗
తత్క్షేత్రం యచ్చ‍ యాదృక్‍చ యద్వికారి యతశ్చ యత్ । స చ యో యత్ప్రభావశ్చ తత్సమాసేన మే శ‍ృణు ॥ ౪ ॥
tat kṣetraṁ yac ca yādṛk ca
[tat kshetram yach cha yaadrik cha]
yad-vikāri yataś ca yat
[yad-vikaari yatash cha yat]
sa ca yo yat-prabhāvaś ca
[sa cha yo yat-prabhaavash cha]
tat samāsena me śṛṇu
[tat samaasena me shrinu]
tat — that kṣetram — field of activities yat — what ca — also yādṛk — as it is ca — also yat — having what vikāri — changes yataḥ — from which ca — also yat — what saḥ — he ca — also yaḥ — who yat — having what prabhāvaḥ — influence ca — also tat — that samāsena — in summary me — from Me śṛṇu — understand .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
tat kṣetraṁ yac ca yādṛk ca
tat
that
kṣetram
field of activities
yat
what
ca
also
yādṛk
as it is
ca
also
yad-vikāri yataś ca yat
yat
having what
vikāri
changes
yataḥ
from which
ca
also
yat
what
sa ca yo yat-prabhāvaś ca
saḥ
he
ca
also
yaḥ
who
yat
having what
prabhāvaḥ
influence
ca
also
tat samāsena me śṛṇu
tat
that
samāsena
in summary
me
from Me
śṛṇu
understand .
  • samāsena — in summary
    Kṛṣṇa is not pretending to give the whole vedānta. He marks His description as a compression — enough to act upon, not enough to exhaust. The careful reader takes this hint and turns to the larger śāstra.
  • vikāri — changes
    From vikāra — modification, transformation. The very promise to describe the body's vikāras is the promise that the body is not the self. Whatever changes is not you.
  • prabhāvaḥ — influence
    Power, sway, dominion. Kṛṣṇa will describe not just what the knower is but what he can do. The soul is not inert — it has prabhāva, even when forgotten.
  • śṛṇu — understand (lit. hear)
    Imperative from √śru. The transmission is oral, even here in a written text. The student's first duty is not to argue but to hear — the same word that will define the path of verse 26.
Now please hear My brief description of this field of activity and how it is constituted, what its changes are, whence it is produced, who that knower of the field of activities is, and what his influences are.

The Lord is describing the field of activities and the knower of the field of activities in their constitutional positions. One has to know how this body is constituted, the materials of which this body is made, under whose control this body is working, how the changes are taking place, wherefrom the changes are coming, what the causes are, what the reasons are, what the ultimate goal of the individual soul is, and what the actual form of the individual soul is. One should also know the distinction between the individual living soul and the Supersoul, their different influences, their potentials, etc. One just has to understand this Bhagavad-gītā directly from the description given by the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and all this will be clarified. But one should be careful not to consider the Supreme Personality of Godhead in every body to be one with the individual soul, the jīva. This is something like equating the potent and the impotent.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
4. Hear from Me briefly what is the composition of this field, what are its qualities, what are its transformations, from where it originates, by what varieties it is known, who is the knower and what are his powers.
Commentary

Now the Lord begins to elaborate on what He has said previously in abbreviated form. Hear from Me in brief of what the body consists (yac ca)— a conglomeration of five gross elements, prāṇa, senses and other things; what qualities it exhibits (yadṛk)— such as desire and hatred; what its transformations are (yad-vikāri)—into desirable or undesirable things; from what it arises (yataḥ)—from the combination of matter and soul; by what it is distinguished (yat)—by differences among various moving or non-moving bodies; and who (yaḥ) is he (sa)—the knower of the field—the jīva and the Paramātmā. The neuter form singular yat and tat are used instead of the masculine, though jīva, Paramātmā and the field are referred to, by the rule of grammar napuṁsakam anapuṁsakennaikavac ca (Aṣṭādhyāyī, Pāṇini 1.2.69). If there is a group of items with the same base of various genders including neuter, the neuter gender can be used to indicate all of them. This operation is called eka-śeṣa (single remainder).

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
4. Hear from Me briefly the composition of this field, its contents, its transformations, its origin and its svarūpa. Hear from Me also about the knower of the field—his svarūpa, and his powers.
Commentary

What the Lord said in abbreviated form He now discusses in detail. Hear from Me briefly about the body (kṣetram), its basic components or dravya (yac ca), what it gives shelter to, its contents (yādṛk), its transformations (yad vikāri), the purpose of its appearance (yataḥ), its svarūpa (yat), and the knower of the field—the jīva and the Lord (sa ca), their svarūpas and energies (yat prabhāvaḥ). Neuter case (yat and tat) is used for the items by the rule napuṁsakam anapuṁsakenaikav cāsyānyatrasyām (Pāṇini 1.2.69). If there is a group of items of various genders including neuter with the same base, the neuter gender can be used to indicate all of them.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Translation
Now please hear My brief description of this field of activity and how it is constituted, what its changes are, whence it is produced, who that knower of the field of activities is, and what his influences are. (cn) There are five differents points that Krsna makes here and they are actually described in the remaining verses of this Chapter. Although Krsna answers the six questions of Arjuna, in the remaining verses of this Chapter, He also explains all these points in relationship to the field of activities. In this verse Krsna explains about these points briefly but the next verse (5), He explains where these points are expanded for further study in case one wants to know more then the brief description that Krsna is now giving in the rest of the chapter. (DS) Four more things about ksetra will be described in this Chapter: (1) what is it made of; (2) the nature of ksetra; (3) its transformations, and (4) its source. And two things about ksetrajna: (1) its nature and (2) its influence. All these will be explained in brief. Why? Because this knowledge is unlimited.
Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Krishna proposes to explain 5 points about the field of activity (Ksetra)

1. How the body is constituted (Explained in Text 13.6 and 13.7)

2. What changes the body undergoes (Text 13.7 and 13.20)

3. How, when and where the body is produced (Text 13.6, 13.21, 13.22 and 13.30)

4. Identity of the knower of the field of activities (Text 13.14-13.18 and 13.23)

5. The influence of the knower (Texts 13.14 – 13.18)

Focus of Learning

(a) Best way to solve these issues mentioned in translation

Just understand this Bhagavad-gita as per the description given by Supreme Personality of Godhead
CAUTION! Do not consider the Supreme Personality in every body to be one with individual soul, the jiva
Analogy: It would be like equating the potent and the impotent

(b) Two knowers and their differences

Soul as the individual knower; and Supersoul as the Super knower
Supersoul is the Supreme proprietor of all the bodies, but soul is only for one body
Analogy: Citizen as the proprietor of one land, but King is the proprietor of all lands
Supreme Lord is the Supreme Controller of the Senses (Hrsikesa); Soul is the secondary controller
King is the original controller of all activities; citizens are the secondary controllers
One is fallible, other is infallible
One is subordinate, other is superior
Analogy: It would be like equating the potent and the impotent
Supporting Ref. Vedic Literatures: ’’Kshetrani …’’ Mentions there are 2 knowers of the body

(c) Definition of “knowledge”

To study the subject matter of the field of activity and the knower of the field very minutely

(d) Refutation of ‘’Soul and Supersoul as the same’’ –

Word “ca” indicates the total number of bodies – it indicates Krishna is present as Supersoul in every body while the atomic soul is present only in their individual bodies
Analogy: Do not misunderstand a rope to be a serpant
Real knowledgeis to know Supersoul as the controlled of both, the field of activities and the finite enjoyers

(e) Understand the position of Prakriti (nature), Purusha (enjoyer of nature) and Ishvara (The

Supreme Knower)

Analogy: Understand their differences and do not confuse between painter, the painting and the easel
There are three Brahman conceptions
Prakriti (Material nature) is Brahman as the field of activities
Jiva (Living entity) is also Brahman, and is trying to control material nature
Controller of both of them is also Brahman
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.4 Srnu, hear, i.e., having heard, understand; me, from Me, from My utterance; samasena, in brief; about (all) tat, that-the true nature of the field and the Knower of the field, as they have been described; as to yat, what; tat, that-tat stands for that which has been indicated as 'This body' (in verse 1); ksetram, field is, which has been referred to as 'this'; ca, and; yadrk, how it is along with its own alities; yadvikari, what its changes are; ca, and; yatah, from what cause; arises yat, what effect (-arises is understood-); sah ca yah, and who He, the Knower of the field indicated above, is; ca, and; yat-prabhavah, what His powers are. Yat-probhavah is He who is possessed of the powers arising from the adjuncts. The word ca has been used (throughout) in the sense of and. For making the intellect of the hearer interested the Lord praises that true nature of the field and the Knower of the field which is intended to be taught:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.4 What the 'Field is' namely, what its substance is; what it is 'like', namely, what things depend on it; what its 'modifications' are, namely, what its transformations are; what the 'purpose' is for which it has been originated; 'what it is,' namely, what its true nature is; 'who it is,' namely, who the individual self is and what Its nature is like; what Its 'powers', are, namely, what powers It possesses. All this, briefly learn from Me.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.4 See Comment under 13.5
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.4 What the field is and of what nature, what are its modifications and whence it is and also who He is and what His powers are hear all that from Me in brief.
Commentary

13.4 तत् that? क्षेत्रम् field? यत् which? च and? यादृक् what like? च and? यद्विकारि what its modifications? यतः whence? च and? यत् what? सः He? च and? यः who? यत्प्रभावः what His powers? च and? तत् that? समासेन in brief? मे from Me? श्रृणु hear.Commentary I will tell you? O Arjuna? what the field is? why the body is called the field? what are its modifications or changes in other words what transformations it undergoes? what are its properties? what effects arise in it from what causes? to whom it belongs? whether it is cultivated or whether it grows wild.That field refers to the field mentioned in verse 1.Who He is Who is that knower of the field What are His powers (Prabhavas are powers such as the power of seeing? hearing? etc.) which originate from the limiting adjuncts (such as the eys? the ears? etc.) Do thou hear My speech which describes succinctly the real nature of the field and the knower of the field in all these specific aspects.O Arjuna? I am ite sure that thou wilt clearly comprehend the truth on hearing My speech.The body is the field. The ten senses represent the ten bulls. The bulls work unceasingly day and night through the field of the objects of the senses. The mind is the supervisor. The individual soul is the tenant. The five vital airs (Pranas) are the five labourers. The Primordial Nature is the mistress of the field. This field is Her property. She Herself watches over the field vigilantly. She is endowed with the three alities. Rajas sows the seed Sattva guards it Tamas reaps the harvest. On the threshing floor or MahatTattva (the cosmic mind) with the help of the ox called time? She -- Primordial Nature -- thrashes out the corn. If the individual soul does evil actions? it sows the seeds of sin? manures with evil? reaps a crop of sin? and undergoes the pains of Samsara? viz.? birth? decay? old age? sickness? and the three kinds of afflictions. If it does virtuous actions it sows the good seeds of virtue and reaps a crop of happiness.Lord Krishna now speaks very highly in the following verse of the true nature of the field and the knower of the field in order to create interest in the hearer.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.4 Hear from Me in brief about (all) that as to what that field is and how it is; what its changes are, and from what cause arises what effect; and who He is, and what His powers are.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.4 What is called Matter, of what it is composed, whence it came, and why it changes, what the Self is, and what Its power - this I will now briefly set forth.
Related values
Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 7.4 BG 13.6-7 BG 13.19 SB 3.26.11 SB 11.22.1 SB 2.5.25 CC Madhya 20.262 CC Ādi 5.41 CC Madhya 6.157 Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.12Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 2.1.2
Concepts
Bhava
I shall now describe what the field is — its constitution, its modifications, its origin, who the knower is, and what his powers are.
Practical Applications
  • Welcome systematic teaching as an aid to clarity.
  • Don't skip technical descriptions; they shape understanding.
  • Take notes when scripture is being technical.
Reflection Questions
  • Where have I skimmed technical scripture?
  • What does deeper attention offer?

Before an apprentice can be trusted with a temple's carving, the master walks him slowly around the stone — naming each angle, each grain, each fault. Kṛṣṇa does the same here: He announces a survey of the field and asks Arjuna to listen carefully. Skip the survey and every later cut will go wrong.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.5

↗
ఋషిభిర్బహుధా గీతం ఛన్దోభిర్వివిధై: పృథక్ । బ్రహ్మసూత్రపదైశ్చైవ హేతుమద్భ‍ిర్వినిశ్చితై: ॥ ౫ ॥
ṛṣibhir bahudhā gītaṁ
[rishibhir bahudhaa geetam]
chandobhir vividhaiḥ pṛthak
[chandobhir vividhaih prithak]
brahma-sūtra-padaiś caiva
[brahma-sootra-padaish chaiva]
hetumadbhir viniścitaiḥ
[hetumadbhir vinishchitaih]
ṛṣibhiḥ — by the wise sages bahudhā — in many ways gītam — described chandobhiḥ — by Vedic hymns vividhaiḥ — various pṛthak — variously brahma - sūtra — of the Vedānta padaiḥ — by the aphorisms ca — also eva — certainly hetu - madbhiḥ — with cause and effect viniścitaiḥ — certain .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
ṛṣibhir bahudhā gītaṁ
ṛṣibhiḥ
by the wise sages
bahudhā
in many ways
gītam
described
chandobhir vividhaiḥ pṛthak
chandobhiḥ
by Vedic hymns
vividhaiḥ
various
pṛthak
variously
brahma-sūtra-padaiś caiva
brahma - sūtra
of the Vedānta
padaiḥ
by the aphorisms
ca
also
eva
certainly
hetumadbhir viniścitaiḥ
hetu - madbhiḥ
with cause and effect
viniścitaiḥ
certain .
  • ṛṣibhiḥ — by the wise sages
    Instrumental plural. The teaching is mediated — not directly perceived by the seeker, but received from the seers. Bhakti tradition reads this as the paramparā principle in seed form.
  • brahma - sūtra — of the Vedānta
    Kṛṣṇa explicitly names Vyāsa's aphorisms. The Gītā is not a stand-alone text; it locates itself inside the prasthāna-trayī of Upaniṣads, Sūtras, and Gītā itself.
  • padaiḥ — by the aphorisms
    Pada — a foot, a step, a measured unit. The brahma-sūtras are footholds, not the whole climb. Kṛṣṇa honors the sūtra-style reasoning even as He goes beyond it with His own direct word.
  • hetu - madbhiḥ — with cause and effect
    The Vedānta's authority rests on its reasoning, not mere assertion. The ṛṣis show their work. This phrase blocks any anti-intellectual reading of the bhakti path.
  • viniścitaiḥ — certain
    From vi- + ni- + √ci — "definitely determined." The conclusions of śāstra are not provisional opinions. The seeker is not reinventing the wheel; he is inheriting it.
That knowledge of the field of activities and of the knower of activities is described by various sages in various Vedic writings. It is especially presented in Vedānta-sūtra with all reasoning as to cause and effect.

The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kṛṣṇa, is the highest authority in explaining this knowledge. Still, as a matter of course, learned scholars and standard authorities always give evidence from previous authorities. Kṛṣṇa is explaining this most controversial point regarding the duality and nonduality of the soul and the Supersoul by referring to a scripture, the Vedānta, which is accepted as authority. First He says, “This is according to different sages.” As far as the sages are concerned, besides Himself, Vyāsadeva (the author of the Vedānta-sūtra ) is a great sage, and in the Vedānta-sūtra duality is perfectly explained. And Vyāsadeva’s father, Parāśara, is also a great sage, and he writes in his books of religiosity, aham tvaṁ ca tathānye.… “we – you, I and the various other living entities – are all transcendental, although in material bodies. Now we are fallen into the ways of the three modes of material nature according to our different karma. As such, some are on higher levels, and some are in the lower nature. The higher and lower natures exist due to ignorance and are being manifested in an infinite number of living entities. But the Supersoul, which is infallible, is uncontaminated by the three qualities of nature and is transcendental.” Similarly, in the original Vedas, a distinction between the soul, the Supersoul and the body is made, especially in the Kaṭha Upaniṣad. There are many great sages who have explained this, and Parāśara is considered principal among them. The word chandobhiḥ refers to the various Vedic literatures. The Taittirīya Upaniṣad, for example, which is a branch of the Yajur Veda, describes nature, the living entity and the Supreme Personality of Godhead. As stated before, kṣetra is the field of activities, and there are two kinds of kṣetra-jña: the individual living entity and the supreme living entity. As stated in the Taittirīya Upaniṣad (2.5), brahma pucchaṁ pratiṣṭhā. There is a manifestation of the Supreme Lord’s energy known as anna-maya, dependence upon food for existence. This is a materialistic realization of the Supreme. Then, in prāṇa-maya, after realizing the Supreme Absolute Truth in food, one can realize the Absolute Truth in the living symptoms or life forms. In jñāna-maya, realization extends beyond the living symptoms to the point of thinking, feeling and willing. Then there is Brahman realization, called vijñāna-maya, in which the living entity’s mind and life symptoms are distinguished from the living entity himself. The next and supreme stage is ānanda-maya, realization of the all-blissful nature. Thus there are five stages of Brahman realization, which are called brahma puccham. Out of these, the first three – anna-maya, prāṇa-maya and jñāna-maya – involve the fields of activities of the living entities. Transcendental to all these fields of activities is the Supreme Lord, who is called ānanda-maya. The Vedānta-sūtra also describes the Supreme by saying, ānanda-mayo ’bhyāsāt: the Supreme Personality of Godhead is by nature full of joy. To enjoy His transcendental bliss, He expands into vijñāna-maya, prāṇa-maya, jñāna-maya and anna-maya. In the field of activities the living entity is considered to be the enjoyer, and different from him is the ānanda-maya. That means that if the living entity decides to enjoy in dovetailing himself with the ānanda-maya, then he becomes perfect. This is the real picture of the Supreme Lord as the supreme knower of the field, the living entity as the subordinate knower, and the nature of the field of activities. One has to search for this truth in the Vedānta-sūtra, or Brahma-sūtra. It is mentioned here that the codes of the Brahma-sūtra are very nicely arranged according to cause and effect. Some of the sūtras, or aphorisms, are na viyad aśruteḥ (2.3.2), nātmā śruteḥ (2.3.18), and parāt tu tac-chruteḥ (2.3.40). The first aphorism indicates the field of activities, the second indicates the living entity, and the third indicates the Supreme Lord, the summum bonum among all the manifestations of various entities.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
5. This has been described by many ṛṣis, by many verses of the Vedas and by the logical, very decisive words of the Brahma Sūtras. 6-7. The field in brief is said to consist of the five gross elements, false ego, mahat-tattva, prakṛti, the ten senses, the mind and the five sense objects, desire, hatred, happiness and distress, the body, and conscious determination, along with its transformations. 8-12. Freedom from pride; lack of ostentation; non-violence; forbearance; sincerity; worship of the teacher; purity; steadiness; control of the mind; detachment from enjoyment of sense objects; lack of identification with body; understanding that all states of existence such as birth, death, old age and disease give rise to suffering; freedom from attachment to others, lack of identification with the condition of sons and others; equanimity of mind in the face of desirable or undesirable events; devotion to me with undeviating attention; resorting to solitary places with distaste for crowds; constant engagement in knowledge of the self; and always keeping in mind the goal of liberation—all of these are declared to be knowledge. What is otherwise is ignorance.
Commentary

“You are describing this briefly. Who then has described this in detail?” It has been described by ṛṣis such as Vasiṣṭha in the scriptures dealing with yoga, by the Vedas (chandobhih) and by the words of the Brahma Sūtras. The Brahma Sūtras, through their words (padaiḥ) such as athāto brahma jijṣāsa (Vedānta-sūtra 1.1) make known (padyate) Brahman. But what type of words are they? They are words of logic (hetumadbhir), which are very decisive (viśeṣataḥ niścitaiḥ). Examples are as follows: īkṣater nāśabdam Brahman is not inexpressible by words, because it is seen that it is conveyed through the words in the Vedas. Vedānta-sūtra 1.1.5 ānandamayo ’bhyāsāt The word ānandamaya refers to para brahman because of the repeated use of the word brahman in relation to it. Vedānta-sūtra 1.1.13

In this verse, the nature of the field is described. Mahābhūtāni refers to ether, air, fire, water and earth. Ahaṅkāra refers to false ego, the cause of the mahābhūtas. Buddhi refers to mahat-tattva, composed of vijṣāna, the cause of ahaṅkāra. Avyakta refers to prakṛti, the cause of mahat-tattva. Indriyāṇi refers to the ten senses: eye, ear, nose, skin, tongue, hands, feet, genital, anus and voice. Eka refers to the mind. The five indriya-gocarā are the sense objects—sound, touch, form, taste and smell. The field is made of these twenty four elements. [Note: Yac ca of verse 3, “what is the field composed of,” has been described here.] Saṅghāta is the body, evolving from the twenty four elements. Icchā, dveṣa, sukha and duḥkha are well known. Cetanā is the mental function constituted of knowledge. Dhṛti is perseverance. Icchā and other qualities mentioned in this verse are qualities of the mind not the soul, and thus they are included in the field. [Note: This does not mean, however, that the soul does not have qualities such as perseverance.] These are representative of saṅkalpa and other qualities mentioned in the śruti (not being an exhaustive list of the qualities of the mind): kāmaḥ saṅkalpo vicikitsā śraddhā dhṛtir hrīr dhīr bhīr ity etat sarvaṁ mana eva Desire, determination, uncertainty, faith, lack of faith, perseverance, lack of perseverance, humility, intelligence, and fear are all products of the mind. Bṛhad Āraṇyaka Upaniṣad 1.5.3 By this list, the qualities of the field which was previously promised by the word yadṛk in verse 3 have been shown. This field which has six transformations (savikāra), such as birth and growth, [Note: The six transformations are birth, growth, maintenance, maturity, decline and death.] has thus been briefly described (udāhṛtam).

The two knowers of the field, the jīva and Paramātmā, which are to be known by distinguishing them from the field just mentioned will be described in detail. The twenty factors to be used for gaining that knowledge are first mentioned in five verses. Of these, eighteen are common to both the devotees and the jṣānīs. However the devotees zealously engage in the one element mentioned in the eleventh verse, mayi cānanya-yogena bhaktir avyabhicāriṇī. The other seventeen items manifest automatically for those who engage in that one item. The bhaktas do not devote effort to the seventeen items individually. This is the tradition. The last two items are especially for the jṣānīs. The meaning of the items such as amānitva is clear, therefore no comments are given.

Śauca refers to both internal and external cleanliness. The smṛti says: śaucaṁ ca dvividhaṁ proktaṁ bāhyam abhyantaraṁ tathā mṛj-jalābhyāṁ smṛtaṁ bāhyaṁ bhāva-śuddhis tathāntaram There are two types of cleanliness described, internal and external. External cleanliness is by water and earth. Internal cleanliness is purity of mind. [Note: There is a similar verse in Śandilya Upaniṣad: śaucaṁ nāma dvividhaṁ bāhyam āntaraṁ ceti tatra mṛj jalābhyāṁ bāhyam manaḥ śuddhir āntaram] Anudarśanam means to observe constantly the detrimental effect of sorrow, caused by birth, death, old age and disease. Asakti means to give up affection for sons and others. Anābhiṣvaṅga means of lack of identification with the happiness and distress of sons and others. Sama-cittatvam means to remain calm in the face of receiving either favorable or unfavorable treatment or events. One should have bhakti, unmixed with karma, jṣāna, tapa or yoga (mayi ananya yogena bhaktir avyabhicāriṇī), unto Me, Śyāmasundara. The word ca here indicates that bhakti may also be performed with a slight mixture of jṣāna or other elements (jṣāna-miśra-bhakti). The first, the unmixed type, will be executed by the devotees. The second type will be executed by the jṣānīs. Some devotees say however that this statement, being in the last six chapters, is for showing that just as ananyā bhakti produces prema, it is also necessary to practice for realization of Paramātmā. And if the sentence refers only to jṣānīs, then the phrase ananya yogena means “by thinking of everything as ātmā.” Avyabhicāriṇī means that one should do it daily. Madhusūdana Sarasvatī says the word avyabhicāriṇī refers to bhakti which cannot be stopped by any means at all. Adhyātma-jṣāna means knowledge related to the ātmā. One should engage oneself in that knowledge constantly. This means that one should be fixed in the purity of the self (adhyātma-jṣāna-nityatvam). One should always keep in mind one’s goal of mokṣa in ones cultivation of knowledge of truth (tattva-jṣānārtha-darśanam). These twenty elements are the common means of attaining knowledge of jīva and Paramātmā. (Jṣānam here refers to the means of knowledge rather than knowledge itself). The additional methods necessary for realizing Paramātmā will be explained later. Doing the opposite of this, such as exhibiting pride instead of lack of pride, is called ignorance.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
5. This has been described by many ṛṣis, by many verses of the Vedas and by the logical, very decisive words of the Brahma Sūtras. 6-7. The field in brief is said to consist of the five gross elements, false ego, mahat tattva, prakṛti, the ten senses, the mind and the five sense objects, desire, hatred, happiness and distress, the body, which acts as a support for the jīva, along with its transformations. 8-12. Freedom from pride; lack of ostentation; non-violence; forbearance; sincerity; worship of the teacher; purity; steadiness in spiritual commitment; control of the mind; detachment from enjoyment of sense objects; lack of identification with body; understanding that all states of existence such as birth, death, old age and disease give rise to suffering; freedom from attachment to others; lack of identification with the condition of sons and others; equanimity of mind in the face of desirable or undesirable events; devotion to Me with undeviating attention; resorting to solitary places with distaste for crowds; constant deliberation on ātmā; and always keeping in mind the goal of liberation—all of these are declared to be the method for gaining knowledge. What is otherwise is ignorance.
Commentary

“You say that You will discuss briefly this knowledge of the field and the knower. By whom has this been discussed in detail?” The nature of the field have described profusely by sages such as Parāśara. ahaṁ tvaṁ ca tathānye bhūtair uhyāma pārthiva guṇa-pravāha-patito bhūta-vargo’pi yāty ayam karma-vaśyā guṇā hy ete sattvādyāḥ pṛthivī-pate avidyā-saṣcitaṁ karma tac cāśeṣeṣu jantuṣu ātmā śuddho’kṣaraḥ śānto nirguṇaḥ prakṛteḥ paraḥ pravṛddhy-apacayau nāsya ekasyākhila-jantuṣu You, I and others are caused by the elements, O king. All living entities, fallen in this flow of material guṇas, proceed through birth and death. They assume the guṇas by karma, and karma is accumulated through ignorance in all the unlimited entities. The pure ātmā is indestructible, peaceful, without those guṇas, superior to prakṛti. It has neither increase nor decrease in all bodies it assumes. Viṣṇu Purāṇa 2.13.69 (As well as by the sages), by all the Vedas (chandobhir) this has been described many times. The Yajur Veda says tasmād vā etasmād ātmana ākāśaḥ sambhūtaḥ: ether arose from the Lord. (Taittirīya Upaniṣad 2.1.3) In the section ending brahma pucchaṁ pratiṣṭhā: brahman is the foundation (Taittirīya Upaniṣad 2.5.1), the five puruṣas consisting of food, prāṇa, mind, knowledge and bliss are described. The first three (food, prāṇa and mind) are material, comprising the kṣetra. The puruṣa composed of knowledge (vijṣāna māyā purusa) is the jīvātmā, the enjoyer of the kṣetra or body. He is the ksetera jṣa. Different from that, at the end of the sequence, is the ānanda māyā puruṣa, the Supreme Lord, who is also kṣetra jṣa. Thus this truth is to be found in the Vedas. As well, by the statements (padaiḥ) of the Brahmā Sūtras, this has been described many times. na viyad aśruteḥ: ether has no origin because it is not otherwise mentioned. [Note: This sutra begins a discussion on whether material ether has an origin or not. The challenge is raised that it has no origin, but this is defeated by later sutras.] (Vedānta Sūtra. 2.3.1) Such verses describe the kṣetra or body. nātmā śruteḥ: soul has no origin because of scriptural statements to that effect. (Vedānta Sūtra 2.3.18) This describes the jīva. parāt tu tac chruteḥ: the actions of the soul arise from the Supreme Lord according to scripture. (Vedānta Sūtra 2.3.39) This describes the Lord. The rest of the verse is clear. Bg 13.6, Bg 13.7, Bg 13.6-7 Maha>aUTaaNYahªarae buiṬrVYa¢-Maev c ) wiNd]Yaai<a dXaEk&- c PaĀ ceiNd]YaGaaecra" )) 6 )) wC^a Ūez" Sau%& du"%& SaºaTaêeTaNaa Da*iTa" ) WTaT+ae}a& SaMaaSaeNa Saivk-arMaudaôTaMa( )) 7 )) mahā-bhūtāny ahaṅkāro buddhir avyaktam eva ca indriyāṇi daśaikaṁ ca paṣca cendriya-gocarāḥ icchā dveṣaḥ sukhaṁ duḥkhaṁ saṅghātaś cetanā dhṛtiḥ etat kṣetraṁ samāsena sa-vikāram udāhṛtam mahā-bhūtāni—the great elements; ahaṅkāraḥ—false ego; buddhiḥ—intelligence; avyaktam—the unmanifested; eva—certainly; ca—also; indriyāṇi—the senses; daśa-ekam—eleven; ca—also; paṣca—five; ca—also; indriya-go-carāḥ—the objects of the senses; icchā—desire; dveṣaḥ—hatred; sukham—happiness; duḥkham—distress; saṅghātaḥ—the aggregate; cetanā—living symptoms; dhṛtiḥ—conviction; etat—all this; kṣetram—the field of activities; samāsena—in summary; sa—vikāram—with interactions; udāhṛtam—exemplified.

What was promised in the first half of verse three is now explained in two verses: a description of the field. Mahābhūtāni refers to the five gross elements; ether, air, fire, water and earth. Ahaṅkara is its cause, called tamasaḥ bhūtādi, the cause of the elements. Buddhi means mahat-tattva, predominated by jṣāna, which is ahaṁkāra’s cause. Avyakta means pradhāna, containing three guṇas. It is maha-tattva’s cause. Indriyāṇi are the ten external senses, the products of aḥaṅkāra in the mode of passion. These are the five knowledge senses and five action senses. Mind, the product of ahaṅkāra in the mode of goodness, is the internal sense. This makes eleven senses. Indriya gocarā refers to the tan mātrās, sense objects—sound, touch, form, taste and smell. They are subtle in form, being situated between the ahaṇkara and the gross elements, and are manifested as qualities of the gross elements (such as sound as the quality of ether, which they produce). They become gross as the objects of perception of the senses. That which is composed of twenty-four elements is known as the field. Desire, hatred, happiness and distress are well known. These are representative of other qualities such as determination (saṅkalpa) which are not mentioned here explicitly. The list given in the verse is not exhaustive. These are all conditions of the mind. The śruti mentions: kāmaḥ saṅkalpo vicikitsā śraddhā dhṛtir hrīr dhīr bhīr etat sarvam mana eva Desire, determination, uncertainty, faith, lack of faith, perseverance, lack of perseverance, humility, intelligence, and fear are all products of the mind. Bṛhad Āraṇyaka Upaniṣad 1.5.3 Of course, desire and other qualities are also qualities of the ātmā, for the Chāndogya Upaniṣad (8.1.5) describes the ātmā as having qualities of satya saṅkalpa and satya kāma. And the sahasra nāma stotra also says: imam stavam bhagavato viṣṇor vyāsena kīrtitam paṭhed ya icchet puruṣaḥ śreyah prāptum sukhāni ca That jīva who desires to attain the highest good and all types of happiness should read the glorification of Viṣṇu chanted by Vyāsa. Mahābhārata 13.135.141 The Lord will also later say that the ātmā is the cause of happiness and suffering in this world (BG 13.21). Thus, though desire and other qualities belong to the ātmā, they also the qualities of the material mind, since they appear through the instrument of the mind, and therefore are included as components of the field. Saṅghataḥ refers to the material body, a transformation of the elements, which functions as the support (ādhṛṭi) of the jīva (cetana) who endeavors for enjoyment or liberation. [Note: This is the same as Rāmānjua’s explanation.] The elements starting with pradhāna and ending with the five gross elements [Note: Pradhāna, mahat tattva, false ego and the five gross elements.] are the basic components of the field indicated by the word yac ca in verse 3. The senses such as the ear and the sense objects such as sound are what take shelter of the field, an explanation of the word yādṛk. Desire and the other qualities are the effects of the field, transformations, explaining the word yad vikārī. The body or field is a support for the jīva to enable him to strive for enjoyment or liberation. This explains the word yataḥ, the purpose. The body (saṅghata) is the svarūpa (yat) of the field. These are the explanations of the phrases mentioned in verse 3. Thus the field along with it transformations (birth, growth, maintenance, maturity, dwindling and death) has been briefly described (uḍahṛtam). Bg 13.8, Bg 13.9, Bg 13.10, Bg 13.11, Bg 13.12, Bg 13.8-12 AMaaiNaTvMadiM>aTvMaih&Saa +aaiNTaraJaRvMa( ) AacaYaaeRPaaSaNa& XaaEc& SQaEYaRMaaTMaiviNaGa]h" )) 8 )) wiNd]YaaQaeRzu vEraGYaMaNahªar Wv c ) JaNMaMa*TYauJaraVYaaiDadu"%daezaNaudXaRNaMa( )) 9 )) ASai¢-rNai>aZv(r)" Pau}adarGa*haidzu ) iNaTYa& c SaMaictaTviMaíaiNaíaePaPaitazu )) 10 )) MaiYa caNaNYaYaaeGaeNa >ai¢-rVYai>acair<aq ) iviv¢-deXaSaeivTvMariTaJaRNaSa&Said )) 11 )) ADYaaTMajaNaiNaTYaTv& TatvjaNaaQaRdXaRNaMa( ) WTaJjaNaiMaiTa Pa[ae¢-MajaNa& YadTaae_NYaQaa )) 12 )) amānitvam adambhitvam ahiṁsā kṣāntir ārjavam ācāryopāsanaṁ śaucaṁ sthairyam ātma-vinigrahaḥ indriyārtheṣu vairāgyam anahaṅkāra eva ca janma-mṛtyu-jarā-vyādhi- duḥkha-doṣānudarśanam asaktir anabhiṣvaṅgaḥ putra-dāra-gṛhādiṣu nityaṁ ca sama-cittatvam iṣṭāniṣṭopapattiṣu mayi cānanya-yogena bhaktir avyabhicāriṇī vivikta-deśa-sevitvam aratir jana-saṁsadi adhyātma-jṣāna-nityatvaṁ tattva-jṣānārtha-darśanam etaj jṣānam iti proktam ajṣānaṁ yad ato 'nyathā amānitvam—humility; adambhitvam—pridelessness; ahiṁsā—nonviolence; kṣāntiḥ—tolerance; ārjavam—simplicity; ācārya-upāsanam—approaching a bona fide spiritual master; śaucam—cleanliness; sthairyam—steadfastness; ātma-vinigrahaḥ—self-control; indriya-artheṣu—in the matter of the senses; vairāgyam—renunciation; anahaṅkāraḥ—being without false egoism; eva—certainly; ca—also; janma—of birth; mṛtyu—death; jarā—old age; vyādhi—and disease; duḥkha—of the distress; doṣa—the fault; anudarśanam—observing; asaktiḥ—being without attachment; anabhiṣvaṅgaḥ—being without association; putra—for son; dāra—wife; gṛha-ādiṣu—home, etc.; nityam—constant; ca—also; sama-cittatvam—equilibrium; iṣṭa—the desirable; aniṣṭa—and undesirable; upapattiṣu—having obtained; mayi—unto Me; ca—also; ananya-yogena—by unalloyed devotional service; bhaktiḥ—devotion; avyabhicāriṇī—without any break; vivikta—to solitary; deśa—places; sevitvam—aspiring; aratiḥ—being without attachment; jana-saṁsadi—to people in general; adhyātma—pertaining to the self; jṣāna—in knowledge; nityatvam—constancy; tattva—jṣāna—of knowledge of the truth; artha—for the object; darśanam—philosophy; etat—all this; jṣānam—knowledge; iti—thus; proktam—declared; ajṣānam—ignorance; yat—that which; ataḥ—from this; anyathā—other.

The Lord will describe in detail the two knowers of the field, who should be the real objects of knowledge, who are distinct from the above mentioned field. But first, in five verses, the Lord describes twenty factors which help in attaining this knowledge. Amānitvā means not expecting good reception or respect. Adambhitva means not performing religious activities to become famous as a religious person. Ahiṁśa means not giving pain to other living entities. Kṣānti means toleration of insult. Ārjava means straightforwardness even to the deceitful. Acāryopāsana means service without motivation to the guru who bestows knowledge. Śauca means internal and external purity. The smṛti [Note: Śrīdhara quotes this verse as a śruti.] says: śaucaṁ ca dvividhaṁ proktaṁ bāhyam abhyantaraṁ tathā mṛj-jalābhyāṁ smṛtaṁ bāhyaṁ bhāva-śuddhis tathāntaram There are two types of cleanliness: external and internal. External cleanliness takes place through rubbing with earth and water, and internal cleanliness by purification of mind. Śandilya Upaniṣad Sthairya means steadiness on the spiritual path. Ātma vinigraha means restraining the mind from sense objects which are obstacles for attaining ātmā. Vairāgya indriyārtheṣu means lack of taste for the sense objects which are obstacles. Anahaṅkara means giving up identification with the body and other material objects. Doṣānudarśana means to contemplate repeatedly the faults of birth and other stages of life which give rise to suffering. Asakti is lack of affection for sons and other persons, as affection is an obstacle for the spiritual goal. Anabhiṣvaṅga means lack of absorption in happiness and distress even when they are present. Sama citta means to be at all times without joy or depression on attaining favorable or unfavorable items. Avyabhicāriṇī bhakti means steady bhakti unto Me, the Supreme Lord in such processes as hearing, with great concentration and service to My devotees (ananya yogena). There should be fondness for solitary places and lack of taste for materialistic assemblies. There should be continuous deliberation on the ātmā (adhyātmā). There should be remembrance in the heart (darśanam) for attaining tattva jṣāna. The tattva or truth is that I am the supreme brahman, as is known from the smṛtis in statements such as the following: vadanti tattva-vidas tattvaṁ yaj jṣānam advayam The knowers of tattva say that tattva means non dual knowledge of brahman, paramātmā and bhagavān. SB 1.2.11 What has been described starting with amānitvā (etat) is the process for realization of tattva (jṣānam) both directly and through transmission from previous authorities, for jṣāṇa means “that by which something is known.” And the opposite of this (anyathā), (meaning pride, pretension, violence, intolerance and the rest) is ignorance, contrary to realization.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

As if His own opinion was unsufficient, Krsna quotes two kinds of authorities: sadhu and sastra. And He, Himself is taking the role of guru. Srila Prabhupada says in his Purport: "The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna, is the highest authority in explaining this knowledge. Still, as a matter of course, learned scholars and standard authorities always give evidence from previous authorities. Krsna is explaining this controversial point regarding the duality and nonduality of the soul and the Supersoul by referring to a scripture, the Vedanta, which is accepted as authority." And then he says: " To enjoy His transcendental bliss, He expands into vijnana‑maya, prana‑maya, jnana‑maya and anna‑maya. In the field of activities the living entity is considered to be the enjoyer, and diff from him is the ananda‑ maya. That means that if the living entity decides to enjoy in dovetailing himself with the ananda‑maya, then he becomes perfect. This is the real pi of the Supreme Lord as the supreme knower of the field, the living entity as the subordinate knower, and the nature of the field of activities. One has to search for this truth in the Vedanta‑sutra, or Brahma‑sutra. It is mentioned here that the codes of the Brahma‑sutra are very nicely arranged according to cause and effect. Some of the sutras, or aphorisms, are na viyad asruteh (2.3.2), natma sruteh (2.3.18), and parat tu tac‑chruteh (2.3.40). The first aphorism indicates the field of activities, the second indicates the living entity, and the third indicates the Supreme Lord, the summum bonum among all the manifestations of various entities." (DS) Although Krsna goes to describe briefly this knowledge, nonethless He is citing where more detailed knowledge can be found ‑ Vedanta Sutra and other Vedic writtings. Srila Prabhupada makes it very clear in the beginning of his Purport, that what actually is confirmed in the duality and non‑ duality of the soul and the Supersoul in the Vedanta sutra. It is confirmed that the soul and the Supersoul are different. There are three types of ksetra:(1) annamaya, (2) pranamaya and (3) jnanamaya. And there are two types of ksetrajna: (1) vijnamaya (the living entity) and (2) anandamaya (the Supreme Lord). Complete knowledge includes annamaya, pranamaya, etc... , which explains the field of activities (the body), the living entity and the Lord. And the verses 8‑12 explain what knowledge means: how the soul gets out of the field of activities. This is called liberation.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study Key verse
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Krishna cites the authorities: Summarizing philosophical conclusions of great sages, especially

Vyasdeva’s Vedanta-Sutra

Focus of Learning

(a) Way of learned scholars and standard authorities

They always give evidence from past authorities
e.g. Krishna gives such evidence, although He is the highest authority
Besides Krishna Himself, Vyasadeva is a great sage who explains the concept of duality perfectly in Vedanta-sutra
Vyasdeva’s father, Parasara, also a great sage, writes in his books of religiosity: “aham tvam ca tathanye…”
“We – You, I and All living entities are transcendental, although in material bodies”
Now fallen into three modes: According to karma, some are higher and some are lower
It is all due to ignorance
But Supersoul is infallible and transcendental
Ref. Original Vedas, especially Katha Upanishad: Establishes the distinction between soul, Supersoul and the body
Many great sages have explained this: Parasara is the principal among them
Word “chandobhih” refers to various Vedic literatures e.g. Taittiriya Upanishad, a branch of Yajur Veda, describes nature, living entity and the Supreme Personality of Godhead

(b) 5 stages of Brahman realization: Brahma puccham pratistha (Taittiriya Upanishad 2.9) –

‘Annamaya’ – Food is the Supreme object of realization e.g. consciousness of young child or amoeba
‘Pranamaya’ – Realizing the Supreme Absolute Truth in living symptoms or life forms. One seeks to preserve his life
‘Jnanamaya’ – Realization to the point of thinking, feeling and willing
One appreciates the subtle interactions of mind and intelligence, emotions, aesthetics, etc. as ultimate object of realisation
‘Vijnanamaya’ – Realization in which the living entity’s mind and life symptoms are distinguished from the living entity himself
To realize the self as different from the field of activity, including the subtle body
Thus the soul itself becomes the ultimate object of realisation
‘Anandamaya’ – Supreme stage of realisation of all-blissful nature
One realizes the distinction between the self and the Supreme Self and enters into a blissful loving relationship

(c) Relationship of 5 above mentioned stages in terms of kshetra and kshetra-jna

Kshetra includes:
Gross body – Ananadamaya and Pranamaya
Subtle body – Jnanamaya
Kshetra-jna includes:
Individual soul – Vijnanamaya
Supreme Soul – Anandamaya

Texts 13.6* – 13.7*

COMMON THEME: This verse indicates that field or body is a non-permanent material thing and ksetra-jna

or knower of the field is different from the field

Text 13.6 explains ‘what the fields of activities consist of’
Text 13.7 explains ‘the transformations’ and ‘the interactions of the field of activities’

(a) Components of the fields of activities (Total: 24 in number)

Five great elements
Five sense objects
Eleven senses including the mind
Intelligence and false ego
Unmanifested stage of three modes called Pradhana

(b) Interactions of gross body – desire, hatred, happiness, distress

(c) Interactions of subtle body – Living symptoms represented by consciousness and convictions

(d) Basis of all this knowledge – Authorities as per Bg. 13.5 Translation

(e) Pradhana

‘’Five great elements’’ are a gross representation of false ego
Which represents the primal stage of false ego which is technically called as
Materialisitic conception or tamasa buddhih (Intelligence in ignorance)
Which represents unmanifested three modes called Pradhana

(f) Six changes of the body – Takes birth, grows, stays, by-products, decay and death. Thus Srila

Prabhupada answers the “vikaras” or the changes undergone by the body, as mentioned in

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.5 Gitam, It has been sung of, spoken of; bahudha, in various ways; rsibhih, by the Rsis, by Vasistha and others; sung prthak, separately; vividhaih, by the different kinds of; chandobhih, Vedic texts-chandas mean the Rg-veda etc; by them; ca, and; besides, hetumadbhih, by the rational; and viniscitaih, by the convincing, i.e. by those which are productive of certain knowledge-not by those which are in an ambiguous form; brahma-sutra-padaih eva, sentences themselves which are indicative of and lead to Brahman. Brahma-sutras are the sentences indicative of Brahman. They are called padani since Brahman is reached, known, through them. By them indeed has been sung the true nature of the field and the Knower of the field (-this is understood). The Self is verily known through such sentences as, 'The Self alone is to be meditated upon' (Br. 1.4.7), which are indicative of and lead to Brahman. To Arjuna who had become interested as a result of the eulogy, the Lord says:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.5 It is this truth regarding the Kestra and Ksetrajna that has been sung in various ways by Parasara and others seers. For example, 'I and you and others are composed of the elements; and the elements, following the stream of alities, assume a shape; these alities, Sattva and the rest, are dependent on Karma; and Karma, accumulated by nescience, influences the condition of all beings. The self is pure, imperishable, tranil, void of alities and is pre-eminent over Prakrti' (V. P., 2.13.69-71). Similarly: 'The body, characterised by head, hands, feet and the like is different from Purusa.' Which of these can I designate by the name I?' (Ibid., 2.13.89). And also: 'Are you the head or the belly? Are you indeed the feet and other limbs, or do they belong to you, O King? You are distinct in your nature from all your members, O King. Know, O King, and understand "Who am I" '. (Ibid., 1.13.102-3). Moreover they state that Vasudeva constitutes the Self of the distinct entities (Ksetra and Ksetrajna): 'The senses, Manas, Buddhi, vigour, splendour, strength, courage, both Ksetra and Ksetrajna have Vasudeva for their self. (Ma. Bha. Sa., 149.136). In various distinctive hymns, namely, in the Vedas, Rg, Yajus, Saman and Atharvan, the distinction of body and the self has been sung. The nature of the body is described in the following text: 'From this Self, verily, ether arose; from the ether, air; from air, fire; from fire, water; from water, the earth; from the earth, herbs; from the herbs, food; from food, the person. The same person, verily, consists of the essence of food' (Tai. U., 2.1.2). Afterwards that which is inner than this (body) and which consists of Prana (or the vital breath), and that which is inner than this and which consists of mind are described. The nature of Ksetrjna is stated in the passage: 'Verily, other than, and within, that one that consists of mind, that (the individual Self) consists of understanding' (Ibid., 2.4.2). Later, the Supreme Brahman is stated in the text; 'Verily, other than, and within, that one consisting of understanding, is the Supreme Self that consists of bliss' (Ibid., 1.5.2). This is stated to be the Surpeme Self, consisting of bliss, as forming the inner Self of the individual self. Similarly in the three Vedas, Rg, Saman and Atharvan, here and there, the distinctive existence of the Ksetra and the Ksetrajna is affirmed with Brahman for their Self. Likewise, the same purpose is taught in the words of the Brahma-sutras, namely, the aphorisms about Brahman, known also as the Sariraka-sutras, which are characterised by reasoning, decision and conclusion. In the Sutras commencing with, 'Not ether, on account of the absence of the Sruti' (B. S., 2.3.1), the nature and the mode of the Ksetra is determined. In the Sutras commencing with 'Not the self, on account of the Sruti and on account of the eternity, (which is made out) from them' (Ibid., 2.3.18), the true nature of the Ksetrajna is determined. In the Sutras 'But from the Supreme, this being declared by Sruti' (Ibid., 2.3.40), that Ksetrajna has the Lord for Its Self on account of Its being under the control of the Lord, is declared. It has been sung in various ways; the meaning of this Sloka is this: Listen about the truths of the Ksetra and the Ksetrajna which have been expounded in numerous ways and declared by Me in a lucid and brief manner.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.4-5 Tat Ksetram etc. Rsibhih etc. Why it modifies : due to what this [Field] suffers modification. Collectively : not at all separately (one by one). [The Bhagavat] decides all the estions in a general way. Of course, many a time in many a way this has been declared by the seers and by the scritpures. But, let Me (the Bhagavat) explain this collectively (briefly).
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.5 Sages have sung in many ways, in various distinctive chants and also in the suggestive words indicative of the Absolute, full of reasoning and decisive.
Commentary

13.5 ऋषिभिः by Rishis? बहुधा in many ways? गीतम् sung? छन्दोभिः in chants? विविधैः various? पृथक् distinctive? ब्रह्मसूत्रपदैः in the suggestive words indicative of Brahman? च and? एव even? हेतुमद्भिः full of reasoning? विनिश्चितैः decisive.Commentary Many sages (such as Vasishtha) have talked about it (the true nature of the field and its knower) since ancient times. The ancient hymns? such as the Rig Veda? have explained this in various ways.The word Brahma Sutras refers to the Vedanta Sutras written by Vyasa or Badarayanacharya in order to reconcile the mutually contradictory passages in the Upanishads. A study of the Brahma Sutras is very necessary in order to comprehend the esoteric significance of the Upanishads. The Braham Sutras are also known by the name Sariraka Sutras because fifteen Sutras in the third Pada of the second chapter deal with the Sarira or Kshetra (body).The true nature of the field and its knower has also been taught in the Brahma Sutras which deal with Brahman such as Atmanyevopasita (only as the Self? let a man meditate on It.) (Brihadaranyaka Upanishad? I.4.7).They are full of reasoning? convincing and decisive. There is no doubt in the words or passages that treat of Brahman.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.5 It has been sung of in various ways by the Rsis, separately by the different kinds [The different branches of Vedic texts.] of Vedic texts, and also by the rational and convicing sentences themselves which are indicatvie of and lead of Brahman.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.5 Seers have sung of It in various ways, in many hymns and sacred Vedic songs, weighty in thought and convincing in argument.
Related values
Kshama (Forgiveness / Patience)Shraddha (Faith / Reverence)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)
Related verses
BG 15.15 BG 2.45 BG 13.4 SB 1.1.3 SB 1.2.28 SB 11.21.35 CC Madhya 25.143 CC Ādi 7.131 CC Madhya 6.135 Bṛhadāraṇyaka Upaniṣad 2.4.5Chāndogya Upaniṣad 6.8.7
Concepts
Maya
Many sages have described knowledge of the field and knower in many ways, in the Vedānta and other authorized scriptures.
Practical Applications
  • Trust scriptural authority as the basis for serious philosophy.
  • Don't manufacture personal philosophy when the elders have spoken.
  • Study primary sources, not just contemporary digests.
Reflection Questions
  • Where do I rely on contemporary digest over primary scripture?
  • What primary text deserves my deeper attention?

A traveler walking a long forest path finds that countless others have marked it before him — cairns of stone, notches on trees, faded inscriptions. He need not blaze his own trail; he need only learn to read the marks. The Vedānta is such a path, and the ṛṣis are the markers.

Vyāsa composes the Brahma-sūtra

Tradition records that Śrīla Vyāsadeva, the literary incarnation of the Lord, composed the Brahma-sūtra at the foot of the Sarasvatī to compress the meaning of all the Upaniṣads into terse aphorisms. Generations of ācāryas — Śaṅkara, Rāmānuja, Madhva, Baladeva — have written commentaries on those same sūtras.

Kṛṣṇa here cites the brahma-sūtra-pada directly. He is not introducing new philosophy; He is gathering the cords of an already-woven rope. The Gītā stands inside the Vedāntic tradition, not outside it.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.6-7

↗
మహాభూతాన్యహఙ్కారో బుద్ధిరవ్యక్తమేవ చ । ఇన్ద్రియాణి దశైకం చ పఞ్చ చేన్ద్రియగోచరా: ॥ ౬ ॥ ఇచ్ఛా ద్వేష: సుఖం దు:ఖం సఙ్ఘాతశ్చేతనా ధృతి: । ఏతత్క్షేత్రం సమాసేన సవికారముదాహృతమ్ ॥ ౭ ॥
mahā-bhūtāny ahaṅkāro
[mahaa-bhootaany ahankaaro]
buddhir avyaktam eva ca
[buddhir avyaktam eva cha]
indriyāṇi daśaikaṁ ca
[indriyaani dashaikam cha]
pañca cendriya-gocarāḥ
[pancha chendriya-gocharaah]
icchā dveṣaḥ sukhaṁ duḥkhaṁ
[ichchaa dveshah sukham duhkham]
saṅghātaś cetanā dhṛtiḥ
[sanghaatash chetanaa dhritih]
etat kṣetraṁ samāsena
[etat kshetram samaasena]
sa-vikāram udāhṛtam
[sa-vikaaram udaahritam]
mahā - bhūtāni — the great elements ahaṅkāraḥ — false ego buddhiḥ — intelligence avyaktam — the unmanifested eva — certainly ca — also indriyāṇi — the senses daśa - ekam — eleven ca — also pañca — five ca — also indriya - go - carāḥ — the objects of the senses icchā — desire dveṣaḥ — hatred sukham — happiness duḥkham — distress saṅghātaḥ — the aggregate cetanā — living symptoms dhṛtiḥ — conviction etat — all this kṣetram — the field of activities samāsena — in summary sa - vikāram — with interactions udāhṛtam — exemplified .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
mahā-bhūtāny ahaṅkāro
mahā - bhūtāni
the great elements
ahaṅkāraḥ
false ego
buddhir avyaktam eva ca
buddhiḥ
intelligence
avyaktam
the unmanifested
eva
certainly
ca
also
indriyāṇi daśaikaṁ ca
indriyāṇi
the senses
daśa - ekam
eleven
ca
also
pañca cendriya-gocarāḥ
pañca
five
ca
also
indriya - go - carāḥ
the objects of the senses
icchā dveṣaḥ sukhaṁ duḥkhaṁ
icchā
desire
dveṣaḥ
hatred
sukham
happiness
duḥkham
distress
saṅghātaś cetanā dhṛtiḥ
saṅghātaḥ
the aggregate
cetanā
living symptoms
dhṛtiḥ
conviction
etat kṣetraṁ samāsena
etat
all this
kṣetram
the field of activities
samāsena
in summary
sa-vikāram udāhṛtam
sa - vikāram
with interactions
udāhṛtam
exemplified .
  • mahā - bhūtāni — the great elements
    Earth, water, fire, air, ether — the five gross constituents from Sāṅkhya analysis. Kṛṣṇa lists them first because they are the most visible. The map starts from the outside and works inward.
  • ahaṅkāraḥ — false ego
    Literally "the I-maker." Note carefully: ahaṅkāra is listed as part of the *field*, not as the knower. The sense of "I am the body" is itself something the soul can witness and disown.
  • buddhiḥ — intelligence
    Higher discriminating faculty — but still material, still part of the field. Even the sharpest intellect is an instrument the soul uses, not the soul itself.
  • avyaktam — the unmanifested
    Pradhāna — primal matter before differentiation. Kṛṣṇa includes it in the field to forestall any view that subtle matter is somehow spiritual. The unmanifest is still material.
  • icchā — desire
    Listed alongside hatred, happiness, distress — desire is a *modification of the field*, not of the soul. This single placement deflates every theology that locates wanting in the ātman.
  • dhṛtiḥ — conviction
    Steadfastness, holding-power. Even one's deepest convictions belong to the field. The knower remains even when conviction is shaken — a teaching of great solace in spiritual crisis.
The five great elements, false ego, intelligence, the unmanifested, the ten senses and the mind, the five sense objects, desire, hatred, happiness, distress, the aggregate, the life symptoms, and convictions – all these are considered, in summary, to be the field of activities and its interactions.

From all the authoritative statements of the great sages, the Vedic hymns and the aphorisms of the Vedānta-sūtra, the components of this world can be understood as follows. First there are earth, water, fire, air and ether. These are the five great elements ( mahā-bhūta ). Then there are false ego, intelligence and the unmanifested stage of the three modes of nature. Then there are five senses for acquiring knowledge: the eyes, ears, nose, tongue and skin. Then five working senses: voice, legs, hands, anus and genitals. Then, above the senses, there is the mind, which is within and which can be called the sense within. Therefore, including the mind, there are eleven senses altogether. Then there are the five objects of the senses: smell, taste, form, touch and sound. Now the aggregate of these twenty-four elements is called the field of activity. If one makes an analytical study of these twenty-four subjects, then he can very well understand the field of activity. Then there are desire, hatred, happiness and distress, which are interactions, representations of the five great elements in the gross body. The living symptoms, represented by consciousness, and convictions are the manifestation of the subtle body – mind, ego and intelligence. These subtle elements are included within the field of activities. The five great elements are a gross representation of the false ego, which in turn represents the primal stage of false ego technically called the materialistic conception, or tāmasa-buddhi, intelligence in ignorance. This, further, represents the unmanifested stage of the three modes of material nature. The unmanifested modes of material nature are called pradhāna. One who desires to know the twenty-four elements in detail along with their interactions should study the philosophy in more detail. In Bhagavad-gītā, a summary only is given. The body is the representation of all these factors, and there are changes of the body, which are six in number: the body is born, it grows, it stays, it produces by-products, then it begins to decay, and at the last stage it vanishes. Therefore the field is a nonpermanent material thing. However, the kṣetra-jña, the knower of the field, its proprietor, is different.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

The five great elements, false ego, intelligence, the unmanifested, the ten senses and the mind, the five sense objects ‑ these are the 24 elements of Sankhya philosophy which the material world is divided into. Desire, hatred, happiness, distress, the aggregate, the life symptoms and convictions ‑ these are further elements of the field of activities, manifested out of the different reactions of the 24 elements within the body. The 24 elements and its different interactions give birth to these last elements: desire, hatred, etc... (these are qualities of the mind) Srila Prabhupada says in his Purport: " The body is the representation of all these factors, and there are changes of the body, which are six in number: the body is born, it grows, it stays, it produces by‑products, then it begins to decay, and at the last stage it vanishes. Therefore the field is a nonpermanent material thing. However, the ksetra‑jna, the knower of the field, its proprietor, is different." The next verses will describe the process of knowledge more from the point of view of jnana‑yoga then bhakti‑yoga, although there are some elements that are meant for bhakti‑yogis. Some other elements are only meant for jnana‑yogis, but most of the elements are meant for both. What does he get a person who follows the process of knowledge? He will get knowledge of the body, the soul and the Supersoul, by which the ksetrajna will be able to separate himself from the ksetra.

[C. KRSNA'S FURTHER ANSWER TO QUESTION 5: THE PROCESS OF KNOWLEDGE AND LIBERATION ( 13.8‑12) The process by which the knower of the field, the soul, transcends the limitations of his field of activities is called the process of knowledge. This process includes humility and pridelessness, as well as its most important item: accepting the shelter of a bona‑fide spiritual master and practicing unalloyed devotional service under his care. ]

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

The field of activities for the conditioned soul can be compared to a playground in a backyard sur-

rounded by a big fence. The child playing there has freedom to play as he wishes, but he cannot

extend his activities beyond the allotted field. He is limited by the fence. Similarly, the living entity is

limited by the interactions of his body, mind and karma, which constitute his field of activities. An

earthworm, for example, has a very small field of activities. He cannot read, write, jump or run. He

can simply crawl through the dirt, surface when it rains and crawl back into the soil when the rain

stops. A dog has a relatively larger field of activities, and a human being a still larger one. One’s

kṣetra is based on his karma.

A wealthy child will possess many toys to play with in his backyard, but he is still restricted by the

fence. Although he may be proud of the scope of his playground, and even think himself happy

and free, with his swing and toy car and sandbox, he is nevertheless absorbed only in an insignifi-

cant backyard. He knows nothing of life beyond the fence. Similarly, the living entity, according to

the limitations of the body and mind he has received through his karma, cannot see beyond his lim-

ited field of activities.

Every living entity’s kṣetra is arranged by his karma, through the agency of māyā. Kṛṣṇa therefore is

not partial, because as the Supersoul, the knower of all kṣetras, He simply sanctions the awarding

of each living entity’s field of activities.

Texts 13.8-12

This is a continuation of Kṛṣṇa’s explanation of knowledge. Kṛṣṇa has already defined knowledge as

knowing the field and the two knowers of the field. These verses describe the process of obtaining

jñāna. According to Śrīla Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura, of the twenty items mentioned, seventeen

apply to both the jñānī and the bhakta. The last two, accepting the importance of self-realization

(adyātma-jñāna-nityatvam) and philosophical search for the Absolute Truth (tattva-jñānārtha-

darśanam), are technically only for the jñānī. “Constant and unalloyed devotion to Me” is the sole

Bhagavad Gita Notes

quality specifically for the devotee. All other qualities come to a devotee who exclusively endeavors

for constant, unalloyed devotion.

These twenty items include qualities—such as cleanliness—(which, if developed, are favorable for

spiritual advancement) and elements of the process of advancement such as approaching a bona

fide spiritual master and perceiving the evils of birth, death, disease and old age. Integrated as a

process, these items are the means of acquiring transcendental knoweldge, or an accurate under-

standing of the body, the soul and the Supersoul.

Therefore, taken as a process that carries one to transcendence, these twenty items have nothing

to do with the field of activity and its interactions.

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.6 Mahabhutani, the great elements: Those elements which are great owing to their pervasion of all midifications, and which are subtle. As for the gross elements, they will be spoken of by the word indriya-gocarah, objects of the senses. Ahankarah, egoism, which is the source of the great elements and consists of the idea of 'I'. Buddhih, intellect, the source of egoism and consisting of the faculty of judgement; ca, and; its cause, the avyaktam eva, Unmanifest itself, the Undifferentiated, the power of God spoken of in, 'Maya of Mine৷৷.difficult to cross' (7.14). The word eva (itself) is used for singling out Prakrti (Nature). The Prakrti divided eightfold [The undifferentiated (avyakta), mahat, egoism and the five uncompunded subtle elements] is this much alone. The word ca (and) is used for joining the various categories. The dasa, ten; indriyani, organs : The five, organs ear etc., which are called sense-organs since they produce perception, and the (other) five organs-organ of speech, hands, etc.-which are called motor-organs since they accomplish actions. They are ten. Ekam ca, and the one-which is that?-the mind, the eleventh, possessed of the power of thinking etc. (see fn. on p. 173). Ca, and; the panca, five; indriya-gacarah, objects of the senses-such objects as sound etc. The followers of the Sankhya call these which are such the twenty-four categories. Thereafter, the Lord now says that even those alities which the Vaisesikas speak of as the attributes of the sould are certainly the attributes of the field, but not of the Knower of the field:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.6 - 13.7 The 'great elements, the Ahankara, the Buddhi and the Avyakta' are substances that originate the Ksetra. The 'great elements' are the earth, water, fire, air and ether. The 'Ahankara' here means Bhutadi (primeval element). The 'Buddhi' is called Mahat; the 'Avyakta' is known as the Prakrti. The 'ten senses and the one' and the five objects of senses are principles depending on the Ksetra. The 'five sensorial organs' are ear, skin, eye, tongue and nose. The five motor organs are speech, hands, feet, and the organs of excretion and reproduction. These are the ten senses. The Manas is the additional 'one' moe. The 'objects of the senses' are five - sound, touch, form, taste and smell. Desire, hatred, pleasure and pain, being the transformation of the Ksetra, are said to be the modifications of the Ksetra. Though desire, hatred, pleasure and pain are the alities of the self, yet they originate from the association of the self with the Ksetra. Sri Krsna will state that they are the attributes of the self; 'In the experience of pleasure and pain, the self is said to be the cause' (13.20). The combination of elements serves as the support (Adhrti) of the intelligent self. As such, the word Adhrti means substratum. The combination of material elements has arisen as the substratum for the self to experience pleasure and pain, and for aciring worldly experiences and the final release. The combination of elements is formed by substances commencing from the Prakrti and ending with the earth; it is the basis of senses which are endowed with the modifications of the nature of desire, hatred, pleasure and pain. These form a Sanghata or an association of elements. It serves as the basis of the experience of pleasure and pain by the individual self. This is what is said of the Ksetra. This Ksetra has been explained briefly with its modifications and effects. Now certain alities, the effects of the Ksetra, worthy of being acired as being the means for securing the knowledge of the self, are enumerated.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.6 See Comment under 13.7
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.6 The great elements, egoism, intellect, and also the Unmanifested Nature, the ten senses and one (mind), and the five objects of the senses.
Commentary

13.6 महाभूतानि the great elements? अहङ्कारः egoism? बुद्धिः intellect? अव्यक्तम् the unmanifested (MulaPrakriti)? एव even? च and? इन्द्रियाणि the senses? दश ten? एकम् one? च and? पञ्च five? च and? इन्द्रियगोचराः objects of the senses.Commentary The field and its modifications are described in this verse. The twentyfour principles of the Sankhya school of philosophy are mentioned here.Great elements Earth? water? fire? air and ether are so called because they pervade all modifications of matter. The elements here referred to are the subtle? not the gross ones.Egoism is the cause of the great elements. It is the selfarrogating principle. Intellect is the cause of egoism. The function of the intellect is determination. Buddhi is the faculty of determination. The cause of the intellect is the Unmanifested (which is the undifferentiated energy of the Lord). (Cf.VII.14 Daivi hyesha gunamayi mama maya duratyaya -- This divine illusion of Mine? caused by the alities? is difficult to cross over.) The above Nature is divided eightfold (Cf.VII.4).The ten senses are the five organs of knowledge (ears? skin? eyes? tongue and nose)? so called because they enable the mind to get knowledge of the external world? and the five organs of action (hands? feet? mouth? anus and the generative organ)? so called because they perform actions.The one This is the mind. This is the eleventh sense whose function is thinking and doubting (Sankalpa and Vikalpa).The five objects of the senses are sound? touch? form (colour)? taste and smell. These are the fivefol pastures of the senses.All the great elements? egoism? intellect? the senses and mind are all absorbed in the Unmanifested at the time of the cosmic dissolution.Mind is Maya. Mind is Avidya (ignorance). Mind is at the root of all activities. It gives strength to desires? fosters fear and builds castles in the air. It confers force on egoism and stimultates,aspirations. Every tendency has its origin in the mind. It augments passions? gives strength to hope and awakens the sense of duality. It increases ignorance and plunges the senses in the ocean of senseobjects. It creates distinctions and differences. It separates? divides and limits. It is a strong wall or an iron barrier that stands between the individual soul and the Absolute. It is this mind that has brought Brahman to the condition of the individual soul. It is the storehouse of error? cravings? doubt? delusion and ignorance. It is an everrevolving wheel that generates thoughts. It is a miraculous thoughtproducing machine. It creates at one moment. It destroys at the next moment.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.6 The great elements, egoism, intellect and the Unmanifest itself; the ten organs and the one, and the five objects of the senses;
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.6 The five great fundamentals (earth, fire, air, water and ether), personality, intellect, the mysterious life force, the ten organs of perception and action, the mind and the five domains of sensation;
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Ahimsa (Non-violence / Compassion)Arjava (Simplicity / Straightforwardness)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)
Related verses
BG 7.4 BG 14.5 BG 3.42 SB 3.26.11 SB 11.22.10 SB 2.5.25 CC Madhya 20.275 CC Ādi 5.55 CC Madhya 24.79 Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.4Kaṭha Upaniṣad 1.3.10
The five great elements, false ego, intelligence, the unmanifest, ten senses, mind, five sense-objects, desire, hatred, happiness, distress, the aggregate, life-symptoms, conviction — all these constitute the field.
Practical Applications
  • Memorize the field-components as a contemplation map.
  • Locate where in this list a particular disturbance lives.
  • Use the map to disidentify from elements that aren't the soul.
Reflection Questions
  • Which field-component is most active in my present disturbance?
  • What does locating it as 'field' do?

A cartographer drafting a city map labels every district before he describes any street. Kṛṣṇa here is the cartographer of the body: He names the five elements, the senses, the mind, desire, hatred, happiness, distress — the whole catalog of the field. With this map, the soul can finally tell where it is and where it is not.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.8-12

↗
అమానిత్వమదమ్భిత్వమహింసా క్షాన్తిరార్జవమ్ । ఆచార్యోపాసనం శౌచం స్థైర్యమాత్మవినిగ్రహ: ॥ ౮ ॥ ఇన్ద్రియార్థేషు వైరాగ్యమనహఙ్కార ఏవ చ । జన్మమృత్యుజరావ్యాధిదు:ఖదోషానుదర్శనమ్ ॥ ౯ ॥ అసక్తిరనభిష్వఙ్గ: పుత్రదారగృహాదిషు । నిత్యం చ సమచిత్తత్వమిష్టానిష్టోపపత్తిషు ॥ ౧౦ ॥ మయి చానన్యయోగేన భక్తిరవ్యభిచారిణీ । వివిక్తదేశసేవిత్వమరతిర్జనసంసది ॥ ౧౧ ॥ అధ్యాత్మజ్ఞాననిత్యత్వం తత్త్వజ్ఞానార్థదర్శనమ్ । ఏతజ్జ్ఞానమితి ప్రోక్తమజ్ఞానం యదతోఽన్యథా ॥ ౧౨ ॥
amānitvam adambhitvam
[amaanitvam adambhitvam]
ahiṁsā kṣāntir ārjavam
[ahimsaa kshaantir aarjavam]
ācāryopāsanaṁ śaucaṁ
[aachaaryopaasanam shaucham]
sthairyam ātma-vinigrahaḥ
[sthairyam aatma-vinigrahah]
indriyārtheṣu vairāgyam
[indriyaartheshu vairaagyam]
anahaṅkāra eva ca
[anahankaara eva cha]
janma-mṛtyu-jarā-vyādhi-
[janma-mrityu-jaraa-vyaadhi-]
duḥkha-doṣānudarśanam
[duhkha-doshaanudarshanam]
asaktir anabhiṣvaṅgaḥ
[asaktir anabhishvangah]
putra-dāra-gṛhādiṣu
[putra-daara-grihaadishu]
nityaṁ ca sama-cittatvam
[nityam cha sama-chittatvam]
iṣṭāniṣṭopapattiṣu
[ishtaanishtopapattishu]
mayi cānanya-yogena
[mayi chaananya-yogena]
bhaktir avyabhicāriṇī
[bhaktir avyabhichaarinee]
vivikta-deśa-sevitvam
[vivikta-desha-sevitvam]
aratir jana-saṁsadi
[aratir jana-samsadi]
adhyātma-jñāna-nityatvaṁ
[adhyaatma-jnaana-nityatvam]
tattva-jñānārtha-darśanam
[tattva-jnaanaartha-darshanam]
etaj jñānam iti proktam
[etaj jnaanam iti proktam]
ajñānaṁ yad ato ’nyathā
[ajnaanam yad ato ’nyathaa]
amānitvam — humility adambhitvam — pridelessness ahiṁsā — nonviolence kṣāntiḥ — tolerance ārjavam — simplicity ācārya - upāsanam — approaching a bona fide spiritual master śaucam — cleanliness sthairyam — steadfastness ātma - vinigrahaḥ — self-control indriya - artheṣu — in the matter of the senses vairāgyam — renunciation anahaṅkāraḥ — being without false egoism eva — certainly ca — also janma — of birth mṛtyu — death jarā — old age vyādhi — and disease duḥkha — of the distress doṣa — the fault anudarśanam — observing asaktiḥ — being without attachment anabhiṣvaṅgaḥ — being without association putra — for son dāra — wife gṛha - ādiṣu — home, etc. nityam — constant ca — also sama - cittatvam — equilibrium iṣṭa — the desirable aniṣṭa — and undesirable upapattiṣu — having obtained mayi — unto Me ca — also ananya - yogena — by unalloyed devotional service bhaktiḥ — devotion avyabhicāriṇī — without any break vivikta — to solitary deśa — places sevitvam — aspiring aratiḥ — being without attachment jana - saṁsadi — to people in general adhyātma — pertaining to the self jñāna — in knowledge nityatvam — constancy tattva - jñāna — of knowledge of the truth artha — for the object darśanam — philosophy etat — all this jñānam — knowledge iti — thus proktam — declared ajñānam — ignorance yat — that which ataḥ — from this anyathā — other .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
amānitvam adambhitvam
amānitvam
humility
adambhitvam
pridelessness
ahiṁsā kṣāntir ārjavam
ahiṁsā
nonviolence
kṣāntiḥ
tolerance
ārjavam
simplicity
ācāryopāsanaṁ śaucaṁ
ācārya - upāsanam
approaching a bona fide spiritual master
śaucam
cleanliness
sthairyam ātma-vinigrahaḥ
sthairyam
steadfastness
ātma - vinigrahaḥ
self-control
indriya - artheṣu
in the matter of the senses
indriyārtheṣu vairāgyam
vairāgyam
renunciation
anahaṅkāra eva ca
anahaṅkāraḥ
being without false egoism
eva
certainly
ca
also
janma-mṛtyu-jarā-vyādhi-
janma
of birth
mṛtyu
death
jarā
old age
vyādhi
and disease
duḥkha-doṣānudarśanam
duḥkha
of the distress
doṣa
the fault
anudarśanam
observing
asaktir anabhiṣvaṅgaḥ
asaktiḥ
being without attachment
anabhiṣvaṅgaḥ
being without association
putra-dāra-gṛhādiṣu
putra
for son
dāra
wife
gṛha - ādiṣu
home, etc.
nityaṁ ca sama-cittatvam
nityam
constant
ca
also
sama - cittatvam
equilibrium
iṣṭāniṣṭopapattiṣu
iṣṭa
the desirable
aniṣṭa
and undesirable
upapattiṣu
having obtained
mayi cānanya-yogena
mayi
unto Me
ca
also
ananya - yogena
by unalloyed devotional service
bhaktir avyabhicāriṇī
bhaktiḥ
devotion
avyabhicāriṇī
without any break
vivikta-deśa-sevitvam
vivikta
to solitary
deśa
places
sevitvam
aspiring
aratir jana-saṁsadi
aratiḥ
being without attachment
jana - saṁsadi
to people in general
adhyātma
pertaining to the self
adhyātma-jñāna-nityatvaṁ
jñāna
in knowledge
nityatvam
constancy
tattva-jñānārtha-darśanam
tattva - jñāna
of knowledge of the truth
artha
for the object
darśanam
philosophy
etaj jñānam iti proktam
etat
all this
jñānam
knowledge
iti
thus
proktam
declared
ajñānaṁ yad ato ’nyathā
ajñānam
ignorance
yat
that which
ataḥ
from this
anyathā
other .
  • amānitvam — humility
    Listed *first* of all twenty qualities. Without amānitva — the absence of demand for honor — none of the others can mature. Pride poisons every other virtue.
  • ācārya - upāsanam — approaching a bona fide spiritual master
    Upāsana means "sitting near, serving." The path of knowledge requires not just reading but proximity — physical, then spiritual — to a living teacher. The Gītā here makes guru-praṇāli non-optional.
  • vairāgyam — renunciation
    Vi- + √rañj — "discoloration of attachment." Not the killing of desire but its loss of color, of pull. The senses still function; their grip relaxes.
  • ananya - yogena — by unalloyed devotional service
    Ananya — "not-other." The bhakti recommended is exclusive — no second object. This phrase shows that even in this jñāna-heavy chapter, bhakti remains the highest item on the list.
  • avyabhicāriṇī — without any break
    Vyabhicāra means "straying, infidelity." Devotion is qualified here as faithful, unbroken — not the bhakti of one ecstatic week and six dry months.
  • tattva - jñāna — of knowledge of the truth
    The list closes by naming its own destination. All twenty qualities are means; tattva-jñāna is the end. Kṛṣṇa is honest: ignorance (ajñāna) is everything other than this.
Humility; pridelessness; nonviolence; tolerance; simplicity; approaching a bona fide spiritual master; cleanliness; steadiness; self-control; renunciation of the objects of sense gratification; absence of false ego; the perception of the evil of birth, death, old age and disease; detachment; freedom from entanglement with children, wife, home and the rest; even-mindedness amid pleasant and unpleasant events; constant and unalloyed devotion to Me; aspiring to live in a solitary place; detachment from the general mass of people; accepting the importance of self-realization; and philosophical search for the Absolute Truth – all these I declare to be knowledge, and besides this whatever there may be is ignorance.

This process of knowledge is sometimes misunderstood by less intelligent men as being the interaction of the field of activity. But actually this is the real process of knowledge. If one accepts this process, then the possibility of approaching the Absolute Truth exists. This is not the interaction of the twenty-four elements, as described before. This is actually the means to get out of the entanglement of those elements. The embodied soul is entrapped by the body, which is a casing made of the twenty-four elements, and the process of knowledge as described here is the means to get out of it. Of all the descriptions of the process of knowledge, the most important point is described in the first line of the eleventh verse. Mayi cānanya-yogena bhaktir avyabhicāriṇī: the process of knowledge terminates in unalloyed devotional service to the Lord. So if one does not approach, or is not able to approach, the transcendental service of the Lord, then the other nineteen items are of no particular value. But if one takes to devotional service in full Kṛṣṇa consciousness, the other nineteen items automatically develop within him. As stated in Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (5.18.12) , yasyāsti bhaktir bhagavaty akiñcanā sarvair guṇais tatra samāsate surāḥ. All the good qualities of knowledge develop in one who has attained the stage of devotional service. The principle of accepting a spiritual master, as mentioned in the eighth verse, is essential. Even for one who takes to devotional service, it is most important. Transcendental life begins when one accepts a bona fide spiritual master. The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Śrī Kṛṣṇa, clearly states here that this process of knowledge is the actual path. Anything speculated beyond this is nonsense. As for the knowledge outlined here, the items may be analyzed as follows. Humility means that one should not be anxious to have the satisfaction of being honored by others. The material conception of life makes us very eager to receive honor from others, but from the point of view of a man in perfect knowledge – who knows that he is not this body – anything, honor or dishonor, pertaining to this body is useless. One should not be hankering after this material deception. People are very anxious to be famous for their religion, and consequently sometimes it is found that without understanding the principles of religion one enters into some group which is not actually following religious principles and then wants to advertise himself as a religious mentor. As for actual advancement in spiritual science, one should have a test to see how far he is progressing. He can judge by these items. Nonviolence is generally taken to mean not killing or destroying the body, but actually nonviolence means not to put others into distress. People in general are trapped by ignorance in the material concept of life, and they perpetually suffer material pains. So unless one elevates people to spiritual knowledge, one is practicing violence. One should try his best to distribute real knowledge to the people, so that they may become enlightened and leave this material entanglement. That is nonviolence. Tolerance means that one should be practiced to bear insult and dishonor from others. If one is engaged in the advancement of spiritual knowledge, there will be so many insults and much dishonor from others. This is expected because material nature is so constituted. Even a boy like Prahlāda, who, only five years old, was engaged in the cultivation of spiritual knowledge, was endangered when his father became antagonistic to his devotion. The father tried to kill him in so many ways, but Prahlāda tolerated him. So there may be many impediments to making advancement in spiritual knowledge, but we should be tolerant and continue our progress with determination. Simplicity means that without diplomacy one should be so straightforward that he can disclose the real truth even to an enemy. As for acceptance of the spiritual master, that is essential, because without the instruction of a bona fide spiritual master one cannot progress in the spiritual science. One should approach the spiritual master with all humility and offer him all services so that he will be pleased to bestow his blessings upon the disciple. Because a bona fide spiritual master is a representative of Kṛṣṇa, if he bestows any blessings upon his disciple, that will make the disciple immediately advanced without the disciple’s following the regulative principles. Or, the regulative principles will be easier for one who has served the spiritual master without reservation. Cleanliness is essential for making advancement in spiritual life. There are two kinds of cleanliness: external and internal. External cleanliness means taking a bath, but for internal cleanliness one has to think of Kṛṣṇa always and chant Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare. This process cleans the accumulated dust of past karma from the mind. Steadiness means that one should be very determined to make progress in spiritual life. Without such determination, one cannot make tangible progress. And self-control means that one should not accept anything which is detrimental to the path of spiritual progress. One should become accustomed to this and reject anything which is against the path of spiritual progress. This is real renunciation. The senses are so strong that they are always anxious to have sense gratification. One should not cater to these demands, which are not necessary. The senses should only be gratified to keep the body fit so that one can discharge his duty in advancing in spiritual life. The most important and uncontrollable sense is the tongue. If one can control the tongue, then there is every possibility of controlling the other senses. The function of the tongue is to taste and to vibrate. Therefore, by systematic regulation, the tongue should always be engaged in tasting the remnants of foodstuffs offered to Kṛṣṇa and chanting Hare Kṛṣṇa. As far as the eyes are concerned, they should not be allowed to see anything but the beautiful form of Kṛṣṇa. That will control the eyes. Similarly, the ears should be engaged in hearing about Kṛṣṇa and the nose in smelling the flowers offered to Kṛṣṇa. This is the process of devotional service, and it is understood here that Bhagavad-gītā is simply expounding the science of devotional service. Devotional service is the main and sole objective. Unintelligent commentators on the Bhagavad-gītā try to divert the mind of the reader to other subjects, but there is no other subject in Bhagavad-gītā than devotional service. False ego means accepting this body as oneself. When one understands that he is not his body and is spirit soul, he comes to his real ego. Ego is there. False ego is condemned, but not real ego. In the Vedic literature ( Bṛhad-āraṇyaka Upaniṣad 1.4.10) it is said, ahaṁ brahmāsmi: I am Brahman, I am spirit. This “I am,” the sense of self, also exists in the liberated stage of self-realization. This sense of “I am” is ego, but when the sense of “I am” is applied to this false body it is false ego. When the sense of self is applied to reality, that is real ego. There are some philosophers who say we should give up our ego, but we cannot give up our ego, because ego means identity. We ought, of course, to give up the false identification with the body. One should try to understand the distress of accepting birth, death, old age and disease. There are descriptions in various Vedic literatures of birth. In the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam the world of the unborn, the child’s stay in the womb of the mother, its suffering, etc., are all very graphically described. It should be thoroughly understood that birth is distressful. Because we forget how much distress we have suffered within the womb of the mother, we do not make any solution to the repetition of birth and death. Similarly at the time of death there are all kinds of sufferings, and they are also mentioned in the authoritative scriptures. These should be discussed. And as far as disease and old age are concerned, everyone gets practical experience. No one wants to be diseased, and no one wants to become old, but there is no avoiding these. Unless we have a pessimistic view of this material life, considering the distresses of birth, death, old age and disease, there is no impetus for our making advancement in spiritual life. As for detachment from children, wife and home, it is not meant that one should have no feeling for these. They are natural objects of affection. But when they are not favorable to spiritual progress, then one should not be attached to them. The best process for making the home pleasant is Kṛṣṇa consciousness. If one is in full Kṛṣṇa consciousness, he can make his home very happy, because this process of Kṛṣṇa consciousness is very easy. One need only chant Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare, accept the remnants of foodstuffs offered to Kṛṣṇa, have some discussion on books like Bhagavad-gītā and Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam, and engage oneself in Deity worship. These four things will make one happy. One should train the members of his family in this way. The family members can sit down morning and evening and chant together Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare. If one can mold his family life in this way to develop Kṛṣṇa consciousness, following these four principles, then there is no need to change from family life to renounced life. But if it is not congenial, not favorable for spiritual advancement, then family life should be abandoned. One must sacrifice everything to realize or serve Kṛṣṇa, just as Arjuna did. Arjuna did not want to kill his family members, but when he understood that these family members were impediments to his Kṛṣṇa realization, he accepted the instruction of Kṛṣṇa and fought and killed them. In all cases, one should be detached from the happiness and distress of family life, because in this world one can never be fully happy or fully miserable. Happiness and distress are concomitant factors of material life. One should learn to tolerate, as advised in Bhagavad-gītā. One can never restrict the coming and going of happiness and distress, so one should be detached from the materialistic way of life and be automatically equipoised in both cases. Generally, when we get something desirable we are very happy, and when we get something undesirable we are distressed. But if we are actually in the spiritual position these things will not agitate us. To reach that stage, we have to practice unbreakable devotional service. Devotional service to Kṛṣṇa without deviation means engaging oneself in the nine processes of devotional service – chanting, hearing, worshiping, offering respect, etc. – as described in the last verse of the Ninth Chapter. That process should be followed. Naturally, when one is adapted to the spiritual way of life, he will not want to mix with materialistic men. That would go against his grain. One may test himself by seeing how far he is inclined to live in a solitary place, without unwanted association. Naturally a devotee has no taste for unnecessary sporting or cinema-going or enjoying some social function, because he understands that these are simply a waste of time. There are many research scholars and philosophers who study sex life or some other subject, but according to Bhagavad-gītā such research work and philosophical speculation have no value. That is more or less nonsensical. According to Bhagavad-gītā, one should make research, by philosophical discretion, into the nature of the soul. One should make research to understand the self. That is recommended here. As far as self-realization is concerned, it is clearly stated here that bhakti-yoga is especially practical. As soon as there is a question of devotion, one must consider the relationship between the Supersoul and the individual soul. The individual soul and the Supersoul cannot be one, at least not in the bhakti conception, the devotional conception of life. This service of the individual soul to the Supreme Soul is eternal, nityam, as it is clearly stated. So bhakti, or devotional service, is eternal. One should be established in that philosophical conviction. In the Śrīmad-Bhāgavatam (1.2.11) this is explained. Vadanti tat tattva-vidas tattvaṁ yaj jñānam advayam. “Those who are actually knowers of the Absolute Truth know that the Self is realized in three different phases, as Brahman, Paramātmā and Bhagavān.” Bhagavān is the last word in the realization of the Absolute Truth; therefore one should reach up to that platform of understanding the Supreme Personality of Godhead and thus engage in the devotional service of the Lord. That is the perfection of knowledge. Beginning from practicing humility up to the point of realization of the Supreme Truth, the Absolute Personality of Godhead, this process is just like a staircase beginning from the ground floor and going up to the top floor. Now on this staircase there are so many people who have reached the first floor, the second or the third floor, etc., but unless one reaches the top floor, which is the understanding of Kṛṣṇa, he is at a lower stage of knowledge. If anyone wants to compete with God and at the same time make advancement in spiritual knowledge, he will be frustrated. It is clearly stated that without humility, understanding is not truly possible. To think oneself God is most puffed up. Although the living entity is always being kicked by the stringent laws of material nature, he still thinks, “I am God” because of ignorance. The beginning of knowledge, therefore, is amānitva, humility. One should be humble and know that he is subordinate to the Supreme Lord. Due to rebellion against the Supreme Lord, one becomes subordinate to material nature. One must know and be convinced of this truth.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

The first 15 qualities that were named, are both for devotees and jnanis. But the quality (16) 'constant and unalloyed devotion to Me' is actually the quality of a pure devotee. The next two (17 and 18), are also good both for devotees and jnanis. The last two (19 and 20), are for jnanis. The process of knowledge has nothing to do with the field of activities. Although as Srila Prabhupada says, 'less intelligent men may be misinterpret this being an interaction of the field of activities', actually it is a system to get out of the misidentification with the field of activities. This i process of real knowledge. In his Purport Srila Prabhupada says: "This process of knowledge is sometimes misunderstood by less intelligent men as being the interaction of the field of activity. But actually this is the real process of knowledge. If one accepts this process, then the possibility of approaching the Absolute Truth exists. This is not the interaction of the twenty‑four elements, as described before. This is actually the means to get out of the entanglement of those elements. The embodied soul is entrapped by the body, which is a casing made of the twenty‑four elements, and the process of knowledge as described here is the means to get out of it." If one adopts this process of knowledge described in these verses, then perfect knowledge comes. Knowledge of the different interactions in the field of activities (as the scientists look for) is not real knowledge. Real knowledge is tho know how to get out of these interactions. Humility is defined here as not being anxious to have the satisfaction of being honnored by others. One is free from this false prestige. Humility does not means timidity. Someone can be very bold and be humble. Sometime people are very timid just because they are affraid of being dishonnored. They are very shy but that doesn't mean that they are humble. Srila Prabhupada said that spiritual life means 'one should be daring and active.'

[D. KRSNA ANSWERS QUESTION 6: THE OBJECT OF KNOWLEDGE (13. 13‑19) 1. The soul can know the Supersoul, who is the object of knowledge and who exists everywhere and pervades everything. The Supersoul has transcendental senses, and He is the source of all of our senses. He is unattached and He maintains all living entities. He is inside and outside, far and near, and beyond our material power to see and know. He is the master of the modes of nature and appears divided although He is one. He is the source of light in the luminous, He is knowledge, and He is the object of knowledge. He is in everyone' heart. (13‑18) ]

(cn\DS) REVIEW: This Chapter describes the process of knowledge to help us to attain devotion. Knowledge that will help to become detached from the material body. Study this world and difference between this world, or matter, and the soul and difference between the soul and the Supersoul; and to discuss how to extract consciousness from the false identity with matter and what is the real object of one's consciousness which is the Supersoul. These subject matters will be discussed in this Chapter. In Section C, the subject discussed was jnanam or the knowledge; and knowledge means the cultivations of certain qualities that help us to separate ourselves from the body. We are interested to the process of knowledge or the process of purifying oneself. The process of knowledge entails the cultivation of certain qualities. The last point discussed in Texts 8‑12 was 'janma‑mrtyu‑jara‑ vyadhi‑dukha‑dosanudarsanam.' 'Anudarsanam' means that one should contemplate again and again that this world is a place of birth, death, desease and old age. If one forgets that he will think that this world is for his enjoyement, which only increases his miseries in this world. Misery or suffering is due to identification with this body. The more one identifies the body, the more he suffers; the more he becomes detached from the body, the happier he becomes. Because it is that attachment which covers the soul which is full of knowledge, full of happiness, and eternity. It is the attachment that covers oneself from the understanding of one's real nature. By cultivation of those qualities mentioned in verses 8‑12, one will become purified.

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.8 Amanitvam, humility-the ality of a vain person is manitvam, boasting about oneself; the absence of that is amanitvam. Adambhitvam, unpretentiousness- proclaming one's own virtues is dambhitvam; the absence of that is adambhitvam. Ahimsa, non-injury, absence of cruely towards creatures; ksantih, for-bearance, remaining undisturbed when offened by others; arjavam, sincerity, uprightness, absence of crookedness; acarya-upasanam, service of the teacher, attending on the teacher who instructs in the disciplines for Liberation, through acts of service etc.; saucam, cleanliness-washing away the dirt from the body with earth and water, and internally, removing the 'dirt' of the mind such as attachment etc. by thinking of their opposites; sthairyam, steadiness, perseverance in the path to Liberation alone; atma-vinigrahah, control of the aggregate of body and organs which is referred to by the word 'self', but which is inimical to the Self; restricting only to the right path that (aggregate) which naturally strays away in all directions. Further,
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.8 'Amanitva' means freedom from superiority complex towards eminent people. 'Adambhitva': 'Dambha' is the practice of Dharma for winning fame as a virtuous person; freedom from it is Adambhitva. 'Ahima' is absence of tendency to injure others by speech, mind and body. 'Ksanti' is the tendency of keeping the mind unmodified even when harmed by others. 'Arjava' means having a uniform disposition towards others in speech, mind and body. 'Acaryopasana' means being intent in prostrating, estioning, performing service etc., in regard to the teacher who imparts the knowledge of the self. 'Sauca' is the competence of the mind, speech and body, as enjoined by the Sastras, for the knowledge of the self and the means of this attainment. 'Sthairya' is possessing unshakable faith in the Sastras concerning the self. 'Atma-vinigraha' means the turning away from all objects that are different in nature from the self.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.8 See Comment under 13.12
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.8 Humility, unpretentiousness, non-injury, forgiveness, uprightness, service of the teacher, purity, steadfastness, self-control.
Commentary

13.8 अमानित्वम् humility? अदम्भित्वम् unpretentiousness? अहिंसा noninjury? क्षान्तिः forgiveness? आर्जवम् uprightness? आचार्योपासनम् service of the teacher? शौचम् purity? स्थैर्यम् steadiness? आत्मविनिग्रहः selfcontrol.Commentary These are the alities that constitute wisdom or lead to wisdom. These are the attributes of the man whose mind is turned towards the inner wisdom. If these characteristics are seen in a man in their entirety? you can infer that the knowledge of the Self has dawned in him.Humility It is the negation of vanity. It is absence of selfesteem or selfpraise. The basis of pride is the consciousness of possessing something (wealth? knowledge? strength? beauty and virtuous alities) in a larger measure than others. A proud man possesses at least something but a man of vanity possesses nothing and yet he thinks he is superior to others. Vanity is exaggerated pride. A humble man dislikes respect? honour and praise. He shuns fame and distinction. He never shows his knowledge? ability? prowess? etc. He never praises himself.Absence of hypocrisy Hypocrisy is the desire to appear what one is not. A Sannyasi has some virtues and a little theoretical knowledge derived from books. He pretends to be a liberated sage. This is religious hypocrisy. A man in whom this is absent is simple and modest. He never advertises his own virtuous alities in order to get respect? name and worship from others. He will never disclose any meritorious or charitable act done by him. He is free from pedantry. He will never sell his knowledge in order to achieve fame.Ahimsa Noninjuring of any living being in thought? word and deed. He who practises Ahimsa places his feet very carefully on the ground and avoids stepping on any living creature. If he perceives any living creature in front of him he stops and turns to the other side. His heart is full of compassion.Kshanti Forbearance? patience? forgiveness. This is a true symptom of knowledge. The man of wisdom puts up with everything. He is not affected a bit when others injure him. He never retaliates. He bears insult and injury calmly.Arjavam Straightforwardness. The man of wisdom is upright or straightforward. He is free from cunningness or diplomacy? doubledealing or crookedness. He is ite frank? candid or openhearted. He does not hide anything. His thoughts and words agree. He speaks his mind openly to the people. He is as simple as a child in his speech. He has a heart as pure as a crystal. He never cheats others.Service of the teacher Devotion to the preceptor? worship of the Guru doing acts of service to him who teaches BrahmaVidya or the means of attaining liberation. Acharya is the Master in whom the divine wisdom is embodied. Service of the Guru enables the aspirant to attain Selfrealisation. The aspirant adores his Guru as Brahman? God Himself. He worships him as Lord Vishnu. He superimposes on him all the attributes of Brahman or Lord Vishnu. He realises Brahman in and through his Guru. This is the fruit of devotion to the Guru. For a student of Vedanta devotion to the Guru is absolutely necessary. Even for a correct understanding of the scriptures the guidance of a Guru is necessary.Purity is of two kinds? external and internal purity. External purity is cleansing of the physical body with earth and water. Internal purity is cleansing of the mind of the dirt of attachment? hatred and other passions? by the method of Pratipaksha Bhavana? i.e.? by cultivating the opposite positive virtues? and by the recognition of the evil in all objects of the senses.Steadfastness The aspirant never leaves his efforts on the path of salvation even though he comes across many stumbling blocks on the path. This is steadfastness or firmness. No meditation on Brahman is possible with a fickle mind.Selfcontrol is control of the aggregate of the body and the senses. The senses and the body which naturally run externally towards the sensual objects are checked and directed on to the path of salvation. No meditation is possible in a body wherein the senses are out of control and distract attention.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.8 Humility, unpretentiousness, non-injury, for-bearance, sincerity, service of the teacher, cleanliness, steadiness, control of body and organs;
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.8 Humility, sincerity, harmlessness, forgiveness, rectitude, service of the Master, purity, steadfastness, self-control;
Primary values
Vairagya (Detachment / Dispassion)Adambhitva (Non-hypocrisy / Authenticity)Anahankarah (Freedom from False Ego)
Related values
Prema (Divine Love)Ahimsa (Non-violence / Compassion)Shraddha (Faith / Reverence)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)
Related verses
Stories
adambhitva_sb_collegeanahankarah_sb_college
Humility, pridelessness, nonviolence, tolerance, simplicity, approaching a bona fide spiritual master, cleanliness, steadiness, self-control — these are the path of knowledge.
Practical Applications
  • Audit yourself against this list of 20+ qualities.
  • Pick one quality to deepen this season.
  • Recognize knowledge requires character, not just information.
Reflection Questions
  • Which of these qualities is most underdeveloped in me?
  • What is my deliberate practice for it?

A gardener tending a single plot knows that healthy soil is built over years — compost layered on compost, weed pulled after weed, shade and sun balanced through every season. Kṛṣṇa lists twenty such cultivations of character and calls them jñāna itself. Knowledge is not what you read in a season; it is what your soil has become.

Haridāsa Ṭhākura's tolerance

Haridāsa Ṭhākura, the nāmācārya, was beaten in twenty-two marketplaces by the order of the Muslim magistrate, yet he chanted the holy name for his attackers and prayed that they be forgiven. His body bled; his chanting did not break.

When Mahāprabhu later embraced him, the wounds were transfigured. Of the qualities Kṛṣṇa lists here — kṣānti (tolerance), ahiṁsā (nonviolence), adambhitva (pridelessness), ananya-yoga-bhakti — Haridāsa embodied each one without claiming any. This is what jñāna looks like once it has become character.

Sanātana Gosvāmī's renunciation

Once a minister in the Bengal court, Sanātana abandoned wealth, office, and palace to follow Mahāprabhu's call. In Vraja he lived under a different tree every night, ate by mādhukarī begging, and wore a single torn cloth — the very picture of asakti (non-attachment), anabhiṣvaṅga (non-association), and vivikta-deśa-sevitva (resorting to solitary places) that this verse names.

Yet he composed the Hari-bhakti-vilāsa and the Bṛhad-bhāgavatāmṛta and trained the next generation of devotees. Renunciation in his hands was not absence but transformation.

📝 My note

Section 3 (13.13–13.19)
KRISHNA EXPLAINS THE OBJECT OF KNOWLEDGE
Section overview

(Krishna addresses the 6th question)

The soul can know the Supersoul, the ultimate object of knowledge
Only devotees can understand - the field of activities (the body), process of knowledge and both the soul and Supersoul
BREAKDOWN OF CHAPTER 13 continued…
KRISHNA EXPLAINS ‘THE OBJECT OF KNOWLEDGE’ (JNEYA) –
ARJUNA’S SIXTH QUESTION

Bhagavad-gītā 13.13

↗
జ్ఞేయం యత్తత్ప్రవక్ష్యామి యజ్జ్ఞాత్వామృతమశ్న‍ుతే । అనాదిమత్పరం బ్రహ్మ న సత్తన్నాసదుచ్యతే ॥ ౧౩ ॥
jñeyaṁ yat tat pravakṣyāmi
[jneyam yat tat pravakshyaami]
yaj jñātvāmṛtam aśnute
[yaj jnaatvaamritam ashnute]
anādi mat-paraṁ brahma
[anaadi mat-param brahma]
na sat tan nāsad ucyate
[na sat tan naasad uchyate]
jñeyam — the knowable yat — which tat — that pravakṣyāmi — I shall now explain yat — which jñātvā — knowing amṛtam — nectar aśnute — one tastes anādi — beginningless mat - param — subordinate to Me brahma — spirit na — neither sat — cause tat — that na — nor asat — effect ucyate — is said to be .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
jñeyaṁ yat tat pravakṣyāmi
jñeyam
the knowable
yat
which
tat
that
pravakṣyāmi
I shall now explain
yaj jñātvāmṛtam aśnute
yat
which
jñātvā
knowing
amṛtam
nectar
aśnute
one tastes
anādi mat-paraṁ brahma
anādi
beginningless
mat - param
subordinate to Me
brahma
spirit
na sat tan nāsad ucyate
na
neither
sat
cause
tat
that
na
nor
asat
effect
ucyate
is said to be .
  • jñeyam — the knowable
    Gerundive — what is *to be* known. Kṛṣṇa is about to redirect Arjuna's attention from the field (already described) to the proper object of knowledge: Brahman, ultimately Himself.
  • amṛtam — nectar (immortality)
    A-mṛta — "non-dying." The fruit of this knowledge is not heaven, not power; it is the cessation of death. The Upaniṣadic word lands here with all its weight.
  • anādi — beginningless
    A- + ādi — "without first." Brahman is not a thing that arose; it is the condition for things to arise. This single word ruins every creation-from-nothing theology.
  • mat - param — subordinate to Me
    The decisive Gauḍīya hinge. Brahman is *mat-param* — under Kṛṣṇa. Impersonal Brahman is the radiance; Kṛṣṇa is the source of the radiance. Read this word carefully and the whole chapter's theism is settled.
  • brahma — spirit
    From √bṛh — "to expand, to grow great." Brahman is the all-pervading expansion of the Lord's existence. Here it names the impersonal aspect; Kṛṣṇa will gradually fold it back into personal Bhagavān.
  • sat — cause
    Kṛṣṇa says Brahman is "neither sat nor asat" in the ordinary causal sense. The categories by which we sort empirical things (existent/non-existent, cause/effect) do not apply to that which underlies the categories themselves.
I shall now explain the knowable, knowing which you will taste the eternal. Brahman, the spirit, beginningless and subordinate to Me, lies beyond the cause and effect of this material world.

The Lord has explained the field of activities and the knower of the field. He has also explained the process of knowing the knower of the field of activities. Now He begins to explain the knowable, first the soul and then the Supersoul. By knowledge of the knower, both the soul and the Supersoul, one can relish the nectar of life. As explained in the Second Chapter, the living entity is eternal. This is also confirmed here. There is no specific date at which the jīva was born. Nor can anyone trace out the history of the jīvātmā’s manifestation from the Supreme Lord. Therefore it is beginningless. The Vedic literature confirms this: na jāyate mriyate vā vipaścit ( Kaṭha Upaniṣad 1.2.18). The knower of the body is never born and never dies, and he is full of knowledge. The Supreme Lord as the Supersoul is also stated in the Vedic literature ( Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.16) to be pradhāna-kṣetrajña-patir guṇeśaḥ, the chief knower of the body and the master of the three modes of material nature. In the smṛti it is said, dāsa-bhūto harer eva nānyasvaiva kadācana. The living entities are eternally in the service of the Supreme Lord. This is also confirmed by Lord Caitanya in His teachings. Therefore the description of Brahman mentioned in this verse is in relation to the individual soul, and when the word Brahman is applied to the living entity, it is to be understood that he is vijñāna-brahma as opposed to ānanda-brahma. Ānanda-brahma is the Supreme Brahman Personality of Godhead.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
13. I will now speak about the object of knowledge, knowing which you will attain liberation. This supreme Brahman, Paramātmā, is without beginning, taking shelter of Me, and beyond material cause and effect.
Commentary

Thus, by means of the methods mentioned above, one should know the jīva and Paramātmā. The Paramātmā however is present in all beings and is known as Brahman. That Brahman is worshiped by the devotees as personal, with qualities, and by the jṣānīs as impersonal, with no qualities. As the object of meditation with four hands situated within the body, Brahman is known as Paramātmā. This verse speaks of that Brahman first. That form has no beginning (anādi). That means that since it is His svarūpa, it is eternal. Mat-param means “of which I alone am the supreme shelter (para).” What is it? It is called brahman (Paramātmā), of which I alone am the supreme shelter, and which is beyond cause and effect (na sad na asad). The Lord will later say brahmaṇo hi pratiṣṭhāham: I am the basis of Brahman.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
13. I will now speak about the object of knowledge, knowing which you will attain liberation. This ātmā is without beginning, dependent on Me, and beyond material cause and effect.
Commentary

Having taught the process for attaining knowledge, the Lord now teaches what is to be known by those means. I will speak about jīvātmā, who is to be known or realized by the means just described, so that it is very easy to understand (pravakṣyāmi), knowing which one attains liberation (amṛtam). The Lord then teaches about the jīvātmā in the next line of the verse. It is without beginning (anādi). The jīva has no initial appearance, and as well no end. This means it is eternal, for the śruti says na jāyate mriyate vā vipaśit: this knower has no birth or death. (Kaṭha Upaniṣad 1.2.18) I am its master (mat param- it is dependent on Me), for as the śruti says pradhāna-kṣetrajṣa-patir guṇeśaḥ: I, endowed with all good qualities, am the master of the knower of the field (jīva) and matter. (Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.16) The smṛti also says dāsabhūto harer eva nānyasyaiva kadācana: the jīva is the servant of the Lord and never of anyone else. (Padmā Purāṇa). Jīva is called brahman because it is endowed with the eight great (bṛhat) [Note: Brahman is derived from the root bṛh which means to increase or become great.] qualities. The śruti says: ya ātmāpahata-pāpmā vijaro vimṛtyur viśoko vijighitso’ pipāsaḥ satya-kāmaḥ satya-saṅkalpaḥ so’nveṣṭavyaḥ sa vijijṣāsitavyaḥ One should know that ātmā is without sin, without ageing, without lamentation, without hunger, without thirst, whose every desire is truth and whose every desire is fulfilled. Chāndogya Upaniṣad 8.1.5 The jīva is known as brahman in the śrutis: vijṣānaṁ brahma ced veda: if one knows the ātma as Brahman [Note: This is from the section on the vijṣāna maya puruṣa, the jīva: vijṣana brahma ced veda, tasmāc cen na pramādyati śarīre pāpṁano hitvā sarvān kāmān samaśnute]. (Taittiṛiya Upaniṣad 2.5.1) The Lord will also refer to the jīva as brahman later in the Gītā with sa guṇān samatītyaitān brahma-bhūyāya kalpate (BG 14.26) and brahma-bhūtaḥ prasannātmā na śocati na kāṅkṣati (BG18.55). The pure jīvātmā cannot be said to be either effect or cause (sad asat), because it has given up the states of name and form (effect) and absence of name and form (cause—prakṛti in undifferentiated state). However the jīva is endowed with spiritual form and quality, being a very small particle of consciousness endowed with the eight qualities. Effect or sat means possessing individual name and form in the material world. Cause or asat means devoid of name and form, the state after destruction or before creation.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

Now Krsna is going to answer to question 6: what is jneyam or the object of knowledge? We already know what is the object of knowledge ‑ ksetrajna (the two types) In his Purport Srila Prabhupada says: "The Lord has explained the field of activities and the knower of the field. He has also explained the process of knowing the knower of the field of activities. Now He begins to explain the knowable, first the soul and then the Supersoul." This description in this verse is considered by Srila Prabhupada and Baladeva Vidyabhusana, as the description of the object of knowledge as the soul. This is the prime object of knowledge. Srila Prabhupada says in his Purport: "Therefore the description of Brahman mentioned in this verse is in relation to the individual soul, and when the word Brahman is applied to the living entity, it is to be understood that he is vijnana‑brahma as opposed to ananda‑brahma. Ananda‑brahma is the Supreme Brahman Personality of Godhead." The rest of this Section is dedicated to the ultimate object of knowledge which is the Supersoul. From verse 14 to 18 will be a description of the Supersoul. (DS) We have studied ksetra, the body, ksetrajna, the soul and Supersoul, but that is also the object of knowledge. When the soul extracts his consciousness from attachment to the material body what he is supposed to realize is that he is not the body but a spiritual soul who is a servant of God. This are the two objects of knowledge. The words used here are 'mat‑param brahma', 'spirit subordinated to Me (Krsna)'. Therefore it indicates the individual soul (vijnana‑brahma)

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

The term “knowable” (jñeyam) used here signifies “the object of knowledge” about which Arjuna

inquired in text 1. Śrīla Prabhupāda clearly mentions here that there are two knowable objects:

“The Lord has explained the field of activities and the knower of the field. He has also explained

the process of knowing the knower of the field of activities. Now He begins to explain the know-

able, first the soul and then the Supersoul. By knowledge of the knower, both the soul and the Su-

persoul, one can relish the nectar of life.”

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.13 Pravaksyami, I shall speak of, fully describe just as it is; tat, that; yat, which; is jenyam, to be known. In order to interest the hearer through inducement, the Lord speaks of what its result is: Jnatva, by realizing; yat, which Knowable; asnute, one attains; amrtam, Immortality, i.e.; he does not die again. Anadimat, without beginning-one having a beginning (adi) is adimat; one not having a beginning is anadimat. What is that? The param, supreme, unsurpassable; brahma, Brahman, which is under discussion as the Knowable. Here, some split up the phrase anadimatparam as anadi and matparam because, if the word anadimat is taken as a Bahuvrihi compound, ['That which has no (a), beginning (adi) is anadi.' Matup is used to denote possession. Since the idea of possession is a already implied in anadi, therefore matup, if added after it, becomes redundant.] then the suffix mat (matup) becomes redundant, which is undesirable. And they show a distintive meaning: (Brahman is anadi, beginningless, and is) matparam, that of which I am the supreme (para) power called Vasudeva. Trully, the redundance could be avoided in this way if that meanig were possible. But that meaning is not possible, because what is intended is to make Brahman known only through a negation of all attributes by saying, 'It is called neither being nor non-being.' It is contradictory to show a possession of a distinctive power and to negate attributes. Therefore, although matup and a bahuvrihi compound convey the same meaning of 'possession', its (matup's) use is for completing the verse. [The Commentator accepts anadimat as a nan-tatpurusa compund. If, however, the Bahuvrihi is insisted on, then the mat after anadi should be taken as completing the number of syllables needed for versification. So, nat need not be compounded with param.] Having aroused an interest through inducement by saying, 'The Knowable which has Immortality as its result is beeing spoken of by Me,' the Lord says: Tat, that Knowable; ucyate, is called; na sat, neither being; nor is it called asat, non-being. Objection: After strongly girding up the loins and declaring with a loud voice, 'I shall speak of the Knowable,' is it not incongruous to say, 'That is called neither being nor non-being'? Reply: No. What has been said is surely consistent. Objection: How? Reply: For in all the Upanisads, the Knowable, i.e. Brahman, has been indicated only by negation of all attributes-'Not this, not this' (Br. 4.4.22), 'Not gross, not subtle' (op. cit. 3.3.8), etc.; but not as 'That is this', for It is beyond speech. Objection: Is it not that a thing which cannot be expressed by the word 'being' does not exist? Like-wise, if the Knowable cannot be expressed by the word 'being', It does not exist. And it is contradictory to say, 'It is the Knowable', and 'It cannot be expressed by the word "being".' Counter-objection: As to that, no that It does not exist, because It is not the object of the idea, 'It is non-being.' Objection: Do not all cognitions verily involve the idea of being or non-being? This being so, the Knowable should either be an object of a cognition involving the idea of existence, or it should be an object of a cognition involving the idea of non-existence. Reply: No, because, by virtue of Its being super-sensuous, It is not an object of cognition involving either, of the two ideas. Indeed, any object perceivable by the senses, such as pot etc., can be either an object of cognition involving the idea of existence, or it can be an object of cognition involving the idea of non-existence. But this Knowable, being supersensuous and known from the scriptures, which are the sole means of (Its) knowledge, is not, like pot etc., an object of cognition involving either of the two ideas. Therefore It is called neither being nor non-being. As for your objection that it is contradictory to say, 'It is the Knowable, but it is neither called being nor non-being,'-it is not contradictory; for the Upanisad says, 'That (Brahman) is surely different from the known and, again, It is above the unknown' (Ke. 1.4). Objection: May it not be that even the Upanisad is contradictory in its meaning? May it not be (contradictory) as it is when, after beginning with the topic of a shed for a sacrifice, [Cf. 'Pracinavamsam karoti, he constructs (i.e. shall construct) (the sacrificial shed) with its supporting beam turned east-ward' (Tai, Sam.; also see Sanskrit-English Dictionary, Monier Williams).-Tr.] it is said, 'Who indeed knows whether there exists anything in the other world or not!' (Tai. Sam. 6.1.1)? Reply: No, since the Upanisad speaking of something that is different from the known and the unknown is meant for establishing an entity that must be realized. [The Upanisadic text is not to be rejected on the ground that it is paradoxical, for it is meant to present Brahman as indentical with one's own inmost Self.] But, '৷৷.whether there exists anything in the other world,' etc. is merely an arthavada [See note on p. 40. Here, the passage, '৷৷.whether there exists৷৷.,' etc. is to be interpreted as an arthavada emphasizing, the need of raising a shed, irrespective of any other consideration.-Tr.] connected with an injunction. From reason who it follows that Brahman cannot be expressed by such words as being, non-being, etc. For, every word used for expressing an object, when heard by listeners, makes them understand its meaning through the comprehension of its significance with the help of genus, action, ality and relation; not in any other way, because that is not a matter of experience. To illustrate this: a cow, or a horse, etc. (is comprehended) through genus; cooking or reading, through action; white or black, through ality; a rich person or an owner of cows, through relation. But Brahman does not belong to any genus. Hence it is not expressible by words like 'being' etc.; neither is It possessed of any alitity with the help of which It could be expressed through alifying words, for It is free from alities; nor can It be expressed by a word implying action, It being free from actions-which accords with the Upanisadic text, 'Partless, actionless, calm' (Sv. 6.19). Nor has It any relation, since It is one, non-dual, not an object of the senses, and It is the Self. Therefore it is logical that It cannot be expressed by any word. And this follows from such Upanisadic texts as, 'From which, words trun back' (Tai. 2.4.1), etc. Therefore it is logical that It cannot be expressed by any word. And this follows from such Upanisadic texts as, 'From which, words turn back' (Tai. 2.4.1), etc. Since the Knowable (Brahman) is not an object of the word or thought of 'being', there arises the apprehension of Its nonexistence. Hence, for dispelling that apprehension by establishing Its existence with the help of the adjuncts in the form of the organs of all creatures, the Lord says:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.13 I shall declare that nature of the individual self (brahman) which is the object to be known, namely, what is to be gained by means of virtues like modesty etc., by knowing which one attains to the self which is immortal, birthless, free from old age, death and such other material alities. [The expression is split up as - Anadi = beginningless; Mat-param = having Me as the Highest.] Anadi means that which is beginningless. Indeed, there is no origination for this individual self (brahman) and for the same reason, It is endless. The Sruti also declares: 'The wise one is not born, nor dies' (Ka. U., 2.18). 'Matpara' means having Me for the Highest. Verily, it has been told: 'Know that which is other than this (lower nature), which is the life-principle, to be the highest Prakrti of Mine' (7.5). By virtue of being the body of the Lord, the nature of the self finds joy in being completely subsidiary to Him. So the Sruti declares: 'He who, dwelling in the self, is within the self, whom the self does not know, whose body the self is and who controls the self from within ৷৷.' (Br. U. Madh., 5.7.22). Similarly do the texts declare: 'He is the cause, Lord of Lords and of sense organs. He has no progenitor, nor lord' (Sve. U., 6.9); and 'He is the Lord of the Pradhana and of the individual selves, and the Lord of alities (Ibid., 6.16). That which is conjoined with the ality of infinite dimension or extensiveness can be designated as brahman. It is different from, and not circumscribable by, the body etc. The meaning is, It is the principle which apprehends the Ksetra. Sruti also declares: 'He (i.e., the individual self) partakes of infinity' (Sve. U., 5.9). By its Karma It is circumscribed. It assumes Its infinite nature only when It is freed from the bonds of Karma. The term brahman is applied to designate the individual self as in: 'He, crossing beyond the Gunas', becomes fit for the sake of brahman' (14.26), 'I am the ground of the brahman, who is immutable and immortal' (14.27), and 'Having attained to the state of brahman, tranil, he neither grieves nor craves; regarding all beings alike, he attains supreme devotion to Me' (18.54). It (brahman) is said to be neither being nor non-being. The terms 'being' and 'non-being' cannot signify the nature of the self because It is neither effect nor cause. For It is called 'being' (Sat) in the condition of effect when It has the form of gods etc. As It cannot possess names and forms in the condition of cause, It is said to be 'non-being' or Asat. So the Sruti texts declare: 'In the beginning, verily, this (brahman) was non-existence; therefrom the being was born' (Tai. U., 2.7.1) and 'Verily, this (brahman) was then undifferntiated. It became differentiated by names and forms' (Br. U., 1.4.7). The self's conditions as effect and cause have arisen on account of veiling by Avidya or ignorant in the form of Karma. It is not an expression of Its real nature. So, the terms 'being' and 'non-being' do not signify the nature of the self, If it is argued that, in the passage 'In the beginning, verily, this (Brahman) was non-existence' (Tai. U., 2.7.1), it is the Supreme Brahman in the state of cause that is described - even then it can be pointed out that the Supreme Brahman in causal condition has, for His body, the conscient and non-conscient entities in a subtle state, incapable of being differentiated by names and forms. Such a description is therefore valid. On the same principle the nature of Ksetra (body) and Ksetrajna (individual self) in the state of cause can also be indicated by the term 'non-being'. But this condition of the individual self has arisen due to Karma and such descriptions as 'being' and 'non-being' are applicable to the self only in the state of bondage. Its pure form cannot be signified by the terms 'being' and 'non-being'.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.13 See Comment under 13.18
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.13 I will declare that which has to be known, knowing which one attains to immortality, the beginningless supreme Brahman, called neither being nor non-being.
Commentary

13.13 ज्ञेयम् has to be known? यत् which? तत् that? प्रवक्ष्यामि (I) will declare? यत् which? ज्ञात्वा knowing? अमृतम् immortality? अश्नुते (one) attains to? अनादिमत् the beginningless? परम् supreme? ब्रह्म Brahman? न not? सत् being? तत् that? न not? असत् nonbeing? उच्यते is called.Commentary The Lord praises that which ought to be known (Para Brahman) in order to create in Arjuna (or any hearer) an intense desire to know It.Brahman cannot be expressed in words like being or nonbeing? because Brahman does not belong to any class or genus like a Brahmana? cow or horse. It has no ality like whiteness? blackness? etc. It has no relation or connection with anything else? because It is one without a second. It is no object of any sense. It is beyond the reach of the mind and the senses. It is actionless. It is the great transcendental and unmanifested Absolute. It is always the witnessing subject in all objects.The Vedas emphatically declare that Brahman is without attributes? activity? attachment or parts.In chapter IX. 19 it was stated that He is the being and also the nonbeing. It is now stated that He is neither being nor nonbeing. This would seem to the readers to be a contradiction in terms but it is not so. Though the manifest (perishable) and the unmanifest (imperishable) universe are both forms of Brahman? He is beyond both these. (Cf.VII.2XV.16?17and18)

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.13 I shall speak of that which is to be known, by realizing which one attains Immortality. The supreme Brahman is without any beginning. That is called neither being nor non-being.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.13 I will speak to thee now of that great Truth which man ought to know, since by its means he will win immortal bliss - that which is without beginning, the Eternal Spirit which dwells in Me, neither with form, nor yet without it.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Ahimsa (Non-violence / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
Concepts
Maya
I shall now explain that which is to be known — the eternal Brahman without beginning, beyond cause and effect.
Practical Applications
  • Cultivate awareness of Brahman as the appropriate object of inquiry.
  • Don't reduce God to manageable concepts.
  • Approach the imperishable with humility.
Reflection Questions
  • Where do I shrink-fit Brahman to fit my categories?
  • What does humble approach require?

A river without a source — try to imagine one, and the image breaks. Yet Kṛṣṇa now names Brahman as exactly that: without beginning, beyond the categories of cause and effect by which the mind navigates everything else. The verse is a doorway the mind cannot enter on its old feet; it must take off its shoes.

Naciketas at Yama's door

The boy Naciketas, sent to Yama by his father's careless word, refused every lesser boon — wealth, kingdom, long life, celestial pleasures — and asked only for the knowledge of what survives death. Yama tested him by offering more and more; the boy stood firm.

Finally Yama taught him: "The wise one, knowing the ātman as great and pervading, beyond cause and effect, does not grieve." The Kaṭha Upaniṣad preserves the dialogue. Kṛṣṇa here picks up the same thread — the knowable is the eternal, and tasting it is amṛta, immortality.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.14

↗
సర్వత: పాణిపాదం తత్సర్వతోఽక్షిశిరోముఖమ్ । సర్వత:శ్రుతిమల్ల‍ోకే సర్వమావృత్య తిష్ఠతి ॥ ౧౪ ॥
sarvataḥ pāṇi-pādaṁ tat
[sarvatah paani-paadam tat]
sarvato ’kṣi-śiro-mukham
[sarvato ’kshi-shiro-mukham]
sarvataḥ śrutimal loke
[sarvatah shrutimal loke]
sarvam āvṛtya tiṣṭhati
[sarvam aavritya tishthati]
sarvataḥ — everywhere pāṇi — hands pādam — legs tat — that sarvataḥ — everywhere akṣi — eyes śiraḥ — heads mukham — faces sarvataḥ — everywhere śruti - mat — having ears loke — in the world sarvam — everything āvṛtya — covering tiṣṭhati — exists .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
sarvataḥ pāṇi-pādaṁ tat
sarvataḥ
everywhere
pāṇi
hands
pādam
legs
tat
that
sarvato ’kṣi-śiro-mukham
sarvataḥ
everywhere
akṣi
eyes
śiraḥ
heads
mukham
faces
sarvataḥ śrutimal loke
sarvataḥ
everywhere
śruti - mat
having ears
loke
in the world
sarvam āvṛtya tiṣṭhati
sarvam
everything
āvṛtya
covering
tiṣṭhati
exists .
  • sarvataḥ — everywhere
    Repeated three times in the verse for emphasis. Sanskrit poetry uses repetition surgically — Kṛṣṇa is closing every spatial loophole the mind would use to limit the Lord's presence.
  • pāṇi — hands
    Concrete, bodily image. Kṛṣṇa does not say "the Lord pervades" abstractly; He gives Him hands, feet, eyes, heads, faces. The personal Lord pervades, not a pervading nothing.
  • śruti - mat — having ears
    He hears. Every whisper, every cry, every silent prayer reaches Him. The word makes prayer cosmologically possible — there is no place outside the divine hearing.
  • āvṛtya — covering
    Gerund from ā- + √vṛ — "surrounding, enveloping." The Supersoul does not merely fill space; He envelops it from outside as well. There is no exit.
  • tiṣṭhati — exists
    Verb of standing, abiding — not mere being. The Lord stands present; He does not flicker or fade. The omnipresence is steady, available.
Everywhere are His hands and legs, His eyes, heads and faces, and He has ears everywhere. In this way the Supersoul exists, pervading everything.

As the sun exists diffusing its unlimited rays, so does the Supersoul, or Supreme Personality of Godhead. He exists in His all-pervading form, and in Him exist all the individual living entities, beginning from the first great teacher, Brahmā, down to the small ants. There are unlimited heads, legs, hands and eyes, and unlimited living entities. All are existing in and on the Supersoul. Therefore the Supersoul is all-pervading. The individual soul, however, cannot say that he has his hands, legs and eyes everywhere. That is not possible. If he thinks that under ignorance he is not conscious that his hands and legs are diffused all over but when he attains to proper knowledge he will come to that stage, his thinking is contradictory. This means that the individual soul, having become conditioned by material nature, is not supreme. The Supreme is different from the individual soul. The Supreme Lord can extend His hand without limit; the individual soul cannot. In Bhagavad-gītā the Lord says that if anyone offers Him a flower, or a fruit, or a little water, He accepts it. If the Lord is a far distance away, how can He accept things? This is the omnipotence of the Lord: even though He is situated in His own abode, far, far away from earth, He can extend His hand to accept what anyone offers. That is His potency. In the Brahma-saṁhitā (5.37) it is stated, goloka eva nivasaty akhilātma-bhūtaḥ: although He is always engaged in pastimes in His transcendental planet, He is all-pervading. The individual soul cannot claim that he is all-pervading. Therefore this verse describes the Supreme Soul, the Personality of Godhead, not the individual soul.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
14. Everywhere this Brahman has His hands and feet. Everywhere Brahman has His eyes, heads and mouths. Everywhere are His ears. Brahman covers everything in the universe.
Commentary

The doubt may arise that if this Brahman is without cause and effect, then that contradicts the statements of śruti such as sarvaṁ khalv idaṁ brahma (Chāndogya Upaniṣad 3.14) and brahmaivedaṁ sarvam (Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 2.2.12): everything is Brahman. Though Brahman in its essential nature is beyond cause and effect, this Brahman (Paramātmā) is also cause and effect because of non- difference between the energy and the source of energy. [Note: The Lord is the creator of material bodies since prakṛti produces the bodies, but prakṛti, being the energy of the Lord, is non-different from Him. Thus as prakṛti, He is a cause of the material bodies.] That is stated in this verse. This Brahman has His hands and feet everywhere. By the manifestation everywhere of hands and feet of all creatures from Lord Brahmā down to the ant (His effects), one can say that Brahman is endowed with countless hands and feet. Similarly, His eyes, head, and face are everywhere.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
14. Everywhere this paramātmā has its hands and feet. Everywhere paramātmā has its eyes, heads and mouths. Everywhere are its ears. Paramātmā covers everything in the universe.
Commentary

The Lord then teaches about the paramātmā. The word tat refers to the paramātmā. His hands and feet are everywhere. The meaning is clear.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

This verse refers to the Supersoul, not the individual soul. (DS) A person could argue that this verse refers to the Supersoul, but also could refer to the individual soul but he hasn't realized it yet. Why not? He would say: 'Because right now I am in ignorance'. Srila Prabhupada answers to this by saying: "Supreme means that He is always the Supreme. And Supreme cannot be covered by ignorance otherwise ignorance would be greater than the Supreme . And this is contradictory.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study Key verse
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Supersoul is ‘’All Pervading’’

Focus of Learning

refers to the All-pervading, describes the Supersoul, not the living entity

(a) Supersoul has hands, legs, eyes, ears, heads and faces everywhere

Supersoul is All-pervading – Analogy: Sun is all pervading by diffusing unlimited rays
In Him exist all unlimited individual living entities (Brahma to small ant)

(a) Living entity as the “knowable”

Chapter 2 describes the living entity as eternal
No history of date of jiva’s manifestation available (therefore called ‘anadi’)
Supporting Ref. Katha Upanisad: “na jayate mriyate…” – knower of body has no birth and death, but is full of knowledge

(b) Supreme Lord as ‘Supersoul’: Srila Prabhupada gives references for the presence of the Supersoul

as the supreme knower and thus different from the individual soul

Ref. Svetasvatara Upanisad: Supersoul is the chief knower of body and master of three modes
Ref. Smrti: Living entities are eternally servant of the Lord
Ref. Lord Caitanya: “Only Krishna is the Supreme Lord, all others are His servants’’

(c) This verse refers to the living entity, i.e Vijnana Brahman and not Ananda Brahman

Ananda Brahman is the Supreme Personality of Godhead
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.14 Tat, That-the Knowable; sarvatah-pani-padam, which has hands and feet everywhere-. The existence of the Knower of the field is revealed through th adjuncts in the form of the organs of all creatures. And the Knower of the field is spoken of as such because of the limiting adjuncts of the field. The field, too, is diversely differentiated as hands, feet, etc. All diversity in the Knower of the field, caused by the differences in the adjunct-the field-, is certainly unreal. Hence, by denying it, the nature of the Knowable has been stated, in, 'That is called neither being nor non-being.' Although the unreal form is caused by the limiting adjuncts, still, for the comprehension of Its existence it is said, '(It) has hands and feet everywhere, etc., by assuming this as a ality of the Knowable. Thus, as is well known, there is saying of the people versed in tradition, 'The Transcendental is described with the help of superimposition and its refutation'. Everywhere the hands, feet, etc., which are perceived as limbs of all bodies, perform, their duties due to the presence of the power of the Knowable (Brahman). Thus the grounds for the inference of the existence of the Knowable are metaphorically spoken of as belonging to the Knowable. The others have to be explained similarly. That Knowable has hands and feet everwhere. That which has eyes, heads, and mouths everywhere is sarvatoksi-siro-mukham. That which has ears every-where is sarvatah-srutimat: sruti means the organs of hearing; that which has it is sruti-mat. Tisthati, It exists, remains established; loke, in the multititude of creatures; avrtya, by pervading; sarvam, them all. With this purpose is view, that as a result of the superimposition of the organs like hands, feet, etc., which are adjuncts, there may not be the misconception that the Knowable is possessed of them (adjuncts), the (next) verse is begun:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.14 Everywhere are Its hands and feet i.e., the self in Its pure form is able to perform everywhere the works of hands and feet. Its eyes, heads and mouths are everywhere; It performs everywhere the task of eyes etc. The Sruti declares; 'Without feet or hands, He moves swiftly and seizes things; He sees without eyes, He hears without ears? (Sve. U., 3.19). It may be said that it means that the Supreme Brahman performs everywhere the task of hands, feet etc., even though He is devoid of hands and feet. If 'Brahman' is taken to mean the self, it can be asked how this power of the Supreme Brahman (namely, having hand, feet, eyes, etc., everywhere) can be attributed to the self, then the answer is that it is established in the Srutis that the pure individual self has the capacity of performing the task of hands, feet etc., because It is eal to Him. Sruti also declares: 'Then, the wise seer, shaking off good and evil, stainless, attains the supreme eality with Him' (Mun. U., 3.1.3). Sri Krsna will also teach later on: 'Resorting to this knowledge, It partakes of My nature' (14.2). It exists encompassing all things, whatever aggregate of things that exist in the world; It encompasses them. The sense is that in Its pure state, It is all-pervasive, as It has no limitation of space etc.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.14 See Comment under 13.18
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.14 With hands and feet everywhere, with eyes, heads and mouths everywhere, with ears everywhere, He exists in the worlds enveloping all.
Commentary

13.14 सर्वतः everywhere? पाणिपादम् with hands and feet? तत् that? सर्वतः everywhere? अक्षिशिरोमुखम् with eyes? heads and mouths? सर्वतः everywhere? श्रुतिमत् with ears? लोके in the world? सर्वम् all? आवृत्य having enveloped? तिष्ठति exists.Commentary He (the knower of the field or Para Brahman) pervades everything in this world. He fills and surrounds this world with Himself. He abides in the universe enveloping everything.In the previous verse it is said that the Brahman Which is to be known is neither being nor nonbeing. One may think that It is nonentity or void or nothing. In order to remove this misapprehension? the Lord says in this verse that the knowable has hands and feet everywhere? etc. It directs the mind and the senses to do their proper functions. This is only the manifest aspect of Saguna Brahman (Brahman with attributes).Just as the enginedriver drives the engine? so also the knowable or the knower of the field drieves the bodyengine. It is the Inner Ruler. It is the innermost Self. It is the support? substratum or basis for this world? body? mind? lifeforce and the senses. The existence of Brahman is determined or ascertained or indicated by the existence of the limiting adjuncts? viz.? body? mind and senses? because there must be selfconsciousness behind their activities. How can you call It nonexistence thenJust as the rope is not affected by the alities or the defects of the illusory superimposed snake? so also Para Brahman (the knower of the field) is not affected by the superimposed world? body? senses? mind and the lifeforce. There is only one common consciousness is eternal? selfluminous and allpervading. That common consciousness is Para Brahman.The body? mind? senses and the lifeforce are by nature insentient. But they are moved by Brahman to action. They act on account of the mere presence of Brahman or the knower of the field. (The limiting adjuncts are illusory.) Hence they put on the semblance of consciousness? just as the iron piece puts on the semblance of a magnet when it is in the presence of a magnet.The whole world is superimposed on Brahman like the snake on the rope. This is called Adhyaropa. It is sublated by the method (Yukti) of Apavada (negation or denial).This verse is taken from the Svetasvataropanishad 3.16.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.14 That (Knowable), which has hands and feet everwhere, which has eyes, heads and mouths everywhere, which has ears everywhere, exists in creatures by pervading them all.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.14 Everywhere are Its hands and Its feet; everywhere It has eyes that see, heads that think and mouths that speak; everywhere It listens; It dwells in all the worlds; It envelops them all.
Related values
Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Maitri (Friendship / Goodwill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 11.16 BG 10.20 BG 9.4 SB 2.1.24 SB 10.40.1 SB 11.16.1 CC Madhya 21.10 CC Ādi 5.27 CC Madhya 20.282 Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 3.16Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 2.1.4
Hands and legs everywhere, eyes, faces, mouths everywhere — He hears all, He pervades all.
Practical Applications
  • Recognize the omnipresence of the Lord — no place He is not.
  • Live as one who is always seen, always heard.
  • Use this verse during private moments.
Reflection Questions
  • Where do I act as if no one is watching?
  • How does omnipresence change those moments?

Step into a hall of mirrors and you see your own form repeated in every direction — hands here, hands there, eyes from every angle. The Lord's omnipresence is not metaphor but reality: every pair of hands in the universe is finally His hands, every ear His ear. The verse asks you to stop looking for Him in one direction and notice Him in all.

Prahlāda sees Nṛsiṁha in the pillar

When Hiraṇyakaśipu mocked his son — "Is your Lord in this pillar?" — Prahlāda said yes without hesitation. The boy had read this verse with his whole life: the Lord's hands and feet are everywhere, even inside a slab of stone in a demonic palace.

The pillar burst, Nṛsiṁha emerged, and the doctrine became flesh. The story is preserved in the Seventh Canto of the Bhāgavatam. Omnipresence is not a slogan; it is a fact that a child's faith can demonstrate.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.15

↗
సర్వేన్ద్రియగుణాభాసం సర్వేన్ద్రియవివర్జితమ్ । అసక్తం సర్వభృచ్చ‍ైవ నిర్గుణం గుణభోక్తృ చ ॥ ౧౫ ॥
sarvendriya-guṇābhāsaṁ
[sarvendriya-gunaabhaasam]
sarvendriya-vivarjitam
[sarvendriya-vivarjitam]
asaktaṁ sarva-bhṛc caiva
[asaktam sarva-bhrich chaiva]
nirguṇaṁ guṇa-bhoktṛ ca
[nirgunam guna-bhoktri cha]
sarva — of all indriya — senses guṇa — of the qualities ābhāsam — the original source sarva — all indriya — senses vivarjitam — being without asaktam — without attachment sarva - bhṛt — the maintainer of everyone ca — also eva — certainly nirguṇam — without material qualities guṇa - bhoktṛ — master of the guṇas ca — also .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
sarvendriya-guṇābhāsaṁ
sarva
of all
indriya
senses
guṇa
of the qualities
ābhāsam
the original source
sarvendriya-vivarjitam
sarva
all
indriya
senses
vivarjitam
being without
asaktaṁ sarva-bhṛc caiva
asaktam
without attachment
sarva - bhṛt
the maintainer of everyone
ca
also
eva
certainly
nirguṇaṁ guṇa-bhoktṛ ca
nirguṇam
without material qualities
guṇa - bhoktṛ
master of the guṇas
ca
also .
  • indriya — senses
    Repeated three times in the verse. The Lord is named as the *original source* (ābhāsa) of the senses, then said to be *without* senses, then to *enjoy* the qualities. Each repetition pivots the meaning — paradox piled on paradox.
  • ābhāsam — the original source
    Ā- + √bhās — "shining forth." The senses are reflections, radiances, of the Lord's own faculty. They illuminate not by their own light but by His.
  • asaktam — without attachment
    A- + √sañj — "not stuck." The Lord sustains every being yet is sticky to none. This is the divine model the karma-yogi imitates — sustaining work without sticking to its fruit.
  • sarva - bhṛt — the maintainer of everyone
    Compound: "all-bearer." The Lord carries the cosmos as a mother carries a child — and yet remains unburdened. Maintenance without entanglement is His signature.
  • nirguṇam — without material qualities
    Nir- + guṇa. The Lord is beyond the three modes (sattva, rajas, tamas). The Advaita reading stops here; Kṛṣṇa goes one word further.
  • guṇa - bhoktṛ — master of the guṇas
    And yet the *enjoyer* of the same modes. The paradox is the doctrine: transcendent to the guṇas, He nonetheless tastes them. The personal Lord is not exhausted by the impersonal abstraction.
The Supersoul is the original source of all senses, yet He is without senses. He is unattached, although He is the maintainer of all living beings. He transcends the modes of nature, and at the same time He is the master of all the modes of material nature.

The Supreme Lord, although the source of all the senses of the living entities, doesn’t have material senses like they have. Actually, the individual souls have spiritual senses, but in conditioned life they are covered with the material elements, and therefore the sense activities are exhibited through matter. The Supreme Lord’s senses are not so covered. His senses are transcendental and are therefore called nirguṇa. Guṇa means the material modes, but His senses are without material covering. It should be understood that His senses are not exactly like ours. Although He is the source of all our sensory activities, He has His transcendental senses, which are uncontaminated. This is very nicely explained in the Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad (3.19) in the verse apāṇi-pādo javano grahītā. The Supreme Personality of Godhead has no hands which are materially contaminated, but He has His hands and accepts whatever sacrifice is offered to Him. That is the distinction between the conditioned soul and the Supersoul. He has no material eyes, but He has eyes – otherwise how could He see? He sees everything – past, present and future. He lives within the heart of the living being, and He knows what we have done in the past, what we are doing now, and what is awaiting us in the future. This is also confirmed in Bhagavad-gītā: He knows everything, but no one knows Him. It is said that the Supreme Lord has no legs like us, but He can travel throughout space because He has spiritual legs. In other words, the Lord is not impersonal; He has His eyes, legs, hands and everything else, and because we are part and parcel of the Supreme Lord we also have these things. But His hands, legs, eyes and senses are not contaminated by material nature. Bhagavad-gītā also confirms that when the Lord appears He appears as He is by His internal potency. He is not contaminated by the material energy, because He is the Lord of material energy. In the Vedic literature we find that His whole embodiment is spiritual. He has His eternal form, called sac-cid-ānanda-vigraha. He is full of all opulence. He is the proprietor of all wealth and the owner of all energy. He is the most intelligent and is full of knowledge. These are some of the symptoms of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is the maintainer of all living entities and the witness of all activity. As far as we can understand from Vedic literature, the Supreme Lord is always transcendental. Although we do not see His head, face, hands or legs, He has them, and when we are elevated to the transcendental situation we can see the Lord’s form. Due to materially contaminated senses, we cannot see His form. Therefore the impersonalists, who are still materially affected, cannot understand the Personality of Godhead.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
15. That Brahman illuminates all the senses and sense objects, but is devoid of all material senses. He is without attachment, but maintains everything. He is without material guṇas, but He is the enjoyer of all guṇas.
Commentary

He illuminates all the senses and sense objects (guṇa). The śruti says tac cakṣuṣaś cakṣuḥ (Kena Upaniṣad 1.2): He inspires the sight of the eye. Or the meaning can be “He shines forth or is endowed with all the senses and objects of the senses such as sound.” He however is also without all senses (sarvendriya vivarjitam). This means He is without material senses. Thus the śruti says: apāṇi-pādo javano grahītā paśyaty acakṣuḥ sa śṛṇoty akarṇaḥ. Without hands and feet He moves and receives. Without eyes He sees. Without ears He hears. Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 3.1 parāsya śaktir bahudhaiva śrūyate svābhāvikī jṣāna-bala-kriyā ca The energy of the Lord is divided into jṣāna, bala and kriyā śaktis. Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.8 This meaning is valid because it is well known in the śrutis that He is the abode of the svarūpa śakti, His spiritual energy. [Note: The Lord’s energies enable the Lord to fulfill His desires, just as a living entity’s senses enable him to fulfill his desires. He is therefore not devoid of organs to fulfill those desires.] He is without attachment (asaktam), and also maintains everything by His form of Viṣṇu (sarva-bhṛt). He has a form without the material guṇas of sattva, rajas and tamas (nirguṇa). But He is the enjoyer or taster of the six guṇas or bhagas known as aiśvarya, vīrya, yaśas, śrī, jṣāna and vairāgya (guṇa-bhoktṛ). [Note: The six qualities of Bhagavān are defined as follows. Aiśvarya means the Lord’s natural control of everything. Vīrya is refers to the Lord’s inconceivable potencies, by which he manifests jīva and prakṛti and expands as unlimited avatāras. Yaśaḥ refers to the Lord’s ocean of good qualities relating to body, mind and speech. Śrī refers to the Lord’s eternal, beautiful, youthful body. Jṣāna refers to the Lord’s omniscience. Vairāgya refers to the Lord’s detachment from all material affairs.]

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
15. That paramātmā is made glorious by having all senses and sense objects, but is devoid of all material senses. He is without attachment, but maintains everything. He is without material qualities, but he is the enjoyer of all good qualities.
Commentary

Moreover, that paramātmā is made glorious by all his senses and their functions (guṇa ābhāsam). The Lord is devoid of all senses which are different from his svarūpa. The jīva in bondage has senses different from his svarūpa. One should accept that the Lord is without material senses (sarvendriya vivarjitam), but is endowed with senses intimately connected with His svarūpa. The śruti says:

apāṇi-pādo javano grahītā paśyaty acakṣuḥ sa śṛṇoty akarṇaḥ Without hands or feet He moves swiftly and grasps. Without eyes He sees. Without ears He hears. Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 3.19 Jīva Gosvāmī says in the Bhagavat Sandarbha, anuccheda 22: yad ātmako bhagavāṁs tad-ātmikā vyaktiḥ kim ātmako bhagavān jṣānātmaka aiśvaryātmakaḥ śaktyātmakaḥ: What constitutes the Lord becomes manifest as non different from Himself. What constitutes the Lord? The Lord’s very essence is knowledge, power and śakti. The śruti says: buddhi-mano ’ṅga-pratyaṅgavattāṁ bhagavato lakṣayāmahe buddhimān mano-vān aṅga-pratyaṅgavān We describe that the Lord as endowed with limbs, subsections, mind and intelligence. He has intelligence, mind, limbs and subsections. [Note: Source of this is unknown.] Though he holds all elements (sarva bhṛt), He is devoid of contact (asaktam) with them, since He supports everything by His will. He is without the material guṇas (nirgunaḥ): sākṣī ceṭaḥ kevalo nirguṇaś ca: He is the witness, the consciousness, without material qualities. (Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.11) This means He is not touched by the material guṇas. But He is the controller and enjoyer of all good qualities (guṇa bhoktṛ). This is expressed in the section starting with guṇānubhavi-vikāra-jananīm ajṣām: ekas tu pibate devaḥ svacchando’tra vaśānugaḥ dhyāna-kriyābhyāṁ bhagavān bhuṅkte’sau prasabhaṁ vibhuḥ There the Lord, by His own will, relishes with delight. That powerful Lord enjoys by both thought and action. Mantrika Upaniṣad 6

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Translation
The Supersoul is the original source of all senses, yet He is without senses. He is unattached, although He is the maintainer of all living beings. He transcends the modes of nature, and at the same time He is the master of all the modes of material nature. (cn/DS) We are in the material nature with material senses and all that we are experiencing is with material senses. The very conception of senses to us is material. In other words, we tend to judge things from our experience, therefore there is a problem with understanding God, because God also has senses but they are not under the material modes of nature, because He is the creator and the controller of the modes of nature. Therefore to help us to understand what God's senses are, we say that He has no senses because the concept of senses has many material ideas about it. But the fact is that the Supreme Lord does have senses ‑ but they are completely transcendental. His senses can do the function of any other sense.
Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Supersoul is “Transcendental”

Text 13.16 *

THEME: Supersoul is “All-Reconciling”

Focus of Learning

(a) Supreme Lord is the source of all senses of the living entities

Does not have material senses like ours
Ref. Svetasvatara Upanisad 3.19: Distinction between Supersoul and conditioned soul
Supreme Lord has no hands which are materially contaminated but has transcendental hands – accepts whatever sacrifice offered to Him
Has no material eyes – but has spiritual eyes because He can see past, present and future (e.g. Bg. 7.26)
Has no material legs but has spiritual legs – can travel throughout the universe
Conclusion – The Lord is not impersonal but definitely has spiritual senses
How can we expect ‘part and parcel’ to have something which the Lord (the original source) does not have

(b) Lord appears by His internal potency and not contaminated by material energy (Ref. Bg. 4.6)

Vedic literatures explains His whole embodiment is ‘spiritual’ – some of the symptoms of the Supreme Personality of Godhead are as follows
Full of all opulences
Proprietor of all wealth and all energies
Most intelligent and full of knowledge
Maintainer of all living entities and witness of all activities

(c) Why we cannot see Him – Because He is transcendental

We are materially contaminated; even the impersonalists are materially affected
Only by transcendental elevation, one can see the Lord’s form

(b) Purport proves that Text 13.14 talks about Supersoul and not the individual soul – as follows:

Individual soul cannot claim that he has legs, hands, etc everywhere
To think this, is the effect of ignorance – If one thinks that under ignorance one is not conscious that his legs and hands are diffused everywhere, but when he attains to proper knowledge he attains to that stage, his thinking is contradictory

▪

Refutation: If living entity has become conditioned by material nature, then

how can he be Supreme

Individual soul cannot extend his hands and legs etc everywhere

▪

Supreme Soul can extend without limit as shown by Ref. Bg. 9.26: ‘’patram

pushpam…” and Brahma Samhita 5.37: “goloka eva…”

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.15 Sarvendriya-guna-abhasam, shining through the functions of all the organs: By the use of the words all the organs are understood ears etc., known as the sense-organs and motor-organs, as also the internal organs-the intellect and the mind, for they are eally the limiting adjuncts of the Knowable. Besides, the organs of hearing etc. become the limiting adjuncts from the very fact of the internal organ becoming so. Hence, the Knowable gets expressed through determination, thinking, hearing, speaking, etc. that are the functions of all the organs, internal and external, which are the limiting adjuncts. In this way, It is manifest through the functions of all the organs. The idea is that, that Knowable appears to be as though active owing to the functions of all the organs, as it is said in the Upanisadic text, 'It thinks, as it were, and shakes, as it were' (Br. 4.3.7). For that reason, again, is It not perceived as being actually active? In answer the Lord says: It is sarva-indriya-varitam, devoid of all the organs, i.e. bereft of all the instruments of action. Hence the Knowable is not active through the functioning of the instruments of action. As for the Upanisadic verse, 'Without hands and feet He moves swiftly and grasps; without eyes He sees, without ears He hears' (Sv. 3.19), etc.-that is meant for showing that that Knowable has the power of adapting Itself to the functions of all the organs which are Its limiting adjuncts; but it is not meant to show that It really has such activity as moving fast etc. The meaning of that verse is like that of the Vedic text, 'The blind one discoverd a gem' (Tai, Ar. 1.11). [This is an artha-veda (see note on p.530), which is not to be taken literally but interpreted in accordance with the context.] Since the Knowable is devoid of all the instruments of actions, therefore It is asaktam, unattached, devoid of all associations. Although It is of this kind, yet it is ca eva, also verily; the sarva-bhrt, supporter of all. Indeed, everything has existence as its basis, because the idea of 'existence' is present everywhere. Verily, even mirage etc. do not occur without some basis. Therefore, It is sarva-bhrt, the supporter of all-It upholds everything. There can be this other organs as well for the realization of the existence of the Knowable: Nirgunam, without ality-the alities are sattva, rajas and tamas; that Knowable is free from them; and yet It is the guna-bhoktr, perceiver of alities; i.e., that Knowable is the enjoyer and experiencer of the alities, sattva, rajas and tamas, which, assuming the forms of sound etc., transform them-selves into happiness, sorrow, delusion, etc. Further,
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.15 Sarvendriya-gunabhasam i.e., shining by the functions of the senses - means that which is shedding light on the functions of all the senses. The 'Gunas' of the senses means the activities of the senses. The meaning is that the self is capable of knowing the objects with the functioning of the senses. 'Yet devoid of the senses' i.e., It is capable by Itself, of knowing everything. Such is the meaning. It is 'detached', namely, It is free, by nature, from attachment to the bodies of gods etc. 'Yet supporting all,' yet capable of supporting all bodies, such as of gods etc., as declared in the Sruti. 'It is one, is threefold ৷৷.' (Cha. U., 7.26.2). It is devoid of Gunas, i.e., by nature It is devoid of Sattva etc., and yet It is the experiencer of the Gunas' - It has the capability to experience Sattva etc.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.15 See Comment under 13.18
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.15 Shining by the functions of all the senses, yet without the senses; unattached, yet supporting all; devoid of alities, yet their experiencer.
Commentary

13.15 सर्वेन्द्रियगुणाभासम् shining by the functions of all senses? सर्वेन्द्रयविवर्जितम् (yet) without the senses? असक्तम् unattached? सर्वभृत् (yet) supporting all? च and? एव even? निर्गुणम् devoid of alities? गुणभोक्तृ (yet) experiencer of the alities? च and.Commentary Brahman sees without eyes? hears without ears? smells without nose? eats without mouth? feels without skin? grasps without hands? walks without feet. He is the unseen seer? the unheard hearer? the unthought thinker. Other than Him there is no seer? no hearer? no thinker. He is the Self? the Inner Ruler? the Immortal. (Brihadaranyaka Upanishad III.7.23) He is free from the,alities of Nature and yet He is the enjoyer of the alities.All the senses The five organs of knowledge and the five organs of action? the inner senses? mind and intellect come under the term all the senses. The organs of action and those of knowledge perform their functions in conjunction with the mind and the intellect. They cannot function independently. Therefore? the mind and the intellect are included in the term all the senses.Brahman is transcendental and unmanifest? but It manifests Itself through the limiting adjuncts of the extrnal and the internal senses. As It is destitute of the senses It is unattached and yet It supports all. It is the support or substratum of everything. It is destitute of the alities of Nature and yet It is the enjoyer of those alities. Brahman is really mysterious.This verse is taken from the Svetasvataropanishad 3.17.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.15 Shining through the functions of all the organs, (yet) devoid of all the organs; unattached, and verily the supporter of all; without ality, and the perceiver of alities;
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.15 Beyond the senses, It yet shines through every sense perception. Bound to nothing, It yet sustains everything. Unaffected by the Qualities, It still enjoys them all.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
He is the original source of all senses, yet without senses; unattached, sustaining all; transcendental to the modes, yet master of all the modes.
Practical Applications
  • Hold the paradox: source-of-senses, without senses.
  • Don't reduce the Lord to either pole.
  • Use paradox as appropriate map.
Reflection Questions
  • Where do I demand non-paradoxical neatness?
  • What does paradox appropriately encode?

A blind musician composes a song in his head, perfect in every note, though he has no instrument in his hand. The song exists, complete, source of every later performance — yet he himself is touched by none of its sounds. So the Supersoul: source of every sense, possessing none; sustainer of every being, attached to none.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.16

↗
బహిరన్తశ్చ భూతానామచరం చరమేవ చ । సూక్ష్మత్వాత్తదవిజ్ఞేయం దూరస్థం చాన్తికే చ తత్ ॥ ౧౬ ॥
bahir antaś ca bhūtānām
[bahir antash cha bhootaanaam]
acaraṁ caram eva ca
[acharam charam eva cha]
sūkṣmatvāt tad avijñeyaṁ
[sookshmatvaat tad avijneyam]
dūra-sthaṁ cāntike ca tat
[doora-stham chaantike cha tat]
bahiḥ — outside antaḥ — inside ca — also bhūtānām — of all living entities acaram — not moving caram — moving eva — also ca — and sūkṣmatvāt — on account of being subtle tat — that avijñeyam — unknowable dūra - stham — far away ca — also antike — near ca — and tat — that .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
bahir antaś ca bhūtānām
bahiḥ
outside
antaḥ
inside
ca
also
bhūtānām
of all living entities
acaraṁ caram eva ca
acaram
not moving
caram
moving
eva
also
ca
and
sūkṣmatvāt tad avijñeyaṁ
sūkṣmatvāt
on account of being subtle
tat
that
avijñeyam
unknowable
dūra-sthaṁ cāntike ca tat
dūra - stham
far away
ca
also
antike
near
ca
and
tat
that .
  • bahiḥ — outside
    Adverb. The Lord is outside all beings — transcendent, not contained. But Kṛṣṇa pairs it immediately with antaḥ.
  • antaḥ — inside
    The matching adverb. Bahiḥ and antaḥ together compose a single doctrine: the Lord is not just "out there" or just "in here." The dualism the words seem to construct is exactly what Kṛṣṇa is dismantling.
  • sūkṣmatvāt — on account of being subtle
    Ablative case — "because of His subtlety." The Lord is invisible to gross senses not because He hides but because He is finer than the instruments meant to detect Him.
  • avijñeyam — unknowable
    A- + vijñeya. By the ordinary senses, unknowable. The verse implicitly demands an extraordinary instrument — bhakti, jñāna, the heart's eye.
  • dūra - stham — far away
    And yet — antike. Far for the indifferent, near for the longing. Spatial distance is meaningless before a Lord whose nearness is calibrated to the seeker's heart.
The Supreme Truth exists outside and inside of all living beings, the moving and the nonmoving. Because He is subtle, He is beyond the power of the material senses to see or to know. Although far, far away, He is also near to all.

In Vedic literature we understand that Nārāyaṇa, the Supreme Person, is residing both outside and inside of every living entity. He is present in both the spiritual and material worlds. Although He is far, far away, still He is near to us. These are the statements of Vedic literature. Āsīno dūraṁ vrajati śayāno yāti sarvataḥ ( Kaṭha Upaniṣad 1.2.21). And because He is always engaged in transcendental bliss, we cannot understand how He is enjoying His full opulence. We cannot see or understand with these material senses. Therefore in the Vedic language it is said that to understand Him our material mind and senses cannot act. But one who has purified his mind and senses by practicing Kṛṣṇa consciousness in devotional service can see Him constantly. It is confirmed in Brahma-saṁhitā that the devotee who has developed love for the Supreme God can see Him always, without cessation. And it is confirmed in Bhagavad-gītā (11.54) that He can be seen and understood only by devotional service. Bhaktyā tv ananyayā śakyaḥ.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
16. He is outside and inside all beings. He alone is all moving and non-moving beings. He is difficult to understand because of His subtle nature. He is far away and also very near.
Commentary

He exists within and outside of all living entities, who are His products (bhūtānām means arising from Him), just as ether and other elements exists within and outside all bodies of which they are the cause. All non-moving and moving beings are only the Lord, since He is the cause and they are the effect. He cannot be clearly known (tad avijṣeyam). In other words, for the ignorant, He is situated far away at millions of yojanas distance and for the wise He is near, as if living in that person’s house, since He is situated as the antaryāmī within the person. The śruti says:

dūrāt sudūre tad ihāntike ca paśyatsv ihaiva nihitaṁ guhāyām He is further than far, and very close. In the body He is situated in the heart, in those who see. Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 3.1.7

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
16. He is outside and inside all things. He moves and does not move. He is difficult to understand because of His subtle nature. He is not perceivable, but He can be perceived.
Commentary

He is outside and inside of all living and material tattvas (bhūtānām). Śruti says: antar bahiś ca tat sarvaṁ vyāpya nārāyaṇaḥ sthitaḥ Nārāyaṇa is spread within and outside of everything. Mahā Nārāyaṇa Upaniṣad 13.5 He does not move (acaram) and moves (caram): āsīno dūraṁ vrajati śayāno yāti sarvataḥ Though sitting He goes far away, and though lying down He goes everywhere. Kaṭha Upaniṣad 1.2.21 Because of having a self illuminated form of bliss and knowledge (sūkṣmatvāt), He cannot be known like the devatās. Therefore he is described as being situated far away (dūra stham). yan manasā na manute na cakṣuṣā paśyati kaścanainam: no one can conceive of Him in his mind, and no one can see Him with his eye. (Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 4.20) But he can be known by senses endowed with bhakti, just as an ear well trained in music can understand the different notes. Thus, though far away (not perceived by the eye or ear), He is close (antike), perceivable. The śrutis say: manasaivānudraṣṭavyam The Lord should been seen by the mind. Bṛhad Āraṇyaka Upaniṣad 4.4.20 kaścid dhīraḥ pratyag-ātmānam aikṣat An intelligent person sees the inner Self. Kaṭha Upaniṣad 4.1 bhakti-yoge hi tiṣṭhati He is present in bhakti yoga Gopāla Tāpanī Upaniṣad 2.78 The smṛti also says that the Lord can be known by bhakti: bhaktyā tv ananyayā śakyaḥ. (BG 11.55)

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

One of the terms in the verse (3rd line) is 'avijneyam' which means 'unknowable'. The knowable by definition is unknowable. What that means? It means that by material processes, using the material senses, the Supersoul is unknowable as is Brahman too. One needs to hear from transcendental sources to know Him. "Although far, far away..." means that foolish people cannot know Him. "He is also near to all" means that He can be known by learned persons who dear to Him.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

That Kṛṣṇa described the knowable in text 16 as avijñeyam, unknowable, indicates that the Super-

soul cannot be understood by the material senses. Only by hearing with devotion from transcen-

dental sources can He be understood.

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.16 Existing, bahih, outside- the word bahih is used with reference to the body including the skin, which is misconceived through ignorance to be the Self, and which is itself taken as the boundary. Similarly, the word antah, inside, is used with reference to the indwelling Self, making the body itself as the boundary. When 'outside' and 'inside' are used, there may arise the contingency of the nonexistence of That in the middle. Hence this is said: acaram caram eva ca, moving as well as not moving-even that which appears as the body, moving or not moving, is nothing but the Knowable, in the same way as the appearance of a snake on a rope (is nothing but the rope). In all empirical things, moving as also non-moving, be the Knowable, why should It not be known by all as such? In answer it is said: It is true that It shines through everything; still it is subtle like space. Therefore, although It is the Knowable, tat, It; is avijneyam, incomprehensible to the ignorant people; suksmatvat, due to Its intrinsic subtleness. But to the enlightened It is ever known from the valid means of knowledge such as (the texts), 'All this is verily the Self' (Ch. 7.25.2), 'Brahman alone is all this' (Nr. Ut.7), etc. It is durastham, far away, since, to the unenlightened, It is unattainable even in millions of years. And tat, That; is antike, near, since It is the Self of the enlightened.
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.16 Abandoning the elements like earth etc., It can exist outside the body. It can exist within them while performing spontaneous activities as established in the Srutis: 'Eating, playing, enjoying with partners or with vehicles' (Cha. U., 8.12.3). 'It is unmoving and yet moving' - it is by nature, unmoving, It is moving when It has a body. It is so subtle that none can comprehend It. Although existing in a body, this principle, possessed of all powers and omniscient, cannot be comprehended by bound ones because of Its subtlety and Its distinctiveness from the body. It is far away and yet It is very near - though present in one's own body, It is far away from those who are devoid of modesty and other alities (mentioned above) as also to those who possess contrary alities. To those who possess modesty and such other alities, the same self is very near.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.16 See Comment under 13.18
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.16 Without and within (all) beings the unmoving and also the moving; because of Its subtlety, unknowable; and near and far away is That.
Commentary

13.16 बहिः without? अन्तः within? च and? भूतानाम् of (all) beings? अचरम् the unmoving? चरम् the moving? एव also? च and? सूक्ष्मत्वात् because of Its subtlety? तत् That? अविज्ञेयम् unknowable? दूरस्थम् is far? च and? अन्तिके near? च and? तत् That.Commentary Brahman is subtle like the ether. It is incomprehensible to the unillumined on account of Its extreme subtlety. It is unknowable to the man who is not endowed with the four means of salvation.Brahman is known or realised by the wise. It is realised by the first class aspirant who is eipped with these means. It is near to the wise man or the illumined because It is his very Self. It is very far to the ignorant man who is drowned in worldliness or sensual pleasures. It is not attainable by the ignorant or unenlightened even in millions of years.Near and far away This expression is found in the Isavasya Upanishad (5) and the Mundaka Upanishad (3.17).

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.16 Existing outside and inside all beings; moving as well as non-moving, It is incomprehensible due to subtleness. So also, It is far away, and yet near.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.16 It is within all beings, yet outside; motionless yet moving; too subtle to be perceived; far away yet always near.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Ahimsa (Non-violence / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Maitri (Friendship / Goodwill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
He exists outside and inside all beings — moving and unmoving; subtle, beyond ordinary understanding; far, yet near.
Practical Applications
  • Cultivate awareness of His simultaneous farness and nearness.
  • Don't choose one over the other.
  • Use both in prayer.
Reflection Questions
  • When does He feel near? When far?
  • What practice would steady the perception of His nearness?

Water in a fish's gill is closer than the fish's own breath, yet the fish swims through it as if it weren't there. The Lord is closer than your heartbeat and farther than the farthest galaxy at the same instant. Distance does not measure Him; the seeker's eye does.

Dhruva sees the Lord in his own heart

The boy Dhruva, slighted by his stepmother and exiled to the forest, performed austerities so intense that the Lord finally appeared before him. But the Bhāgavatam records that Dhruva's first vision was actually inward — the Lord standing in the cavity of his heart, four-armed, smiling.

When Dhruva opened his eyes, the same Lord stood outside him too. Far and near were one. The verse Kṛṣṇa speaks here is the doctrine; Dhruva's vision is the demonstration.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.17

↗
అవిభక్తం చ భూతేషు విభక్తమివ చ స్థితమ్ । భూతభర్తృ చ తజ్జ్ఞేయం గ్రసిష్ణు ప్రభవిష్ణు చ ॥ ౧౭ ॥
avibhaktaṁ ca bhūteṣu
[avibhaktam cha bhooteshu]
vibhaktam iva ca sthitam
[vibhaktam iva cha sthitam]
bhūta-bhartṛ ca taj jñeyaṁ
[bhoota-bhartri cha taj jneyam]
grasiṣṇu prabhaviṣṇu ca
[grasishnu prabhavishnu cha]
avibhaktam — without division ca — also bhūteṣu — in all living beings vibhaktam — divided iva — as if ca — also sthitam — situated bhūta - bhartṛ — the maintainer of all living entities ca — also tat — that jñeyam — to be understood grasiṣṇu — devouring prabhaviṣṇu — developing ca — also .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
avibhaktaṁ ca bhūteṣu
avibhaktam
without division
ca
also
bhūteṣu
in all living beings
vibhaktam iva ca sthitam
vibhaktam
divided
iva
as if
ca
also
sthitam
situated
bhūta-bhartṛ ca taj jñeyaṁ
bhūta - bhartṛ
the maintainer of all living entities
ca
also
tat
that
jñeyam
to be understood
grasiṣṇu prabhaviṣṇu ca
grasiṣṇu
devouring
prabhaviṣṇu
developing
ca
also .
  • avibhaktam — without division
    A- + vibhakta. The Paramātmā is undivided in His own being, yet present in every heart — and the next word (vibhaktam iva) keeps the difference alive: He appears divided across jīvas without becoming many. Acintya-bhedābheda, not Māyāvāda — the plurality of beings is real, the Lord's oneness is real, simultaneously.
  • vibhaktam — divided
    But qualified immediately by *iva* — "as if." The Lord *seems* divided across beings; He is not. Anyone who reads vibhakta literally without the iva has missed the verse.
  • bhūta - bhartṛ — the maintainer of all living entities
    Compound: bhūta (beings) + bhartṛ (bearer). The same Lord who appears divided also bears every being He inhabits.
  • grasiṣṇu — devouring
    Desiderative noun from √gras ("to swallow"). At dissolution, the Lord swallows all that He maintained. The same hand that feeds also withdraws the feeding.
  • prabhaviṣṇu — developing
    Paired with grasiṣṇu. The Lord is creator *and* destroyer — and these are not two Lords, but one. The cycle of generation and reabsorption is His single act.
Although the Supersoul appears to be divided among all beings, He is never divided. He is situated as one. Although He is the maintainer of every living entity, it is to be understood that He devours and develops all.

The Lord is situated in everyone’s heart as the Supersoul. Does this mean that He has become divided? No. Actually, He is one. The example is given of the sun: The sun, at the meridian, is situated in its place. But if one goes for five thousand miles in all directions and asks, “Where is the sun?” everyone will say that it is shining on his head. In the Vedic literature this example is given to show that although He is undivided, He is situated as if divided. Also it is said in Vedic literature that one Viṣṇu is present everywhere by His omnipotence, just as the sun appears in many places to many persons. And the Supreme Lord, although the maintainer of every living entity, devours everything at the time of annihilation. This was confirmed in the Eleventh Chapter when the Lord said that He had come to devour all the warriors assembled at Kurukṣetra. He also mentioned that in the form of time He devours also. He is the annihilator, the killer of all. When there is creation, He develops all from their original state, and at the time of annihilation He devours them. The Vedic hymns confirm the fact that He is the origin of all living entities and the rest of all. After creation, everything rests in His omnipotence, and after annihilation everything again returns to rest in Him. These are the confirmations of Vedic hymns. Yato vā imāni bhūtāni jāyante yena jātāni jīvanti yat prayanty abhisaṁ viśanti tad brahma tad vijijñāsasva ( Taittirīya Upaniṣad 3.1).

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
17. He is undivided, and also divided in all the living entities. He is to be known as the maintainer, the destroyer and the creator.
Commentary

As the cause, which is one (avibhaktiam), He is situated in all the moving and non-moving entities, and as the effect or product, He is situated separately as each object. As the form of Nārāyaṇa, He is the protection of the living entities (bhūtā-bhartṛ) during the duration of maintenance, the destruction (grahiṣṇu) at the time of pralaya, and the creation of all beings (prabhaviṣṇu) at the time of creation. The word prabhaviṣṇu which usually means “lord” is taken here as meaning “what is created” since the word can also mean “he who is the product (prabhavana) because the cause is manifest in the effects.”

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
17. He is undivided, and also divided in all the living entities. He is to be known as maintenance, destruction and the creation of all things.
Commentary

He is one, not divided up, whereas all the jīvas are separate entities (avibhaktam). But He also is situated separately like separate jīvas (vibhaktam iva). The śruti says that though He is one, He appears as many: eko’pi san bahudhā yo vibhāti. (Gopāla Tāpanī Upaniṣad) Smṛti says: eka eva paro viṣṇuḥ sarvatrāpi na saṁśayaḥ aiśvaryād rūpam ekaṁ ca sūryavad bahudheyate The one Viṣṇu is situated everywhere without doubt. Like the sun, He makes the one form become many by His powers. Matsya Purāṇa He is the protection of the living entities (bhūta bhṛt) during the duration of the kalpa, and at pralaya, He is the destruction of them (grasiṣṇu) by His kāla śakti. And at the time of creation, He takes the role of production (prabhaviṣṇu), being various effects, through his energies of jīva and pradhāna. Śruti says: yato vā imāni bhūtāni jāyante yena jātāni jīvanti yat prayanty abhisaṁviśanti tad brahma tad vijijṣāsasva You should know that brahman from which all entities arise, by which those who took birth live, and towards which they move and enter. Taittirīya Upaniṣad 3.1.1

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

Krsna is closing the definition of the knowable, and if one examines the sanskrit, he will see that Srila Prabhupada is putting in the Supersoul as the actual conclusion that Krsna reaches. Srila Prabhupada so kindly is doing this to make it easier for us to understand.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Supersoul is “Undivided”

Although Supersoul appears divided, but is situated as one
Although maintainer of all living entities, He devours and develops all LINK BETWEEN TEXTS 13.7 & 13.18: Finally, in Text 13.18, Krishna clearly reveals the identity of the one He has been describing. The jneyam is the Supersoul, who is hrdi-sarvasya, within the heart of all. Srila Prabhupada kindly informed us earlier in his translations and purports to Texts 13.14, 13.15, and 13.17

that the supreme knowable object, who has been described as unknowable, is nevertheless situated in

everyone’s heart as Paramatma. Srila Prabhupada cites several verses from the Svetasvatara Upanishad to

substantiate that, these Bhagavad-gita texts have been describing neither the living entity nor Brahman, but

the Supersoul

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.17 And further, tat, that; jneyam, Knowable; though avibhaktam, undivided, remaining the same in all beings like space; iva sthitam, appears to be existing; as vibhaktam, divided; bhutesu, in all beings, because It is perceived as existing in the bodies themselves. And just as a rope etc. are with regard to a snake etc. That are falsely imagined, similarly that Knowable is bhutabhartr, the sustainer of all beings, sinced It sustains all during the period of their existence; grasisnu, the devourer, at the time of dissolution; and prabhavisnu, the originator, at the time of creation. Further, it the Knowable is not perceived though existing everywhere, then It is darkness? Not! What then?
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.17 Though the entity called the self is present everywhere in the bodies of divinities, men etc., It is 'undivided' because of Its form being that of the knower. However, to those who are ignorant, It appears divided, by such forms as those of divinities etc. - 'I am a divinity,' 'man' etc. Though the self can be contemplated by way of co-ordinate predication as one with the body in such significations as, 'I am divinity, I am a man,' It can be known as being different from the body, because of Its being a knower. That is why it has already been pointed out at the beginning: 'He who knows It? (13.1). Now Sri Krsna says that It can be known as different also on other grounds - as the 'supporter of elements' etc. Because It supports the earth and other elements combined in the shape of the body, the self can be known as being different from the elements supported. The sense is that It can be known as a separate entity. Likewise, It is that which 'devours', namely, the consumer of physical food etc. Because, It 'devours' the food, It can be known as an entity different from the elements. It causes 'generation' - It is the cause of transformation of consumed food etc., into other forms like blood etc. As eating, generating etc., are not seen in a corpse, it is settled that the body, an aggregate of elements, cannot be the cause of devouring food, generating of species and supporting them.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.17 See Comment under 13.18
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.17 And undivided, yet It exists as if divided in beings; It is to be known as the supporter of being; It devours and It generates.
Commentary

13.17 अविभक्तम् undivided? च and? भूतेषु in beings? विभक्तम् divided? इव as if? च and? स्थितम् existing? भूतभर्तृ the supporter of beings? च and? तत् That ज्ञेयम् to be known? ग्रसिष्णु devouring? प्रभविष्णु generating? च and.Commentary Brahman must be regarded as That which supports? swallows up and also creates all beings? in the three forms of Brahma who creates the world of names anf forms? Vishnu who preserves or sustains? and Rudra who destroys. It is undivided in the various bodies. It is like ether. It is allpervding like space (Akasa). It is indivisible and the One? but It seems to divide Itself in forms and appears as all the separate existing things and beings. It is essentially unbroken. Yet? It is? as it were? divided among all beings.It devours this world during the cosmic dissolution. It generates it at the time of the origin of the next age. It supports all beings during the period of sustenance of this world.Just as fire is hidden in the wood? so also Brahman is hidden in all bodies. Just as the one space appears to be different through the limiting adjuncts (pot? house? etc.) so also the one indivisible Brahman appears to be different through the limiting adjuncts (the body? etc.). (Cf.XVIII.20)An objector says The knowable Brahman? the Knower of the field? is allpervading. It exists everywhere and yet It is not perceived. Therefore It must be of the nature of darkness or Tamas.The answer is No. It cannot be.What? then It is the Light of Lights.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.17 And the Knowable, though undivided, appears to be existing as divided in all beings, and It is the sustainer of all beings as also the devourer and originator.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.17 In all beings undivided, yet living in division, It is the upholder of all, Creator and Destroyer alike;
Related values
Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Maitri (Friendship / Goodwill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
Although the Supersoul is undivided, He appears divided in beings — the maintainer of all beings, the devourer, the producer.
Practical Applications
  • Hold the unity beneath apparent multiplicity.
  • See the same Lord behind the variety of beings.
  • Cultivate this single-source vision.
Reflection Questions
  • Where do I miss the single source behind the variety?
  • What practice trains that vision?

The moon's light, falling on a city of ten thousand puddles, appears in each puddle complete and distinct. Yet anyone looking up sees one moon, undivided. The Lord stands so in beings: divided in appearance, undivided in fact — and devouring all those puddles back into Himself at the time of dissolution.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.18

↗
జ్యోతిషామపి తజ్జ్యోతిస్తమస: పరముచ్యతే । జ్ఞానం జ్ఞేయం జ్ఞానగమ్యం హృది సర్వస్య విష్ఠితమ్ ॥ ౧౮ ॥
jyotiṣām api taj jyotis
[jyotishaam api taj jyotis]
tamasaḥ param ucyate
[tamasah param uchyate]
jñānaṁ jñeyaṁ jñāna-gamyaṁ
[jnaanam jneyam jnaana-gamyam]
hṛdi sarvasya viṣṭhitam
[hridi sarvasya vishthitam]
jyotiṣām — in all luminous objects api — also tat — that jyotiḥ — the source of light tamasaḥ — the darkness param — beyond ucyate — is said jñānam — knowledge jñeyam — to be known jñāna - gamyam — to be approached by knowledge hṛdi — in the heart sarvasya — of everyone viṣṭhitam — situated .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
jyotiṣām api taj jyotis
jyotiṣām
in all luminous objects
api
also
tat
that
jyotiḥ
the source of light
tamasaḥ param ucyate
tamasaḥ
the darkness
param
beyond
ucyate
is said
jñānaṁ jñeyaṁ jñāna-gamyaṁ
jñānam
knowledge
jñeyam
to be known
jñāna - gamyam
to be approached by knowledge
hṛdi sarvasya viṣṭhitam
hṛdi
in the heart
sarvasya
of everyone
viṣṭhitam
situated .
  • jyotiṣām — in all luminous objects
    Genitive plural. Among lights — sun, moon, fire, intellect — He is the light of those lights. The Upaniṣadic phrase "the light of lights" lives in this single word.
  • tamasaḥ — the darkness
    Genitive — "of darkness." The Lord is *param* (beyond) tamas. Tamas here is both literal darkness and the mode of ignorance. He is past both, neither dim nor mistaken.
  • jñānam — knowledge
    He is the knowing itself.
  • jñeyam — to be known
    He is also what is to be known. Subject and object collapse into one Lord.
  • jñāna - gamyam — to be approached by knowledge
    And the method by which knowing approaches Him. Three roles — knower, known, means of knowing — held by one Person. The verse compresses a whole epistemology.
  • hṛdi — in the heart
    Locative singular. Not in the sky, not in some celestial realm — in the heart. The cosmic Lord of the previous verses is suddenly and intimately near. This single word reorients the whole chapter inward.
He is the source of light in all luminous objects. He is beyond the darkness of matter and is unmanifested. He is knowledge, He is the object of knowledge, and He is the goal of knowledge. He is situated in everyone’s heart.

The Supersoul, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is the source of light in all luminous objects like the sun, moon and stars. In the Vedic literature we find that in the spiritual kingdom there is no need of sun or moon, because the effulgence of the Supreme Lord is there. In the material world that brahma-jyotir, the Lord’s spiritual effulgence, is covered by the mahat-tattva, the material elements; therefore in this material world we require the assistance of sun, moon, electricity, etc., for light. But in the spiritual world there is no need of such things. It is clearly stated in the Vedic literature that because of His luminous effulgence, everything is illuminated. It is clear, therefore, that His situation is not in the material world. He is situated in the spiritual world, which is far, far away in the spiritual sky. That is also confirmed in the Vedic literature. Āditya-varṇaṁ tamasaḥ parastāt ( Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 3.8). He is just like the sun, eternally luminous, but He is far, far beyond the darkness of this material world. His knowledge is transcendental. The Vedic literature confirms that Brahman is concentrated transcendental knowledge. To one who is anxious to be transferred to that spiritual world, knowledge is given by the Supreme Lord, who is situated in everyone’s heart. One Vedic mantra ( Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.18) says, taṁ ha devam ātma-buddhi-prakāśaṁ mumukṣur vai śaraṇam ahaṁ prapadye. One must surrender unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead if he at all wants liberation. As far as the goal of ultimate knowledge is concerned, it is also confirmed in Vedic literature: tam eva viditvāti mṛtyum eti. “Only by knowing Him can one surpass the boundary of birth and death.” ( Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 3.8) He is situated in everyone’s heart as the supreme controller. The Supreme has legs and hands distributed everywhere, and this cannot be said of the individual soul. Therefore that there are two knowers of the field of activity – the individual soul and the Supersoul – must be admitted. One’s hands and legs are distributed locally, but Kṛṣṇa’s hands and legs are distributed everywhere. This is confirmed in the Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad (3.17): sarvasya prabhum īśānaṁ sarvasya śaraṇaṁ bṛhat. That Supreme Personality of Godhead, Supersoul, is the prabhu, or master, of all living entities; therefore He is the ultimate shelter of all living entities. So there is no denying the fact that the Supreme Supersoul and the individual soul are always different.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
18. This light of all luminaries is said to be beyond darkness. He is knowledge, what is to be known, and is obtained by the process of knowledge. He is situated in the heart of all.
Commentary

Of the sun, moon and other light bodies, He is the illuminator (tad-jyotih), by which the sun shines, by whose power light radiates. The śruti says: yena suryah tapati tejasendhah By His power the sun burns. Taittirīya Brāhmaṇa 3.12.9.7, 5 na tatra sūryo bhāti na candra-tārakaṁ nemā vidyuto bhānti kuto’yam agniḥ tad eva bhāntam anubhāti sarvaṁ There, the sun does not shine, nor do the moon or stars. There, lightning does not flash, what to speak of fire. Everything shines in obedience to He who shines. Kaṭha Upaniṣad 2.5.15 aditya varṇaṁ tamasaḥ parastāt He is like the sun, beyond ignorance. Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 3.8 Jṣānam means what is revealed by the function of intelligence. The Lord is that jṣānam (awareness). Jṣeyam means that awareness which develops a specific form, qualities etc. (jṣeyam). The Lord is that object of awareness. He is attained by the process of knowledge (pridelessness etc.) mentioned previously (jṣāna-gamyam). Being the form of Paramātmā, He is situated as the regulator in the hearts of all living entities (dhiṣṭhitam).

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
18. This light of all light bodies is said to be beyond matter. He is knowledge, to be known, and obtained by the process of knowledge. He is situated in the heart of all.
Commentary

Brahman (tat) is the illuminator (jyotih) of the luminaries like the sun (jyotiṣām). Śruti describes brahman as follows: na tatra sūryo bhāti na candra-tārakaṁ nemā vidyuto bhānti kuto’yam agniḥ tad eva bhāntam anubhāti sarvaṁ tasya bhāsā sarvam idaṁ vibhāti There, the sun, the moon, the stars, fire and lightning do not shine. They all shine after Him alone, who shines. His light illuminates all these. Kaṭha Upaniṣad 5.15 This brahman is beyond prakṛti (tamasaḥ param). It is not touched by prakṛti. The śruti says āditya-varṇaṁ tamasaḥ parastāt: He is like the sun, beyond darkness. (Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 3.8) The brahman is jṣānam, or pure, unchanging knowledge. The śruti says: vijṣānam ānanda-ghanaṁ brahma: brahman is knowledge and condensed bliss. (Bṛhad Āraṇyaka Upaniṣad 3.9.28) This jṣānam or brahman is to be known by the person desiring liberation, as the worthy object of surrender (jṣeyam). The śruti says taṁ ha devam ātma-buddhi-prakāśaṁ mumukṣur vai śaraṇam ahaṁ prapadye: I surrender to He who shelters those desiring liberation, the Lord who reveals self and intelligence. (Śvetaśvatara Upaniṣad 6.18) Brahman is said to be approached by the process of knowledge (jṣāna gamyam). tam eva viditvātimṛtyum eti: knowing Him, one attains liberation. (Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣsad 3.8) He is situated as the controller (dhiṣṭitam) [Note: The other reading viṣṭhitam, meaning situated.] in the heart of every living entity. Śruti says antaḥ-praviṣṭaḥ śāstā janānām: He has entered within, and is the controller of all men. (Taittirīya Āraṇyaka 3.11.10) One should not say that the verses starting from verse 13 refer to the jīva because that has been the topic before that. They refer to the Supreme Lord, because the topic is also the Lord as a knower of the field, like the jīva. “Everywhere are His hands and feet” must refer to the Lord, because the same subject refers only to the Lord in the Śvetāśvatara and other Upaniṣads. This also follows the style of mixing topics (jīva and īśvara) commonly seen in the Upaniṣaḍs.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

The purpose of knowledge is to get out of this material world by knowing the Supreme Lord.

[2. Only the devotee can understand the field of activities (the body), the process of knowledge, and both the soul and the Super soul. (19) ]

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

He is the “Source of all knowledge and enlightenment”

Source of light in all luminous objects
Is beyond the darkness of matter and is unmanifested
He is knowledge, object of knowledge and goal of knowledge
He is situated in everyone’s heart

Focus of Learning

(a) Examples in Vedic Literatures

Lord’s presence in everyone’s heart does not imply that He is divided
e.g. Analogy: Sun, if at meridian, is in one place but if we go 5000 miles in all directions; everyone experiences the sun’s presence on their head
Vedic literatures say: “One Vishnu” is present everywhere by His omnipotence
Vedic Hymns confirm Him as the ‘origin of all’ and ‘rest of all’

(b) “As devouring all”

Explained in Chapter 11 – “I have come to devour all in the form of time”

(a) Supreme Truth is outside and inside of all living beings

Ref. Vedic Literatures explains that “Narayana is residing both outside and inside of every living entity”; present in both the spiritual world and the material world and He is far away, but also near

(b) Because He is subtle, He is beyond the power of the material senses to see or to know

Material mind and senses cannot understand Him
Only possible, if senses are purified by Krishna consciousness
Ref. Bg. 11.54: “bhaktya tv….” and Brahma Samhita: “premanjana…”
That Krishna described the knowable in Text 13.16 as avijneyam, unknowable, indicates that the Supersoul cannot be understood by the material senses. Only by hearing with devotion from transcendental sources can He be understood

LINK BETWEEN TEXTS 13.18 & 13.19: Krishna ends his explanation of the ‘knowable’ by describing to

Arjuna the qualifications of one able to understand these topics.

SUMMARISED THEME 13B

CHARACTERISITICS OF THE SUPERSOUL

A) Supersoul as the object of knowledge (Jneya) – (13.14 – 13.18)

All pervading – His hands, legs, eyes, ears, heads and faces are everywhere
Original source of all senses, yet He is without senses
Unattached, although He is the maintainer of all living entities
Transcendental to the modes of material nature, although He is the master of all modes
All reconciling – Outside and inside of all living beings
Subtle and beyond the perception of material senses
Undivided – Although appears divided among all beings
Maintainer of all, also devours and develops all
Source of all knowledge and enlightenment
Situated in one’s heart

B) Supersoul as the knower of the field (Ksetra-jna) – (13.3)

Superknower – Knower of all bodies
Supreme proprietor and controller
Infallible and always superior to the spirit soul

(a) Supersoul is the source of light of sun, moon, stars

Ref. Vedic literatures: Spiritual kingdom has no need of sun or moon because the effulgence of the Lord is there
Material world – Brahmajoyti is covered by mahat-tattva and therefore we need the sun, moon etc.

(b) This establishes that the Supreme Lord is not in the material world but far far away – beyond the

darkness of the material world

Ref. Svetasvatara Upanisad 3.8 – “aditya varnam tamsah parastat”

(c) His knowledge is transcendental

Ref. Vedic literatures – “Brahman is concentrated transcendental knowledge”
To one anxious to go to spiritual world, knowledge is given by the Lord in the heart
Ref. Vedic literatures (Svetasvatara Upanisad) explains the goal of ultimate knowledge:
“Only by knowing Him – One can surpass the boundaries of birth and death”

(d) He is everyone’s heart

But He is different from the soul (There are two knowers)
He has hands and legs everywhere, but jiva’s hands and legs are localized
Ref. Svetasvatara Upanisad – Supreme Personality of Godhead is Prabhu or master of all living entities and therefore He is the shelter of all living entities
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.18 Tat, that Knowable; is the jyotih, Light; api, even; jyotisam, of the lights-of the sun etc. For the lights like the sun etc. shine because they are enkindled by the light of consciousness of the Self, as is known from Upanisadic texts like, 'Illumined by whose light the sun shines' (Tai. Br. 3.12.9.7), 'By Its light all this shines variously' (Sv. 6.14), and from the Smrti also, as here (in the Gita) itself: 'That light in the sun৷৷.' (15.12), etc. It is ucyate, spoken of as; param, beyond, untouched by; tamasah, darkness; ignorance. For cheering up anyone who may become disheartened by thinking that Knowledge etc. is difficult to attain, the Lord says: It is jnanam, Knowledge-humility etc. (verse 7, etc.); jneyam, the Knowable, which has been spoken of in, 'I shall speak of that which is to be known' (12); and jnana-gamyam, the Known. The Knowable itself is referred to as jnanagamyam, when after being known, It becomes the result of Knowledge. But when It is an object to be known, It is called jneyam. All these three which are such, visthitam, specially exist; hrdi, in the hearts, in the intellects; sarvasya, of all, of all creatures. For these three are, indeed, perceived there. This verse is begun for concluding the topic under discussion:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.18 This (self) alone is the 'light' which illuminates things like the sun, a lamp, a gem etc. It is knowledge alone in the form of the effulgence of the self which illuminates a lamp, the sun etc. But a lamp etc., dispel the darkness that intervenes between the sense of sight and its subject. Their illuminating power is limited to this extent. This is said to be beyond Tamas (darkness). The term Tamas denotes Prakrti in its subtle state. The meaning is that the self transcends Prakrti. Therefore, It is to be comprehended as knowledge, i.e., to be understood as of the form of knowledge. It is attainable by means of knowledge - such as modesty etc., already described. It is present in the heart of all, i.e., It is specially settled, or present in the heart of all beings like men etc.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.13-18 Jneyam etc. upto visthitam. Beginningless is the Supreme Brahman : by means of the attributes (descriptions) like these, [the Bhagavat] describes the Brahman as being not separate from the Supreme Consciousness (or action) expressed in every utterance and [thus] gracing [the seeker] to infer his [or Its] own nature. These attributes however have already been explained. Hence what is the use of a fruitless repetition ?
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.18 That, the Light of all lights, is said to be beyond darkness: knowledge, the knowable and the goal of knowledge, seated in the hearts of all.
Commentary

13.18 ज्योतिषाम् of lights? अपि even? तत् That? ज्योतिः Light? तमसः from darkness? परम् beyond? उच्यते is said (to be)? ज्ञानम् knowledge? ज्ञेयम् that which is to be known? ज्ञानगम्यम् attainable by knowledge? हृदि in the heart? सर्वस्य of all? विष्ठितम् seated.Commentary The Supreme Self illumines the intellect? the mind? the sun? moon? stars? fire and lightning. It is selfluminous? The sun does not shine there? nor do the moon and the stars? nor do these lightnings shine and much less this fire. When It shines? everything shines after It all these shine by Its Light. (Kathopanishad 5.15 also Svetasvataropanishad 6.14)Knowledge Such as humility. (Cf.XIII.7to11)The knowable As described in verses 12 to 7.The goal of knowledge? i.e.? capable of being understood by wisdom.These three are installed in the heart (Buddhi) of every living being. Though the light of the sun shines in all objects? yet the suns light shines more brilliantly in all bright and clean objects such as a mirror. Even so? though Brahman is present in all objects? the intellect shines with special effulgence received from Brahman. (Cf.X.20XIII.3XVIII.61)

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.18 That is the Light even of the lights; It is spoken of as beyond darkness. It is Knowledge, the Knowable, and the Known. It exists specially [A variant reading is dhisthitam.-Tr.] in the hearts of all.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.18 It is the Light of lights, beyond the reach of darkness; the Wisdom, the only thing that is worth knowing or that wisdom can teach; the Presence in the hearts of all.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 15.6 BG 10.11 BG 15.15 SB 3.9.3 SB 11.25.36 SB 8.3.6 CC Madhya 20.154 CC Madhya 21.49 CC Ādi 2.12 Kaṭha Upaniṣad 2.2.15Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 2.2.10
Concepts
Mantra
He is the source of light in luminous bodies; beyond darkness; knowledge, the object of knowledge, the goal of knowledge — situated in everyone's heart.
Practical Applications
  • Recognize Kṛṣṇa as both subject and object of knowledge.
  • Don't separate knowing-Him from being-Him.
  • Cultivate heart-awareness as the locus of His presence.
Reflection Questions
  • Where does my knowing of Him stop short of intimate heart-presence?
  • What deepens that intimacy?

On a moonless night a single lamp in a temple sanctuary lights every face, every column, every offered flower — yet the lamp itself is the source of seeing, not a thing seen by some other light. Kṛṣṇa is that lamp. He is the light by which all other lights shine, and He is what those lights, when followed, finally reveal.

Ambarīṣa's heart steady on Kṛṣṇa

King Ambarīṣa, though emperor of the earth, kept his mind fixed always on the Lord's lotus feet. The Bhāgavatam describes how he engaged each of his senses in the Lord's service — eyes on the deity, ears on hari-kathā, tongue on prasāda, hands in temple cleaning.

When Durvāsā Muni, offended, sent a fiery weapon against him, the Lord's own Sudarśana cakra rose from Ambarīṣa's heart to defend him. The verse says hṛdi sarvasya viṣṭhitam — situated in the heart of everyone. Ambarīṣa had simply taken the verse seriously.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.19

↗
ఇతి క్షేత్రం తథా జ్ఞానం జ్ఞేయం చోక్తం సమాసత: । మద్భ‍క్త ఏతద్విజ్ఞాయ మద్భ‍ావాయోపపద్యతే ॥ ౧౯ ॥
iti kṣetraṁ tathā jñānaṁ
[iti kshetram tathaa jnaanam]
jñeyaṁ coktaṁ samāsataḥ
[jneyam choktam samaasatah]
mad-bhakta etad vijñāya
[mad-bhakta etad vijnaaya]
mad-bhāvāyopapadyate
[mad-bhaavaayopapadyate]
iti — thus kṣetram — the field of activities (the body) tathā — also jñānam — knowledge jñeyam — the knowable ca — also uktam — described samāsataḥ — in summary mat - bhaktaḥ — My devotee etat — all this vijñāya — after understanding mat - bhāvāya — to My nature upapadyate — attains .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
iti kṣetraṁ tathā jñānaṁ
iti
thus
kṣetram
the field of activities (the body)
tathā
also
jñānam
knowledge
jñeyaṁ coktaṁ samāsataḥ
jñeyam
the knowable
ca
also
uktam
described
samāsataḥ
in summary
mad-bhakta etad vijñāya
mat - bhaktaḥ
My devotee
etat
all this
vijñāya
after understanding
mad-bhāvāyopapadyate
mat - bhāvāya
to My nature
upapadyate
attains .
  • mat - bhaktaḥ — My devotee
    The qualifying word of the verse. Not the scholar, not the yogī, not the philosopher — the *devotee* understands. The chapter that opened with the analytical field/knower distinction closes by requiring bhakti to grasp it.
  • vijñāya — after understanding
    Gerund from vi- + √jñā — "having understood thoroughly." Not surface-knowing but full grasping. And the prerequisite is mat-bhaktaḥ — devotion comes first, understanding follows.
  • mat - bhāvāya — to My nature
    Dative case — the goal toward which the understanding moves. The devotee does not just *learn about* the Lord's nature; he *attains* it. The chapter's reward is participation, not just cognition.
  • upapadyate — attains
    Upa- + √pad — "to come close to, to attain." The verb of arrival. The whole chapter, all twenty qualities, all the philosophy, converges on this single verb in this single verse.
  • samāsataḥ — in summary
    Kṛṣṇa marks the closure of the first arc of the chapter. What follows from verse 20 onward will re-open the analysis with the prakṛti/puruṣa frame. This is a paragraph break in oral form.
Thus the field of activities [the body], knowledge and the knowable have been summarily described by Me. Only My devotees can understand this thoroughly and thus attain to My nature.

The Lord has described in summary the body, knowledge and the knowable. This knowledge is of three things: the knower, the knowable and the process of knowing. Combined, these are called vijñāna, or the science of knowledge. Perfect knowledge can be understood by the unalloyed devotees of the Lord directly. Others are unable to understand. The monists say that at the ultimate stage these three items become one, but the devotees do not accept this. Knowledge and development of knowledge mean understanding oneself in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. We are being led by material consciousness, but as soon as we transfer all consciousness to Kṛṣṇa’s activities and realize that Kṛṣṇa is everything, then we attain real knowledge. In other words, knowledge is nothing but the preliminary stage of understanding devotional service perfectly. In the Fifteenth Chapter this will be very clearly explained. Now, to summarize, one may understand that verses 6 and 7, beginning from mahā-bhūtāni and continuing through cetanā dhṛtiḥ, analyze the material elements and certain manifestations of the symptoms of life. These combine to form the body, or the field of activities. And verses 8 through 12, from amānitvam through tattva-jñānārtha-darśanam, describe the process of knowledge for understanding both types of knower of the field of activities, namely the soul and the Supersoul. Then verses 13 through 18, beginning from anādi mat-param and continuing through hṛdi sarvasya viṣṭhitam, describe the soul and the Supreme Lord, or the Supersoul. Thus three items have been described: the field of activity (the body), the process of understanding, and both the soul and the Supersoul. It is especially described here that only the unalloyed devotees of the Lord can understand these three items clearly. So for these devotees Bhagavad-gītā is fully useful; it is they who can attain the supreme goal, the nature of the Supreme Lord, Kṛṣṇa. In other words, only devotees, and not others, can understand Bhagavad-gītā and derive the desired result.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
19. Thus I have described concisely the field, the process of knowing, and the object of knowledge. My devotee, understanding this, attains prema.
Commentary

In this verse the Lord summarizes the topic about the field and other items previously described, along with the result for those who practice. The field consists of the items starting with the five gross elements and ending with dhṛti or perseverance in verses 5 and 6. Knowledge was described starting with pridelessness (amānitvam) and ending with reviewing the goal of liberation (tattva-jṣānārtha-darśanam) in verses 7 through 11. The object of knowledge to be attained by the process of knowledge was described in verses 12 through 18, starting with the word anādi and ending with the word dhiṣṭhitam. The one truth known as Brahman, meaning Bhagavān and Paramātmā, has thus been briefly described. The jṣānī endowed with some devotion (mad-bhaktaḥ), knowing this, merges with Me (mad bhāvāya). An alternate meaning of the sentence is “My ekanta-bhakta, understanding that I, his master, have such powers (etad vijṣāya), becomes endowed with prema (mad-bhāvāya) for Me.”

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
19. Thus I have described concisely the field, the process of knowing, and the object of knowledge. My devotee, understanding this, becomes qualified for prema.
Commentary

Here the Lord concludes the topic of the field and knower of the field, mentioning as well the results of attaining this knowledge. The Lord described the svarūpa of field starting with mahā-bhūtāni and ending with cetanā dhṛtir. He described the process for gaining knowledge of the two knowers of the field, starting with amānitvam and ending with tattva-jṣānārtha-darśanam. He described the two knowers of the field staring with anādi mat-param and ending with hṛdi sarvasya viṣṭhitam. Knowing these three topics, understanding them by discrimination, My devotee becomes qualified for prema to Me (mad bhāvāya). Or he becomes qualified for My nature (svabhāvāya), for being free from material existence.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

If one is not a devotee he will be confused by this and will misunderstand.

[E. KRSNA ANSWERS QUESTIONS 1 AND 2: PRAKRTI, PURUSA AND THEIR UNION (13. 20‑26) 1. Prakrti, purusa (the 'jiva' ksetrajna), and their union: Material nature causes all material changes and effects, and the living entity meets with good and bad according to the qualities that he has acquired due to his association with material nature. (20‑22) ]

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Science of Kshetra, Kshetra-jna, Jnana and Jneyam is most fully understood only by devotees (mad-

bhakta)

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.19 Iti, thus; uktam, has been spoken-commencing from 'I shall speak of that which is to be known' (12) and ending with 'It is spoken of as beyond darkness' (17); samasatah, in brief; the ksetram, field -beginning with the 'great elements' and ending with 'for titude' (5,6); tatha, as also; jnanam, Knowledge-beginning from 'humility' (7) and ending with 'contemplation on the Goal of the knowledge of Reality' (11); and the jneyam, Knowable. All this has been stated by way of summarizing the purport of the Vedas and the Gita. Who is fit for this true knowledge? The answer is: madbhaktah, My devotee, who attributes the fact of being the Self of all to Me who am God, Vasudeva, the Omniscient, the supreme Teacher, (and) whose conviction has been saturated with the idea that whatever he sees, hears or touches, all that verily is Lord Vasudeva. Vijnaya, by understanding; etat, this, the aforesaid true knowledge; he upa-padyate, becomes alified; mad-bhavaya, for My State (bhava) -the State of being the supreme Self; for that State of Mine. He attains Liberation. There in the Seventh Chapter have been presented the two aspects [Cf. 15.16-18.] of God, viz the higher and the lower, characterized as the field and the Knower of the field. And it has also been said, '(Understand thus) that all things have these as their source' (7.6). The explanation as to how creatures have the two aspects, the field and the Knower of the field, as their source is now being stated:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.19 This is a brief description of the principle of Ksetra - i.e., the text beginning with 'The great elements, the Ahankara' (13.5) and ending with 'An association' (13.6). 'Knowledge' which is the means for attaining the comprehension of the principle known as the self has been taught in the text beginning with 'Modesty' (13.7) and ending with 'Reflection for attainment of knowledge of truth' (13.11). The nature of Ksetrajna (the self) which is the object of knowledge has also been concisely taught by the text beginning with 'The beginningless brahman having Me for the Highest' (13.12) and ending with 'present in the heart of all' (13.17). My devotee, on knowing this, i.e., the truth about the Ksetra, the truth about the means for attaining the nature of the self as distinct from the Ksetra, and the truth about the Ksetrajna, becomes worthy to attain My state of being. What is called My state of being is My own nature (Svabhava), namely, the transcendence of transmigratory existence. The meaning is that he becomes worthy to attain the state of freedom for transmigratory existence. Next (1) the beginninglessness of the conjunction between the Prakrti and the self which are completely distinct, (2) the difference in the workings of these two when they are associated with each other, and (3) the cause of this conjunction - these are treated:
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.19 Etat etc. He, who understands this traid of the Field, the knowledge and what is to be known-he alone is a devotee of Mine; and he atains My state. After making this definition, the same is now examined as -
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.19 Thus the field, as well as knowledge and the knowable have been briefly stated. My devotee, knowing this, enters into My Being.
Commentary

13.19 इति thus? क्षेत्रम् the field? तथा as well as? ज्ञानम् knowledge? ज्ञेयम् the knowable? च and? उक्तम् have been stated? समासतः briefly? मद्भक्तः My devotee? एतत् this? विज्ञाय knowing? मद्भावाय to My being? उपपद्यते enters.Commentary He whohas controlled his mind and organs? who has the knowledge of the field and the knowable? and who fixes his mind on Me becomes one with Me.Thus the field described above (beginning with the great elements and ending with firmness? verses 5 and 6)? knowledge described above (beginning with humility and ending with perception of the end of true knowledge in verses 7 to 11) and the knowable described in verses 12 to 17 -- these have briefly been stated.He who has singleminded devotion unto Me? who takes Me (Vaasudeva? the Supreme Lord? the omniscient? and the supreme Guru) as the Self of everything? he who thinks and feels that all that he sees? hears and touches is nothing but the Lord and he who has the right knowledge described above enters into My Being or attains release from birth and death.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.19 Thus has been spoken of in brief the field as also Knowledge and the Knowable. By understanding this My devotee becomes alified for My state.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.19 Thus I have told thee in brief what Matter is, and the Self worth realising and what is Wisdom. He who is devoted to Me knows; and assuredly he will enter into Me.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Ahimsa (Non-violence / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Maitri (Friendship / Goodwill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
Thus the field, knowledge, and the object of knowledge are summarized — only My devotee can understand this and attain My nature.
Practical Applications
  • Recognize devotion as the qualifying lens for understanding.
  • Don't expect the philosophy to land without bhakti.
  • Approach the chapter as a devotee, not as a scholar alone.
Reflection Questions
  • Where has my reading been scholarly without devotion?
  • What does devotional reading reveal?

A locked chest can be described in detail to anyone — its wood, its hinges, its weight — but only the one with the key opens it. Kṛṣṇa has now described the field, the knowledge, and the knowable in summary; bhakti is the key. Without it the description remains a description; with it the chest opens.

📝 My note

Section 4 (13.20–13.26)
KRISHNA EXPLAINS PRAKRTI, PURUSA AND THEIR UNION
Section overview

(Krishna addresses the 1st and 2nd questions)

Prakrti, Purusa (the “jiva” or ksetra-jna) and their union (13.20-13.22):
Material nature causes all material changes and effects, and
Living entity meets with good and bad according to the qualities he has acquired due to his association with material nature
Paramatma Purusa (ksetra-jna) (13.23): The Supersoul exists within all bodies as the overseer, the permitter, and the supreme proprietor.
Result: One who understands the prakrti, purusa and their interactions attains liberation from birth in material world
Other methods of obtaining liberation are jnana, astanga and karma (13.25 – 13.26)

Bhagavad-gītā 13.20

↗
ప్రకృతిం పురుషం చైవ విద్ధ్యనాదీ ఉభావపి । వికారాంశ్చ గుణాంశ్చైవ విద్ధి ప్రకృతిసమ్భవాన్ ॥ ౨౦ ॥
prakṛtiṁ puruṣaṁ caiva
[prakritim purusham chaiva]
viddhy anādī ubhāv api
[viddhy anaadee ubhaav api]
vikārāṁś ca guṇāṁś caiva
[vikaaraamsh cha gunaamsh chaiva]
viddhi prakṛti-sambhavān
[viddhi prakriti-sambhavaan]
prakṛtim — material nature puruṣam — the living entities ca — also eva — certainly viddhi — you must know anādī — without beginning ubhau — both api — also vikārān — transformations ca — also guṇān — the three modes of nature ca — also eva — certainly viddhi — know prakṛti — material nature sambhavān — produced of .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
prakṛtiṁ puruṣaṁ caiva
prakṛtim
material nature
puruṣam
the living entities
ca
also
eva
certainly
viddhy anādī ubhāv api
viddhi
you must know
anādī
without beginning
ubhau
both
api
also
vikārāṁś ca guṇāṁś caiva
vikārān
transformations
ca
also
guṇān
the three modes of nature
ca
also
eva
certainly
viddhi prakṛti-sambhavān
viddhi
know
prakṛti
material nature
sambhavān
produced of .
  • prakṛtim — material nature
    Returned to from verse 1. Now defined: anādi — beginningless. Prakṛti is not a created thing; it is co-eternal with the Lord, as His energy.
  • puruṣam — the living entities
    Here puruṣa refers to the jīva — the individual soul. (Context matters: elsewhere puruṣa names the Supreme.) The jīvas too are beginningless, never created, never destroyed.
  • anādī — without beginning
    Dual form — both are beginningless. This word closes off every theology that wants to date the soul's creation. The soul has no birthday.
  • vikārān — transformations
    From vi- + √kṛ — "alterations." The visible changes of the world — body, mind, emotion — are products of prakṛti, not of the soul. Soul does not transform; field transforms.
  • guṇān — the three modes of nature
    Sattva, rajas, tamas. The threads of which prakṛti's fabric is woven. They are *prakṛti-sambhavān* — born of prakṛti. The soul is the witness of their interplay, not their substrate.
Material nature and the living entities should be understood to be beginningless. Their transformations and the modes of matter are products of material nature.

By the knowledge given in this chapter, one can understand the body (the field of activities) and the knowers of the body (both the individual soul and the Supersoul). The body is the field of activity and is composed of material nature. The individual soul that is embodied and enjoying the activities of the body is the puruṣa, or the living entity. He is one knower, and the other is the Supersoul. Of course, it is to be understood that both the Supersoul and the individual entity are different manifestations of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The living entity is in the category of His energy, and the Supersoul is in the category of His personal expansion. Both material nature and the living entity are eternal. That is to say that they existed before the creation. The material manifestation is from the energy of the Supreme Lord, and so also are the living entities, but the living entities are of the superior energy. Both the living entities and material nature existed before this cosmos was manifested. Material nature was absorbed in the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Mahā-viṣṇu, and when it was required, it was manifested by the agency of the mahat-tattva. Similarly, the living entities are also in Him, and because they are conditioned, they are averse to serving the Supreme Lord. Thus they are not allowed to enter into the spiritual sky. But with the coming forth of material nature these living entities are again given a chance to act in the material world and prepare themselves to enter into the spiritual world. That is the mystery of this material creation. Actually the living entity is originally the spiritual part and parcel of the Supreme Lord, but due to his rebellious nature, he is conditioned within material nature. It really does not matter how these living entities or superior entities of the Supreme Lord have come in contact with material nature. The Supreme Personality of Godhead knows, however, how and why this actually took place. In the scriptures the Lord says that those attracted by this material nature are undergoing a hard struggle for existence. But we should know it with certainty from the descriptions of these few verses that all transformations and influences of material nature by the three modes are also productions of material nature. All transformations and variety in respect to living entities are due to the body. As far as spirit is concerned, living entities are all the same.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
20. Know that both prakṛti and the jīva are without origin. And know that the guṇas and its transformations all arise from prakṛti.
Commentary

“You have described the Paramātmā as the knower of the field. But speaking of the jīva who is also the knower of the field, how does the jīva come in contact with māyā and when did it start?”

Know that māyā (prakṛti), and the jīva (puruṣa) are both without an origin (anādi), having no first cause. This is because they are śaktis of Me, the Lord who is also without origin (anādi). In verses 4 and 5 of chapter 7 it was said: bhūmir āpo ’nalo vāyuḥ khaṁ mano buddhir eva ca ahaṅkāra itīyaṁ me bhinnā prakṛtir aṣṭadhā apareyam itas tv anyāṁ prakṛtiṁ viddhi me parām jīva-bhūtāṁ mahābāho yayedaṁ dhāryate jagat From this it is understood that, because matter and jīva are both without origin, being My śaktis, their connection is also without origin (anādi). But there is a real difference between them, even though they are mutually connected. Know that the body, senses and other elements (guṇān) and the transformations of the guṇas such as happiness, distress, lamentation and illusion (vikārān), all arise from prakṛti. Know that the jīva is very different from that prakṛti which has transformed into the field.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
20. Know that both prakṛti and the jīva are without origin. And know that the body, senses, happiness and distress all arise from prakṛti, not the jīva.
Commentary

The association of the jīva and prakṛti, both of which are without beginning but which have differing natures, has no beginning in time. Now differing functions of prakṛti and the jīva in combination, and the cause of their beginningless association will be described. The word api indicates emphasis or certainty. Know for certain (api) that the prakṛti and jīva which are combined together are both without beginning. Know that they are eternal because of being My śaktis. I have already explained that they are My energies, in verses like bhūmir āpo’ nalo vayuḥ. The Lord then shows that the very nature of these two which have been associating without beginning are very different. Know that the body and senses (vikārān) and happiness and distress (guṇān) arise from prakṛti, not from the jīva. The Lord indicates that jīva is different from the transformations of prakṛti as the field.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

Here the main point to understand is that the transformations (vikaran) are not of the living entities but it is of the material nature.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

All good and bad events occur in matter

Material nature and living entities are beginningless. (Their union is described as anadi, beginningless)
Their “transformations” and “modes of matter” are products of material nature

PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF SECTION IV

Conditioned souls desire to control and enjoy matter binds him to material nature
Supersoul is the factual enjoyer and controller
Understanding this will lead the conditioned living entity towards liberation
Focus of Learning

(a) Vijnana – Knower, knowable and process of knowing is called “Science of knowledge” or vijnana

(b) Opinion of monists – At ultimate stage the above mentioned three items become one

But the devotees do not agree to this

(c) Knowledge means understanding oneself in Krishna consciousness and realizing Krishna in

everything

Knowledge is nothing but preliminary stage of understanding devotional service perfectly

(d) Conclusion – Texts 13.13 – 13.18 explain the “Soul and Supersoul as the knowable”

Supersoul is the ultimate object to be known

SUMMARISED THEME 13B continued…

CHARACTERISITICS OF THE SUPERSOUL

C) Supersoul as the ‘Purusha’ (Supreme enjoyer) – (13.23)

Transcendental enjoyer
Overseer and permitter
Maintainer and real friend

LINK BETWEEN TEXTS 13.20 & 13.21: The relationship between the living entity and the changes caused

by material nature is elaborated upon in the next verse.

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.20 Viddhi, know; ubhau, both; prakrtim Nature; and also the purusam, individual soul;-these two; Nature and the soul. the aspects of God-to be api, verily; anadi, without beginning. Those two that have no beginning (adi), are anadi. Since the godhood of God is eternal, therefore it is logical that even His aspects also should have eternality. For God's god-hood consists verily in having the two aspects. Those two aspects through which God becomes the cause of creation, continuance and dissolution of the Universe, and which are beginningless, are the sources of mundane existence. Some interpret the phrase anadi in the tatpurusa [Tatpurusa: Name of a class of compounds in which the first member determines the sense of the other members, or in which the last member is defined or alified by the first, without losing its original independence.-V.S.A.] sense of na adi, not primeval (not cause). (According to them) thery indeed is established the causality of God. Again, if Nature and soul themselves be eternal, the mundane existence would surely be their creation, and the causality of the mundane existence would not be God's. That is wrong because, there being nothing to rule over before the emergence of Nature and soul, there will arise the contingency of God ceasing to be God! And if the mundane state be uncaused [Uncaused, i.e. not caused by Nature and soul, but by God independently of those two aspects.] there arises the contingency of the absence of Liberation, [If God were. Himself the sole cause of mundane existence, independently of His two aspects, then it would be endless because there would be nothing to prevent liberated souls from being put under bondage again.] the scriptures becoming useless, and the absence of bondage and freedom. On the other hand, all these become justifiable if God and the two aspects be eternal. How? Viddhi, know; the vikaran, modifications that will be spoken of-the intellect etc., the body and the organs; ca eva, as also; gunan, the alities (sattva etc.)-manifest in the form of the mental states of happiness, sorrow and attachment; as prakriti-sambhavan, born of Nature. Nature, Maya, is the power of God, which is the cause of the modifications and which consists of the three alities. Those modifications and alities, which have that Nature as their source,-know those modifications and alities as 'born of Nature', as transformations of Nature. Which again, are those modifications and alities born of Nature?
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.20 Know this Prakrti and Purusa (self) are uncreated and are beginningless. Know that the modifications, desire, hatred etc., which cause bondage, and the alities of modesty etc., which cause release, originate from Prakrti. The Prakrti, having no beginning, develops into the form of the body, and conjoint with the self, causes bondage through its own transformations such as desire and hatred. The same Prakrti, through its transformations like modesty etc., causes release. Such is the meaning. The difference in the functions of Prakrti and Purusa in combination is stated -
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.20 See Comment under 13.23
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.20 Know thou that Nature (matter) and the Spirit are both beginningless; and know also that all modifications and alities are born of Nature.
Commentary

13.20 प्रकृतिम् matter? पुरुषम् spirit? च and? एव even? विद्धि know? अनादी beginningless? उभौ both? अपि also? विकारान् modifications? च and? गुणान् alities? च and? एव even? विद्धि know? प्रकृतिसंभवान् born of Prakriti.Commentary Steps are necessary to reach the top floor of a building. Even so? steps are necessary to reach the summit of the knowledge of the Self. That is the reason why Lord Krishna took Arjuna to the summit of knowledge step by step. He first taught Arjuna the nature of the field? then knowledge? ignorance or nonwisdom? and ultimately the knowable. When a child is to be fed,the intelligent mother divides the food into small portions and feeds the child little by little. Even so Lord Krishna fed His spiritual child Arjuna with the spiritual food little by little.Lord Krishna says O Arjuna I will give you the same teaching in another form by the description of the Spirit and Nature.Till now the Lord expounded the knowledge of the field and the Self in accordance with the philosophy of the Upanishads. Now He explains the same knowledge in accordance with the Sankhya philosophy? but without accepting its dual nature in the form of discrimination between the Spirit and Nature.Vikaras Modifications from the MahatTattva or intellect down to the physical body the twentyfour principles of the Sankhyas. The Self within is changeless. All changes take place in Nature. Mulaprakriti (the Primordial Nature? the Unmanifested) becomes modified into Mahat? egoism? mind? the great elements and other minor modifications.Just as coolness and ice? the day and the night? are inseparable? so also matter and Spirit are inseparable. The three alities Sattva? Rajas and Tamas are born of Nature (matter). All actions proceed from the mind? the lifeforce? the senses and the physical body.According to the Sankhya philosophy? Prakriti and Purusha are not only eternal and beginningless but also independent of each other and selfcreated. According to Vedanta philosophy? Prakriti or Maya originates from Brahman and is? therefore? neither selfcreated nor independent. Isvara has Maya under His perfect control. Maya is His causal body. Maya is His illusory power.Matter and Spirit are the Natures of Isvara. Know that these two are beginningless. That which has no beginning is Anadi. As Isvara is eternal? His two Natures also should be eternal. (This is according to the Sankhyas.)Isvara possesses these two Natures (superior and inferior) by which He causes the creation? preservation and destruction of the universe. Therefore He has the Lordship and rules over the universe. The two Natures have no beginning. Therefore they are the cause of Samsara.The inferior Nature (Apara Prakriti) which consists of the eightfold division of Nature referred to in chapter VII? verse 4? is the Prakriti of chapter XIII? verse 19. The superior Nature (Para Prakriti) referred to in chapter VII? verse 5? is the Purusha of chapter XIII? verse 19. Purusha here means Jiva (the individual soul).Even a child smiles and experiences exhilaration? grief? fear? anger? pleasure and pain. Who taught it The impressions of the virtuous and vicious actions of this birth cannot be the cause of these. The impressions of the previous birth alone are the cause of all these. They (the impressions) must have a support. From this we can clearly infer the existence of the individual soul in the previous birth and that the individual soul is beginningless. If you do not accept that the individual soul is beginningless? the two defects of Kritanasa (nonfruition of actions performed) and Akritabhyagama (causeless effect) will creep in. Pleasure and pain which are the fruits of virtuous and vicious actions done previously will pass away without being experienced. This is the defect of Kritanasa. So also? one will have to enjoy pleasure and pain? the fruits of good and bad actions which were not done by him previously. This is the defect of Akritabhyagama. In order to get rid of these two defects we will have to accept that the individual soul is beginningless. The scriptures,also emphatically declare that the soul is beginningless.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.20 Know both Nature and also the individual soul [Prakrti is sometimes translated as matter, and purusa as spirit.-Tr.] to be verily without beginning; know the modifications as also the alities as born of Nature.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.20 Know thou further that Nature and God have no beginning; and that differences of character and quality have their origin in Nature only.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 2.12 BG 7.5 BG 14.5 SB 3.26.10 SB 11.24.3 SB 3.7.9 CC Madhya 20.108 CC Madhya 24.139 CC Ādi 7.117 Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.9Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 4.5
Concepts
BhavaMaya
Material nature and the living entity should both be understood as beginningless; the modifications and modes spring from material nature.
Practical Applications
  • Honor the eternity of both nature and soul.
  • Don't expect either to be 'created at some point.'
  • Use this beginninglessness as a stable backdrop.
Reflection Questions
  • Where do I assume created-at-a-point cosmology?
  • How does beginninglessness change perception?

Two parallel rivers, neither traceable to a source, neither younger than the other — flowing side by side through eternity. Prakṛti and puruṣa are such rivers. Asking when either began is to ask when time itself began. The mind that demands a starting point is the mind that has not yet grasped the meaning of "beginningless."

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.21

↗
కార్యకారణకర్తృత్వే హేతు: ప్రకృతిరుచ్యతే । పురుష: సుఖదు:ఖానాం భోక్తృత్వే హేతురుచ్యతే ॥ ౨౧ ॥
kārya-kāraṇa-kartṛtve
[kaarya-kaarana-kartritve]
hetuḥ prakṛtir ucyate
[hetuh prakritir uchyate]
puruṣaḥ sukha-duḥkhānāṁ
[purushah sukha-duhkhaanaam]
bhoktṛtve hetur ucyate
[bhoktritve hetur uchyate]
kārya — of effect kāraṇa — and cause kartṛtve — in the matter of creation hetuḥ — the instrument prakṛtiḥ — material nature ucyate — is said to be puruṣaḥ — the living entity sukha — of happiness duḥkhānām — and distress bhoktṛtve — in enjoyment hetuḥ — the instrument ucyate — is said to be .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
kārya-kāraṇa-kartṛtve
kārya
of effect
kāraṇa
and cause
kartṛtve
in the matter of creation
hetuḥ prakṛtir ucyate
hetuḥ
the instrument
prakṛtiḥ
material nature
ucyate
is said to be
puruṣaḥ sukha-duḥkhānāṁ
puruṣaḥ
the living entity
sukha
of happiness
duḥkhānām
and distress
bhoktṛtve hetur ucyate
bhoktṛtve
in enjoyment
hetuḥ
the instrument
ucyate
is said to be .
  • kārya — of effect
    Sanskrit compound. Prakṛti is the cause of *both* effect and cause-in-the-empirical-sense — the whole productive machinery of the body. Note: prakṛti, not the soul, drives the body's mechanics.
  • kāraṇa — and cause
    Paired with kārya. Together they cover the entire causal chain in the body. The soul is exempted from authorship of any of it.
  • kartṛtve — in the matter of creation
    Locative — "in the matter of being a doer." Doership belongs to prakṛti. This single word will be picked up again in verse 29's akartāram.
  • bhoktṛtve — in enjoyment
    And enjoyment belongs to puruṣa. The soul does not act; the soul tastes. Doership and enjoyership are split between the two categories — this is the verse's whole argument.
  • sukha — of happiness
    Paired with duḥkha. The soul's experience reduces to a binary — pleasant/unpleasant — which it registers but does not generate. Sukha and duḥkha are reactions to prakṛti's activity.
Nature is said to be the cause of all material causes and effects, whereas the living entity is the cause of the various sufferings and enjoyments in this world.

The different manifestations of body and senses among the living entities are due to material nature. There are 8,400,000 different species of life, and these varieties are creations of the material nature. They arise from the different sensual pleasures of the living entity, who thus desires to live in this body or that. When he is put into different bodies, he enjoys different kinds of happiness and distress. His material happiness and distress are due to his body, and not to himself as he is. In his original state there is no doubt of enjoyment; therefore that is his real state. Because of the desire to lord it over material nature, he is in the material world. In the spiritual world there is no such thing. The spiritual world is pure, but in the material world everyone is struggling hard to acquire different kinds of pleasures for the body. It might be more clear to state that this body is the effect of the senses. The senses are instruments for gratifying desire. Now, the sum total – body and instrument senses – is offered by material nature, and as will be clear in the next verse, the living entity is blessed or damned with circumstances according to his past desire and activity. According to one’s desires and activities, material nature places one in various residential quarters. The being himself is the cause of his attaining such residential quarters and his attendant enjoyment or suffering. Once placed in some particular kind of body, he comes under the control of nature because the body, being matter, acts according to the laws of nature. At that time, the living entity has no power to change that law. Suppose an entity is put into the body of a dog. As soon as he is put into the body of a dog, he must act like a dog. He cannot act otherwise. And if the living entity is put into the body of a hog, then he is forced to eat stool and act like a hog. Similarly, if the living entity is put into the body of a demigod, he must act according to his body. This is the law of nature. But in all circumstances, the Supersoul is with the individual soul. That is explained in the Vedas ( Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 3.1.1) as follows: dvā suparṇā sayujā sakhāyaḥ. The Supreme Lord is so kind upon the living entity that He always accompanies the individual soul and in all circumstances is present as the Supersoul, or Paramātmā.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
21. Prakṛti is said to be the cause of the connection, because of supplying the body, senses and sense devatās. The jīva is said to be the cause of the connection, being the enjoyer of happiness and distress.
Commentary

In this verse the Lord shows the jīva’s connection with prakṛti. Prakṛti is the cause of the jīva’s unfortunate condition by offering the body (kārya), the senses which produce happiness and distress (kāraṇa) and the presiding deities of the senses (kartṛ). Prakṛti, by association with the jīva, transforms into the form of body, senses and sense devatās, and, by its function of ignorance, it becomes the bestower of the jīva’s misidentification. The jīva (puruṣa), having the position as the enjoyer of the happiness and distress produced by prakṛti, is also the cause of the connection. The meaning is this. Even though the body, the senses, the sense devatās and the jīva’s capacity for enjoyment (bhoktṛtva) are all qualities of prakṛti, because of the predominance of unconsciousness in the body, senses and sense devatās, and the predominance of consciousness in experiencing happiness and distress (bhoktṛ), the two get separately designated as causes according to predominance. According to this reasoning, it is said that prakṛti is the cause, by producing the body, sense and sense devatās, and jīva is the cause by his capacity to experience happiness and distress.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
21. Prakṛti is said to be the cause, instrumental in producing the body and senses. The jīva is said to be the cause, being the enjoyer of happiness and distress.
Commentary

This verse speaks of their differing functions. Kārya means body. Since the senses are necessary in order to achieve action and knowledge, they are called kāraṇa. Prakṛti is a cause, in that it transforms itself (kartṛtve) into the forms of the senses and body. In the next verse the Lord will say that the jīva is situated in prakṛti (puruṣaḥ prakṛti stho hi). Jīva exploits that prakṛti which appear conscious by its association with the jīva. Thus that prakṛti, ruled by jīva, is the creator of bodies and senses by transforming itself according to the jīva’s karmas. The jīva is the cause in the sense of being the enjoyer of happiness and distress which are offered by prakṛti. He is the agent in enjoying them. The functions of the jīva are to preside over prakṛti and experience happiness and distress. Since prakṛti is the agent in regards to production of the body and senses, but is itself exploited by the jīva, the jīva is the main cause or doer. The author of Vedānta says kartā śāstrārthavattvāt:: the soul is the agent, not prakṛti, since that is the meaning of the scriptures. (Vedānta Sūtra 2.3.31) It will also be stated later that the Lord as the doer must be accepted in all cases, as was stated earlier (the Lord is the creator, maintainer and destroyer).

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

This is addressing the question about "who is the doer?" The living entity is the one who is causing all these troubles through his illicit desires. And he is also causing his enjoyments. But actually is the material nature, the prak working under the control of the three modes of material nature who is enacting everything. The living entity is desiring and getting karma, and in that sense he is the doer. Then the modes of material nature cause the transformations in the field, which cause the suffering and enjoyment of the living entities identified with matter. All this is done under the sanction of the real purusa, the Supersoul. (DS) Verse 20 describes the material nature as the cause of the different transformations. In verse 21, the living entity is said to be the cause of his sufferings and enjoyments. And in the next verse, explains how the living entity becomes associated with matter and thus enjoys or suffers.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study Key verse
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Happiness and distress are due to purusa’s identifying with prakriti

Nature is the cause of all material causes and effects
Living entities is the cause of various sufferings and enjoyments in this world
Because of illusory oneness with matter, his desires and actions cause him to suffer and enjoy

Focus of Learning

(a) Chapter 13 tells us about the body and differences between the two knowers of the body

Body is the field and the embodied individual soul is enjoying the activities of the body and therefore called Purusha – living entity is in the category of Lord’s energy
Supersoul is another knower of the body; in the category of the Lord’s personal expansion

(b) Mystery of material creation

Similarity – Both living entity and material nature are eternal
Material nature is eternal, although specific manifestations of matter are temporary
Living entity is eternal because of being Lord’s superior energy
Difference between material nature and living entity
Material nature has constant transformation, but nature of living entity is Non-changing
Material nature is absorbed in the Supreme Personality of Godhead, ‘Maha-Vishnu’ and whenever required, it is manifested through the mahat-tattva
The Living entity also gets absorbed in ‘Maha-Vishnu’ and with the coming of the material nature they are given a chance to prepare to go back to Godhead

(c) Why the eternal living entity falls down to material world

Due to rebellious nature
It really does not matter how we came in contact with matter
The Supreme Lord knows “how and why” this took place

(d) What does the Lord focus on in the scriptures

The living entity attracted by the material nature is undergoing a hard struggle for material existence
Know for certain that all “transformations” and “influences of material nature by the three modes” are productions of material nature
As far as spirit soul is concerned living entities are all the same and all transformations and varieties are due to the body
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.21 Karya-karana-kartrtve, with regard to the source of body and organs: Karya is the body, and karana are the thirteen [Five sense organs, five motor organs, mind, intellect and ego.] organs existing in it. Here, by the word karya are understood the aforesaid elements that produce the body as also the objects which are modifications born of Nature. And since the alities-which are born of Nature and manifest themselves as happiness, sorrow and delusion-are dependent on the organs, (therefore) they are implied by the word karana, organs. The kartrtvam, (lit) agentship, with regard to these body and organs consists in being the source of the body and organs. With regard to this source of the body and organs, prakrtih, Nature; ucyate, is said to be; the hetuh, cause, in the sense of being the originator. Thus, by virtue of being the source of body and organs, Nature is the cause of mundane existence. Even if the reading be karya-karana-kartrtva, karya (effect, modification) will mean anything that is the transformation of something; and karana (cause) will be that which becomes transformed. So the meaning of the compund will be: 'with regard to the source of the effect and the cause'. Or, karya means the sixteen [The eleven organs (five sensory, five motor, and mind) and the five objects (sound etc.).] modificaitons, and karana means the seven [Mahat, egoism, and the five subtle elements.] transformations of Nature. They themselves are called effect and cuase. So far as the agentship with regard to these is concerned Nature is said to be the cause, because of the same reason of being their originator. As to how the soul can be the cause of mundane existence is being stated: Purusah, the soul, the empirical being, the knower of the field-all these are synonymous; is the hetuh, cause; bhoktrtve, so far as enjoyership, the fact of being the perceiver; sukha-duhkhanam, of happiness and sorrow-which are objects of experience, is concerned. How, again, is it asserted with respect to Nature and soul that, they are the causes of mundane existence by virtue of this fact of their (respectively) being the source of body and organs, and the perceiver of happiness and sorrow? As to this the answer is being stated: How can there be any mundane existence if there be no modification of Nature in the form of body and organs, happiness and sorrow, and cause and effect, and there be no soul, the conscious being, to experience them? On the other hand, there can be mundane existence when there is a contact, in the form of ignorance, between Nature-modified in the form of body and organs, and cause and effect as an object of experience and the soul opposed to it as the experiencer. Therefore it was reasonable to have said that, Nature and soul become the cause of mundane existence by (respectively) becoming the originators of the body and organs, and the perceiver of happiness and sorrow. What again is this that is called worldly existence? Worldly existence consists in the experience of happiness and sorrow; and the state of mundane existence of the soul consists in its being the experiencer of happiness and sorrow. It has been asserted that the state of mundane existence of the soul consists in its being the experiencer of happiness and sorrow. How does it come about? This is being answered:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.21 The 'Karya' means the body, the 'Karanas' mean the instruments, i.e., the senses of perception and action plus the Manas. In their operations, the Prakrti, subservient to the self, is alone the causal factor. The sense is that their operations, which are the means of experience, have their foundation in the Prakrti, which has developed in the form of the body subservient to the self. In regard to this, the authority is the aphorism, 'The self is an agent, on account of the scriptures having the purpose' (B. S., 2.3.33) etc. The agency of the self means that the self is the cause of the will (effort) to support the body. The self (Purusa) associated with the body is the cause for experiencing pleasures and pains. The meaning is that It is the seat of those experiences. Thus, has been explained the difference in the operations of the Prakrti and of the self when they are mutually conjoined. He now proceeds to explain how, though the self, which in Its pristine nature experiences Itself by Itself as nothing but joy, becomes the cause of experiencing both pleasure and pain derived from sense objects when It is conjoined with a body. The term Guna figuratively represents effects. The self (in Its pristine nature) experiences Itself by Itself, as nothing buy joy. But when dwelling in the body, i.e., when It is in conjunction with the Prakrti, It experiences the alities born of Prakrti, namely, happiness, pain etc., which are the effects of Gunas like Sattva etc. He explains the cause of conjunction with the Prakrti:
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.21 See Comment under 13.23
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.21 In the production of the effect and the cause, Nature (matter) is said to be the cause; in the experience of pleasure and pain, the soul is said to be the cause.
Commentary

13.21 कार्यकारणकर्तृत्वे in the production of the effect? and the cause? हेतुः the cause? प्रकृतिः Prakriti? उच्यते is said (to be)? पुरुषः Purusha? सुखदुःखानाम् of pleasure and pain? भोक्तृत्वे in the experience? हेतुः the cause? उच्यते is said (to be).Commentary Pleasure and pain are the fruits of virtuous and vicious actions. The force of desire acts on the mind and the mind impels the senses to act to get the objects of desire. Good and evil actions proceed from Nature and lead to happiness or misery. Evil actions produce misery and sorrow. Virtuous actions cause happiness and joy. The soul is the enjoyer. The wife works and prepares nice? palatable dishes the huand silently enjoys the fruits of her labour. He sits ietly and eats them to his hearts content. Even so Nature works and the soul experiences the fruits of Her labour? viz.? pleasure and pain.When harmony predominates? virtuous actions are performed. When there is a preponderance of Rajas? both virtuous and vicious actions are performed. When Tamas predominates? sinful? unlawful and unrighteous actions are done.In the place of Kaarana (कारण) which means cause? some read Karana (करण) which means instrument such as the five organs of knowledge? five organs of action? mind? intellect and egoism (thirteen principles located in the body).Karya The effect? viz.? the physical body. The five elements which form the body and the five senses? and which form the senseobjects which are born of Nature come under the term effect. All alities? such as pleasure and pain and delusion which are born of Nature? come under the term instruments because these alities reside in the instruments? the senses.In the production of the body? the senses and their sensations Nature is said to be the cause. Thus Nature is the cause of Samsara.Sugarcane is the cause. Sugarcane juice? sugar and sugarcandy are the effects or modifications of sugarcane. Milk is the cause. Curd? butter and ghee (meleted butter) are the modifications of milk. Whatever is a modification of something is its effect? and that from which the modifications come is their cause. Nature is the source or cause of all modifications. She generates everything. The ten organs? mind and the five objects of the senses are the sixteen modifications or effects.Mahat (intellect) is born of Mulaprakriti. From Mahat Ahamkara (egoism) is born. Mahat is the effect of Mulaprakriti and the cause of Ahamkara. Therefore Mahat is called PrakritiVikriti. Mahat? Ahamkara and the five Tanmatras (rootelements of matter) are the seven PrakritiVikriti. Each of these is a modification of its predecessor and is in turn the cause of its successor. The five rootelements generate the five gross elements. They are the subtle elements. These seven are both Nature and modification (Prakriti and Vikriti)? cause and effect? and are included under the term cause.The functions of the body? senses? lifeforce? mind and intellect are superimposed on the pure Self. So the ignorant man says I am black I am fat I am hungry I am angry I am deaf I am blind I am the son of so and so? I know? I am the doer? I am the enjoyer? etc.The intellect is very subtle. It is in close contact with the most subtle Self. The Consciousness of the Self is reflected in the intellect (Chidabhasa) and so the intellect which has the semblance of,the Consciousness feels I am pure consciousness or Chaitanya. I experience pleasure and pain. The attributes of the pure Self are superimposed on the intellect. There is mutual superimposition between the intellect and the Self? Nature and Spirit. This is the cause of Samsara.Purusha? Jiva? Kshetrajna and Bhokta are all synonymous terms. Purusha here referred to is not the Supreme Self. He is the conditioned soul? the soul subject to transmigration who experiences pleasure and pain. The Self or the Absolute is ever free from Samsara and is unchanging.Prakriti and Purusha are the cause of Samsara. Nature generates the body? lifeforce? mind? intellect and the senses. The soul experiences pleasure and pain. Samsara is the experience of pleasure and pain. The soul is the Samsarin. He is the experiencer of pleasure and pain. (Cf.XV.9)

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.21 With regard to the source of body and organs, Nature is said to be the cause. The soul is the cause so far as enjoyership of happiness and sorrow is concerned.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.21 Nature is the Law which generates cause and effect; God is the source of the enjoyment of all pleasure and pain.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 3.27 BG 5.14 BG 13.30 SB 11.22.12 SB 3.27.1 SB 6.16.4 CC Madhya 20.118 CC Madhya 20.140 CC Madhya 24.135 Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.8Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 3.1.1
Material nature is said to be the cause of cause and effect in the body; the living entity is said to be the cause of pleasures and pains experienced in the body.
Practical Applications
  • Distinguish: nature drives the body's mechanics; the soul experiences pleasure and pain.
  • Use this distinction to take responsibility for experience without blaming nature for being nature.
  • Don't conflate the two causes.
Reflection Questions
  • Where do I blame nature for what is my experience?
  • What changes when I separate the two causes?

A loom weaves; a weaver feels the cloth's roughness or smoothness against his hands. The loom is prakṛti, mechanically producing cause and effect. The hands belong to puruṣa, registering pleasure and pain. Confuse the two and you blame the loom for the discomfort of skin, or thank the skin for the speed of the loom.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.22

↗
పురుష: ప్రకృతిస్థో హి భుఙ్క్తే ప్రకృతిజాన్గుణాన్ । కారణం గుణసఙ్గోఽస్య సదసద్యోనిజన్మసు ॥ ౨౨ ॥
puruṣaḥ prakṛti-stho hi
[purushah prakriti-stho hi]
bhuṅkte prakṛti-jān guṇān
[bhunkte prakriti-jaan gunaan]
kāraṇaṁ guṇa-saṅgo ’sya
[kaaranam guna-sango ’sya]
sad-asad-yoni-janmasu
[sad-asad-yoni-janmasu]
puruṣaḥ — the living entity prakṛti - sthaḥ — being situated in the material energy hi — certainly bhuṅkte — enjoys prakṛti - jān — produced by the material nature guṇān — the modes of nature kāraṇam — the cause guṇa - saṅgaḥ — the association with the modes of nature asya — of the living entity sat - asat — in good and bad yoni — species of life janmasu — in births .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
puruṣaḥ prakṛti-stho hi
puruṣaḥ
the living entity
prakṛti - sthaḥ
being situated in the material energy
hi
certainly
bhuṅkte prakṛti-jān guṇān
bhuṅkte
enjoys
prakṛti - jān
produced by the material nature
guṇān
the modes of nature
kāraṇaṁ guṇa-saṅgo ’sya
kāraṇam
the cause
guṇa - saṅgaḥ
the association with the modes of nature
asya
of the living entity
sat - asat
in good and bad
sad-asad-yoni-janmasu
yoni
species of life
janmasu
in births .
  • prakṛti - sthaḥ — being situated in the material energy
    Compound. The soul's plight is *positional* — it sits in prakṛti, not above it, not outside it. The whole problem of saṁsāra is named by this single locative compound.
  • bhuṅkte — enjoys
    Verb of tasting. The jīva tastes the modes — even tamasic experiences are "tasted" in the technical sense. The soul is always the experiencer; only the flavor changes.
  • guṇa - saṅgaḥ — the association with the modes of nature
    The diagnosis. *Saṅga* — the same word that 2.47 made famous — is the disease. Not the modes themselves, but attachment to them, lands one in the next species.
  • sat - asat — in good and bad
    Compound: good (sat) and bad (asat) species. The soul does not get to opt out of the system; it only gets to choose, by its mode-association, which side of the system it lands in.
  • yoni — species of life
    Literally "womb." Each mode-association produces a corresponding womb. The 8.4 million species are the calibrated output of this single principle.
The living entity in material nature thus follows the ways of life, enjoying the three modes of nature. This is due to his association with that material nature. Thus he meets with good and evil among various species.

This verse is very important for an understanding of how the living entities transmigrate from one body to another. It is explained in the Second Chapter that the living entity is transmigrating from one body to another just as one changes dress. This change of dress is due to his attachment to material existence. As long as he is captivated by this false manifestation, he has to continue transmigrating from one body to another. Due to his desire to lord it over material nature, he is put into such undesirable circumstances. Under the influence of material desire, the entity is born sometimes as a demigod, sometimes as a man, sometimes as a beast, as a bird, as a worm, as an aquatic, as a saintly man, as a bug. This is going on. And in all cases the living entity thinks himself to be the master of his circumstances, yet he is under the influence of material nature. How he is put into such different bodies is explained here. It is due to association with the different modes of nature. One has to rise, therefore, above the three material modes and become situated in the transcendental position. That is called Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Unless one is situated in Kṛṣṇa consciousness, his material consciousness will oblige him to transfer from one body to another because he has material desires since time immemorial. But he has to change that conception. That change can be effected only by hearing from authoritative sources. The best example is here: Arjuna is hearing the science of God from Kṛṣṇa. The living entity, if he submits to this hearing process, will lose his long-cherished desire to dominate material nature, and gradually and proportionately, as he reduces his long desire to dominate, he comes to enjoy spiritual happiness. In a Vedic mantra it is said that as he becomes learned in association with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, he proportionately relishes his eternal blissful life.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
22. The jīva, identifying with prakṛti in the form of his body, thinks he is experiencing happiness and distress which are born from his mind. This is caused by his association with the body, which causes his birth in various bodies of devatā and animal.
Commentary

But the jīva, just by misidentification caused by beginningless ignorance, thinks that his capacity for action and enjoyment are his very nature, though they are just the nature of things related to him (body, senses). From this, he takes repeated birth. Situated in the body produced from prakṛti and identifying with it (prakṛti-sthaḥ), the jīva enjoys and suffers by identifying as his own (bhuṅkte) the lamentation, illusion, happiness and distress (guṇān) which are qualities of his mind (prakṛti-jān). The cause is the contact of the soul (asya) with the body, made of guṇas (guṇa-saṅgaḥ). Though the soul does not actually contact the body, the contact is fabricated through ignorance. Where does the jīva enjoy? In repeated births in life forms like devatās (sad-yoni) or animals (asad-yoni), produced by his pious or sinful actions.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
22. The jīva, identifying with prakṛti in the form of his body, experiences happiness and distress which are born from prakṛti, by births in various bodies of devatā and animal. This is caused by his desires for objects made of the guṇas.
Commentary

This verse makes clear the agency of the jīva alone in enjoying and suffering and in living in prakṛti. The Lord also shows the cause of the jīva’s combining with prakṛti. Though the jīva is by nature knowledge and bliss, it is situated in prakṛti due to impressions of beginningless karma. Endowed with body, senses and prāṇa which are produced by prakṛti, which the jīva rules, the jīva experiences (bhuṅkte) happiness and distress (guṇān) which are produced by prakṛti. [Note: Happiness, distress, desire and hatred were included in the description of the field of prakṛti.] Where? He experiences this by taking births in wombs which are higher (such devas and men) or lower (animal, bird and others), in well-made or poorly made wombs. In all this, the jīva alone is the agent. The cause of the association is explained. The cause is beginningless desire for objects made of the guṇas (guṇa saṅgaḥ). The meaning is this. The beginningless jīva is contaminated with beginningless imprints in the form of karma. The jīva desiring enjoyable objects because of his being an enjoyer, will take shelter of prakṛti equipped with the desirables which she offers to him, until those imprints of karma are destroyed by devotee association. With the destruction of impressions, he enjoys the happiness in the abode of the Lord. The śruti says so’śnute sarvān kāmān saha brahmaṇā vipaścitā: he attains all his desires with the omniscient Lord. (Taittirīya Upaniṣad 2.1) The followers of sāṅkhya, taking isolated meanings of the statements “all activities are carried out by the modes” (BG 3.27) “prakṛti is the doer” (BG 13.20), “everything is done by prakṛti alone” (BG 13.29) and “the guṇas alone are the agent” (BG 14.19), claim that prakṛti alone is the agent. That is an impetuous interpretation, since prakṛti, like a lump of earth or wood, is an unconscious element. The ability to gain knowledge, perceive, desire and act—the qualities of the agent—belong to conscious entities alone. The śruti says vijṣānaṁ yajṣaṁ tanute karmāṇi tanute’pi ca: the jīva accomplishes knowledge, sacrifice and action. (Taittirīya Upaniṣad 2.5) Śruti also says: eṣa hi draṣṭā spraṣṭā śrotā rasayitā ghrātā mantā boddhā kartā vijṣānātmā puruṣaḥ: the conscious ātmā alone is the seer, toucher, hearer, taster, smeller, thinker, knower, and agent. (Praśna Upaniṣad 4.9) They maintain that prakṛti has this nature of an agent because of being the receptacle of the jīva and thus having superimposition of consciousness. This is not so, because the agency of prakṛti through proximity and imposition is caused by the proximity of the jīva alone. It is seen that the ability of hot iron to burn is due to fire, not the iron. One should not compare dull iron (or prakṛti) to the water that moves or the tree that bears fruit, and thus conclude that this proves prakṛti’s nature as an agent, because all of that action is accomplished by the presence of antaryāmi, and because this contradicts the śruti, which is the foundation of knowledge.

Memory (of scriptural rules) enables one to perform jyotiṣṭoma for bestowing svarga and meditation for bestowing liberation. This indicates that consciousness, the experiencer, not inert prakṛti, is the agent. [Note: What would be the use of scripture if prakṛti did everything?] Agency belongs to the jīva alone. When there are statements in scripture saying that prakrti is the doer, those statements are made in order to show the prominence of her functioning. Though a man carries something using his hand, we say that the hand carries an object. Similarly, because jīva accomplishes using prakṛti, the scriptures say that prakṛti accomplishes. This is how some explain such statements. Others say that prakṛti is said to be the agent in actions like sacrifice or war for the jīva attached to body and senses made of prakṛti, whereas prakṛti is not the agent for the pure jīva without attachment to body and senses.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

This verse is very important. It describes how the living entity who is ksetrajna (who, although described here as purusa is actually prakriti) gets trapped within ksetra. It shows a 'phony purusa' who thinks he is the enjoyer of his little ksetra, but actually this ksetra is the field for his suffering. (DS) Due to the desire to enjoy, the living entity takes shelter in matter (sad‑asad‑yoni‑janmasu). Therefore he takes birth in good and bad species of life, life after life. This identification goes on and on until he meets a devotee. Then his desire to enjoy will become weakned and then he can become liberated from that.

[2. Paramatma Purusa (ksetrajna): the Supersoul exists within all bodies as the Overseer, the Permitter, and the Supreme Proprietor. (23) ]

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study Key verse
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

‘Desire to enjoy’ forges the bond between purusha and prakriti

Living entity follows the way of life according to the three modes
Association with material nature leads to different good and evil among various species
Focus of Learning

(a) This verse signifies “How a living entity transmigrates from one body to another”

Transmigration is compared to a change of dress (Bg. 2.22)
Change of dress is due to “attachment to material existence”
Desire to lord over put him in undesirable circumstances – Sometimes born as demigod or human, or beast or bird or bug etc

(b) Binding factor to different bodies – Association with the three modes

In all cases, one thinks himself to be the “Master of his circumstances”, yet he is under material nature

(c) How Krishna consciousness helps – “Helps to rise above the three modes and be become

transcendental”

(d) How this change can be effected – By “hearing from authoritative sources”

Best example – Arjuna hearing science of God from Krishna
How hearing works – If living entity submits to hearing process he loses his long cherished desire to dominate, gradually and proportionately he comes to enjoy spiritual happiness
Ref. Vedic mantra – “As one becomes learned in association with Supreme Personality of Godhead, he proportionately relishes eternal blissful life”

(a) Different manifestations of body and senses among living entities are due to material nature

Basis of 8.4 million species – They arise from different sensual pleasures and desires
Different bodies result in different happiness and distress
Conclusion – Material happiness and distress are due to the body and not to himself (the soul) as he is
Cause of being in the material world – Desire to lord it over material nature (cf. Spiritual world is pure and free from the desire to lord it over)

(b) Material world is a place of struggle – provides different “residential quarters”

Everyone is struggling to acquire different kinds of pleasure from the body
Body is the effect of senses and senses are the instruments for gratifying desires
The living entity gets a body according to “past desire” and “activity”
Past desire and activity decide one’s “residential quarters”
Law of nature – once a body is attained, one comes under the laws of nature and behaves as a dog or a hog or a demigod etc.

(c) Supersoul always accompanies us in all circumstances (in all bodies)

Ref. Vedas (Mundaka Upanisad)
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.22 Hi, since; purusah, the soul, the experiencer; is prakrtisthah, seated in Nature, which is characterized as ignorance and gets transformed into body and organs, i.e., (since the soul) has become identified with Nature; therefore, bhunkte, [Bhunkte, lit. enjoys, here means 'experiences'.-Tr.] it enjoys, i.e. experiences; gunan, the alities-manifest as happiness, sorrow and delusion; prakrtijan, born of Nature, thinking thus, 'I am happy, sorrowful, deluded, learned.' Even though ignorance continues as a cause, still the main cause of worldly existence, of birth, is the contact, the self-identification, with the alities-happiness,sorrow, and delusion-when they are experienced, as is affirmed by the Upanisadic text, 'What it desires, it resolves' (Br. 4.4.5) [See Sankaracarya's Comm. on this.-Tr.]. That very fact is stated here: Gunasangah, contact with the alities; is karanam, the cause; asya, of its, the soul's, the experiencer's; sad-asad-yoni-janmasu, births in good and evil wombs. Self-identification with the alities is the cause of the experience of births in good and evil wombs. Or the meaning is, 'Self-identification with the alities is the cause or its worldly existence through birth in good and evil wombs,' where the words 'of worldly existence' have to be supplied. The good wombs are he wombs of gods and others; evil wombs are the wombs of gods and others; evil wombs are the wombs of beasts etc. From the force of the context it is to be understood that there is no contradiction in including even human wombs among 'good and evil wombs'. It amounts to saying that ignorance-called 'being seated in Nature'-and the contact with. i.e. the desire for, the alities are the causes of worldly existence. And this is said so that they can be avoided. And in the scripture Gita it is a well-known fact that knowledge and dispassion, accompanied with renunciation, are the causes of removing this (ignorance and self-identification with the alities). That knowledge about the field and the Knower of the field, too, has been presented earlier. This has also been said in, '৷৷.by realizing which one attains Immortality' (12), etc., through the process of refutation of elements alien (to the Self) and superimposition of alities belonging to others (that are not the Self). [Verse 12 deals with the refutation of alien elements, and vere 13 with the superimposition of alities belonging to others.] A direct presentation is again being made of that (knowledge) itself:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.22 The self, settled in a series of bodies of divinities, men etc., which are modifications of Prakrti, becomes attached to happiness, pain etc., resulting from the Sattva and other alities associated with the respective wombs, and hence engages Itself in virtuous and sinful deeds, constituting the means for happiness, misery etc. In order to experience the fruits of those good and evil deeds, It is born again in good and evil wombs. Then It becomes active and conseently is born again as a result of Its activities. As long as It does not cultivate alities like modesty etc., which are the means for realising the self, so long Its entanglement in Samsara continues like this. Thus, it has been declared here that attachment causes births in good and evil wombs.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.22 See Comment under 13.23
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.22 The soul seated in Nature experiences the alities born of Nature; attachment to the alities is the cause of its birth in good and evil wombs.
Commentary

13.22 पुरुषः Purusha? प्रकृतिस्थः seated in Prakriti? हि indeed? भुङक्ते enjoys? प्रकृतिजान् born of Prakriti? गुणान् alities? कारणम् the cause? गुणसङ्गः attachment to the Gunas? अस्य of his? सदसद्योनिजन्मसु of birth in good and evil wombs.Commentary The soul residing in Nature and identifying itself with the body and the senses which are modifications of Nature acts through the alities of Nature and experiences pleasure and pain and delusion. It thinks? I am happy? I am miserable? I am deluded? I am wise. When it thus identifies itself with the alities? it assumes individuality and takes birth in pure and impure wombs.The soul (Jivatma) enjoys the sensual objects in conjunction with the body? mind and the senses and thus becomes the enjoyer. Brahman is the silent witness and nonenjoyer. The souls attachment to the alities of pleasure? pain and delusion is the chief cause of its birth. If you add the word Samsara to the second half of the verse? it will mean Attachment to the alities is the cause of Samsara through births in good and evil wombs.Good wombs (Sat Yoni) are those of the gods and the like evil wombs (Asat Yoni) are those of lower animals. The human womb is partly good and partly evil on account of mixed Karmas.Purushah prakritisthah Purusha (the soul) seated in Prakriti (Nature). This is Avidya (ignorance). Attachment to the alities of Nature is Kama (desire). Avidya and Kama are the cause of Samsara.Jnana (wisdom) and Vairagya (dispassion) will destroy ignorance and desire. (Cf.XIV.5XV.7)

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.22 Since the soul is seated in Nature, therefore it experiences the alities born of Nature. Contact with the alities is the cause of its births in good and evil wombs.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.22 God dwelling in the heart of Nature experiences the Qualities which nature brings forth; and His affinity towards the Qualities is the reason for His living in a good or evil body.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
The living entity in nature, enjoying its modes, takes birth in good or evil species — encountering nature's modes is the cause of birth.
Practical Applications
  • Recognize that what mode you live in shapes your future birth.
  • Cultivate sattva (goodness) deliberately.
  • Don't be careless about the mode of your daily activities.
Reflection Questions
  • What mode dominates my daily activities?
  • What change would shift the mode?

A traveler dresses for the climate he steps into. In a tropical land he wears thin cloth; in a frozen one, fur. The garment is not his choice once he has chosen the climate. So the soul, by associating with sattva, rajas, or tamas, dresses itself in the corresponding species of birth. The mode is the climate; the body is the cloth.

Bharata Mahārāja and the deer

Emperor Bharata, having renounced his kingdom for spiritual practice, found an orphaned fawn and grew attached to it. He fed it, watched over it, worried for it. At the moment of his death, his mind rested on the deer — and so in his next birth, he was born as a deer.

The Bhāgavatam preserves this episode in the Fifth Canto. Whatever mode and association the soul cultivates at the end shapes the next body. Bharata, only by retaining the memory of his previous fall, eventually rose again as Jaḍa Bharata. Guṇa-saṅga decides the species — exactly the verse's claim.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.23

↗
ఉపద్రష్టానుమన్తా చ భర్తా భోక్తా మహేశ్వర: । పరమాత్మేతి చాప్యుక్తో దేహేఽస్మిన్పురుష: పర: ॥ ౨౩ ॥
upadraṣṭānumantā ca
[upadrashtaanumantaa cha]
bhartā bhoktā maheśvaraḥ
[bhartaa bhoktaa maheshvarah]
paramātmeti cāpy ukto
[paramaatmeti chaapy ukto]
dehe ’smin puruṣaḥ paraḥ
[dehe ’smin purushah parah]
upadraṣṭā — overseer anumantā — permitter ca — also bhartā — master bhoktā — supreme enjoyer mahā - īśvaraḥ — the Supreme Lord parama - ātmā — the Supersoul iti — also ca — and api — indeed uktaḥ — is said dehe — in the body asmin — this puruṣaḥ — enjoyer paraḥ — transcendental .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
upadraṣṭānumantā ca
upadraṣṭā
overseer
anumantā
permitter
ca
also
bhartā bhoktā maheśvaraḥ
bhartā
master
bhoktā
supreme enjoyer
mahā - īśvaraḥ
the Supreme Lord
paramātmeti cāpy ukto
parama - ātmā
the Supersoul
iti
also
ca
and
api
indeed
uktaḥ
is said
dehe ’smin puruṣaḥ paraḥ
dehe
in the body
asmin
this
puruṣaḥ
enjoyer
paraḥ
transcendental .
  • upadraṣṭā — overseer
    Upa- + √dṛś — "one who watches from nearby." The Lord does not watch from a distance. He is positioned right beside the jīva in the same body, witnessing every act.
  • anumantā — permitter
    Anu- + √man — "one who consents." A devastating word: nothing the jīva does happens without the Lord's consent. The soul's freedom is real, but it operates inside a sanctioning presence.
  • bhartā — master
    From √bhṛ — "to bear, to maintain." The Lord not only watches and permits; He sustains. Even the body's continued functioning is His upholding.
  • bhoktā — supreme enjoyer
    The Lord is the *real* enjoyer. The jīva enjoys derivatively; ultimately every enjoyment belongs to Him. This word will become the engine of Gītā 9.24 and Īśopaniṣad's opening verse.
  • parama - ātmā — the Supersoul
    Compound. The technical term that names the Lord in His indwelling aspect. Distinct from the jīvātmā by being supreme (parama). Two souls in every body — that is the structure.
  • paraḥ — transcendental
    Adjective. The Supersoul, though dwelling in the body, is *para* — beyond, transcendent. Indwelling does not mean reducible. The Lord is in the body without being of it.
Yet in this body there is another, a transcendental enjoyer, who is the Lord, the supreme proprietor, who exists as the overseer and permitter, and who is known as the Supersoul.

It is stated here that the Supersoul, who is always with the individual soul, is the representation of the Supreme Lord. He is not an ordinary living entity. Because the monist philosophers take the knower of the body to be one, they think that there is no difference between the Supersoul and the individual soul. To clarify this, the Lord says that He is represented as the Paramātmā in every body. He is different from the individual soul; He is para, transcendental. The individual soul enjoys the activities of a particular field, but the Supersoul is present not as finite enjoyer nor as one taking part in bodily activities, but as the witness, overseer, permitter and supreme enjoyer. His name is Paramātmā, not ātmā, and He is transcendental. It is distinctly clear that the ātmā and Paramātmā are different. The Supersoul, the Paramātmā, has legs and hands everywhere, but the individual soul does not. And because the Paramātmā is the Supreme Lord, He is present within to sanction the individual soul’s desiring material enjoyment. Without the sanction of the Supreme Soul, the individual soul cannot do anything. The individual is bhukta, or the sustained, and the Lord is bhoktā, or the maintainer. There are innumerable living entities, and He is staying in them as a friend. The fact is that every individual living entity is eternally part and parcel of the Supreme Lord, and both of them are very intimately related as friends. But the living entity has the tendency to reject the sanction of the Supreme Lord and act independently in an attempt to dominate nature, and because he has this tendency he is called the marginal energy of the Supreme Lord. The living entity can be situated either in the material energy or in the spiritual energy. As long as he is conditioned by the material energy, the Supreme Lord, as his friend, the Supersoul, stays with him just to get him to return to the spiritual energy. The Lord is always eager to take him back to the spiritual energy, but due to his minute independence the individual entity is continually rejecting the association of spiritual light. This misuse of independence is the cause of his material strife in the conditioned nature. The Lord, therefore, is always giving instruction from within and from without. From without He gives instructions as stated in Bhagavad-gītā, and from within He tries to convince the living entity that his activities in the material field are not conducive to real happiness. “Just give it up and turn your faith toward Me. Then you will be happy,” He says. Thus the intelligent person who places his faith in the Paramātmā or the Supreme Personality of Godhead begins to advance toward a blissful eternal life of knowledge.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
23. There is also a supreme person in the body, called Paramātmā, the great lord, who is the witness situated close to the jīva, merciful to the jīva, the supporter and protector of the jīva.
Commentary

Having spoken of the jīva, the Lord now speaks about the Paramātmā. Though the Lord already described Paramātmā in general and in detail from verses thirteen to eighteen, it should be understood that the present statement is made in order to clearly show that the Paramātmā is situated in all bodies along with the jīva, but different from the jīva.

In this body, there is another, supreme puruṣa, the great Lord, called the Paramātmā (paramātmā iti ca api uktaḥ). The word parama in Paramātmā clearly indicates a personal expansion of Lord (svāṁśa), distinct from the jīva, in order to defeat those who propound the theory of one soul only. He is the witness (draṣṭā) situated close to (upa) each jīva, but separate from him. He is the bestower of favors (anumantā), showing mercy by His very closeness to the jīva. The śruti says sakṣi cetaḥ kevalo nirguṇaś ca: He is the witness, the consciousness, pure, beyond the material guṇas. (Gopāla Tāpanī Upaniṣad 2.96) He is the supporter (bhartā) and the protector (bhoktā) of the jīva.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
23. There is also a supreme person in the body, called paramātmā, the great lord, who is the witness situated close to the jīva, the permitter of the jīva’ṣ actions, the supporter and ruler of the jīva.
Commentary

Having spoken of the jīva who is situated in the body as the experiencer of happiness and distress, the Lord now speaks of the Supreme Lord situated there as the controller. In this body there is another person different from the jīva (paraḥ), who is called the great lord (maheśvaraḥ), the supreme ātmā (paramātmā). He is a witness (upadraṣṭā)—seeing, by being situated near to (upa), but different from the jīva. He gives permission (anumantā), for without His permission the jīva cannot do anything at all. He is the supporter or maintainer of the jīva (bharṭa). He is the ruler of the jīva (bhoktā). [Note: Bhoktā means enjoyer but also a ruler, who enjoys a kingdom.] Although the Lord has already said that He is everywhere (staring from verse 13), He says this again in order to emphasize that He is situated with the jīva.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

Now the relationship between the two ksetrajnas is explained. One is trying to be purusa and the other is permitting him to be purusa.

[3. Result: One who understands prakrti (ksetra), purusa (ksetrajna jiva/ ksetrajna Supersoul) and their interactions attains liberation and doesn't take his birth again in the material world. (24) ]

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Describes actual purusha

THEME: Second type of purusa is mentioned here – He is never entangled like the ordinary purusa

He is the transcendental enjoyer,
The Supreme Proprietor, overseer and permitter
He is known as the Supersoul
Focus of Learning

(a) Monist philosophers take knower of the body to be ‘one’ – They think there is no difference

between the Supersoul and the individual soul

Refutation: The Lord says that “He is represented by the Paramatma in every body”

He is mentioned as “para” which implies transcendental – He is different from the individual soul
His name is Paramatma and not “atma”
Role of supersoul – Supersoul is present not as the finite enjoyer (like individual soul), but as the witness, overseer, permitter and Supreme enjoyer
All pervading – Supersoul has legs and hands everywhere
Maintainer – Supersoul is “bhokta” (maintainer) and individual soul is “bhukta” (maintained)
Real friend – Supersoul stays with all living entities as a friend – Present to sanction individual soul’s desires

(b) Relationship between living entity and Supersoul

Living entity is eternally part and parcel of Supreme Personality of Godhead
Intimately related as friends
Living entity is marginal entity – Because tendency to reject the Lord’s sanction and act independently to dominate
Cause of material strife in material nature – Misuse of independence
Lord as the Supreme well-wisher
In conditioned state of living entity, Lord stays with the living entity to get him back
Lord is always instructing from within, trying to convince us that the material world is not conducive to happiness – “Give it up and turn your faith to Me”
Instructing from without as Bhagavad-gita

(c) How does an intelligent person act – Places his faith in the Paramatma and begins to advance to a

blissful eternal life of knowledge

PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF TEXTS 13.20 – 13.23

Freedom from prakriti is available for one who recognizes the position of the “true purusa” (The Supreme enjoyer) described in Text 13.23
Because bondage is due to the attempt to take the position of the Lord
One can come to this understanding through jnana-yoga, astanga-yoga, karma-yoga or bhakti-yoga which begins with hearing
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.23 He who is the upadrasta, Witness, who while staying nearby does not Himself become involved: As when the priests and the performer of a sacrifice remain engaged in duties connected with the sacrifice, there is another (called Brahma) remaining nearby who is unengaged, is versed in the science of sacrifices and witnesses the merit or demerit of the activities of the priest and the performer of the sacrifice, similarly, He who is not engaged in the activities of and is different from the body and organs, who has characteristics other than theirs, and is the proximate (upa) observer (drasta) of the body and organs engaged in their duties, is the upa-drasta. Or: The observers are the body, eyes, mind, intellect and the soul. Of them the body is the external observer. Proceeding inwards from that (body), the Self is the inmost as also the proximate observer, compared with which there is no other higher and inner observer. The Self, because of being the most proximate observer, is the upadrasta. Or, It is the upadrasta since, like the non-looker of a sarifice, It witness everything. And He is the anu-manta, Permitter: Anumananam, approval, means satisfaction with those performers (viz body and organs) as also their perfomances. The agent of that (approval) is the anumanta. Or, He is the anumanta since, even though Himself not engaged in the activities of the body and organs, He appears to be favourably disposed towards and engaged in them. Or, He is the anumanta because, when the body and organs are engaged in their own functions, He remains as a witness and never dissuades them. It is the bharta, Sustainer: Bharanam means the continuance in their own state of the body, organs, mind and intellect, which reflect consciousness and have become aggregated owing to the need of serving the purpose [Viz enjoyment, or Liberation.-Tr.] of some other entity, viz the conscious Self. And that (continuance) is verily due to the consciousness that is the Self. In this sense the Self is said to be the Sustainer. It is the bhokta, Experiencer: As heat is by fire, similarly, the experiences of the intellect-in the form of happiness, sorrow and delusion in relation to all objects-, when born as though permeated by the consciousness that is the Self, are manifested differently by the Self which is of the nature of eternal Consciousness. In this sense the Self is said to be the Experiencer. He is maheswarah, the great God, because, as the Self of all and independent, He is the great Ruler. He is paramatma, the transcendental Self, because He is the Self which has the characteristics of being the supreme Witness etc. of (all) those-beginning from the body and ending with the intellect-which are imagined through ignorance to be the indwelling Self. He is api ca, also; uktah, spoken of, referred to, in the Upanisads; iti, as, with the words; 'He is the indwelling One, the paramatma, the transcendental Self.' [Ast reads atah in place of antah. So the translation of the sentence will be: Therefore He is also referred to as the transcendental Self in the Upanisads.-Tr.] Where is He? The parah, suprem; purusah, Person, who is higher than the Unmanifest and who will be spoken of in, 'But different is the supreme Person who is spoken of as the transcendental Self' (15.17); is asmin, in this; dehe, body. What has been presented in, '৷৷.also understand Me to be the Knower of the field' (2), has been explained and conclude.
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.23 The self existing in the body becomes the 'spectator and approver' of this body by means of the will in consonance with the functioning of the body. Likewise, It is the 'supporter' of the body, Similarly, It becomes 'experiencer' of the pleasure and pain resulting from the activities of the body. Thus, by virtue of ruling and supporting the body and by making the body completely subservient, It becomes 'the great lord' (Mahesvara) in relation to the body, the senses and the mind. Sri Krsna will further declare: 'When the lord acires the body, and when he leaves it and goes on his way, he takes these as the wind carries scents from their places' (15.8). In the body, It is said to be the 'supreme self' in relation to the body, the senses and the mind. The word 'self' (Atman) is applied to the body and the mind subseently. It is said afterwards: 'Some perceive the self by means of the self through meditation' (13.24). The particle 'also' (api) indicates that the self is the 'supreme lord'? in relation to the body just as It is the supreme self. The supremacy of the self has been described in the text beginning with 'It is the beginningless brahman having Me for the Highest' (13.12). It is true that the self (in Its emancipated state) has limitless power knowledge. But It becomes the great lord and the supreme self only in relation to the body. Such lordship and supremacy is the result of attachment to the Gunas arising from the beginningless conjunction with Prakrti.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.20-23 Prakrtim etc. upto parah. The Material Cause also is beginningless, because it has no other casue. Modifications : the cloth and the like. What is known as Material Cause is the basis for the process of cause-and-effect. But, the Soul, because of Its importance, constitutes the enjoyer. [Thus] the Material Cause and the Soul have verily an existence of interdependence just as that of the lame and the blind. Hence, the nature of the Soul is described by the authors of the scriptures by nomenclatures having different forms such as 'the Spectator' and so on. The meaning, intended here is this : The Material Cause, Its modifications, the fourteen types of creation and also the Soul - this is all beginningless and perennial as it is completely illuminated by the category Brahman and is identical with it. Hence [the Bhagavat] said :
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.23 The Supreme Soul in this body is also called the spectator, the permitter, the supporter, the enjoyer, the great Lord and the Supreme Self.
Commentary

13.23 उपद्रष्टा the spectator? अनुमन्ता the permitter? च and? भर्ता the supporter? भोक्ता the enjoyer? महेश्वरः the great Lord? परमात्मा the Supreme Self? इति thus? च and? अपि also? उक्तः is called? देहे in the body? अस्मिन् (in) this? पुरुषः Purusha? परः Supreme.Commentary Upadrashta A spectator? a witness? a lookeron? a bystander? one who sits near. When the priests and the sacrificer perform the sacrificial rites? an expert who has good experience in sacrifical matters sits by their side. He does not take any part at all in the sacrifice. He sits as a silent witness. He guides them. He points out their defects and corrects them. Even so the Supreme Self does not act. It does not take any part in the activities of the body? the mind and the senses. It is entirely distinct from them. It is a silent witness of their activities. It sits near Nature and silently watches Her actions.It may be explained in another way. The body? the eyes? the mind? the intellect and the Self are the,seers. Of these the body is the most external seer the Self is the most internal and nearest seer. Beyond the Self there is no other internal seer.Anumanta Permitter. The Supreme Self gives consent. It expresses Its approval or satisfaction regarding the actions done by the senses? the mind and the intellect. The King consents and says Yes. The Prime Minister and the other officers carry out his orders. Even so the Supreme Self consents or gives permission the body? the mind? the intellect? and the senses perform their respective functions. Or? though It Itself does not work while the senses? the mind and the intellect work? It appears to be engaged in action? it seems to cooperate with them. As It is an onlooker or mere witness? It never stands in the way of the activities of the body? the mind? the intellect and the senses.Bharta Supporter. Just as the huand is the supporter of his wife? so also the Self is the supporter of this body? mind? intellect? lifeforce and the senses. It is different from them? just as the father who supports the children is different from them.Bhokta Enjoyer the Self? of the nature of eternal intelligence. Just as heat is the inherent nature of fire? so also eternal intelligence is the inherent nature of the Self. All the states of the mind such as pleasure? pain and delusion are permeated and illumined by the intelligent Self. Just as Govindan who takes the food is different from the foo? so also the Self is different from the intellect? the mind and the senses.Mahesvarah The great Lord. As He is the soul or essence of everything and as He is independent of all? He is Mahesvara. The sky is very big. Mahesva is bigger than even the sky? and so He is called Mahesvara. Just as the king is different from his subjects? so also the Self is different from Nature and the effects or modifications of Nature.Paramatma The Supreme Self. It is supreme because It is superior to all those things? from the Unmanifested to the physical body? which are mistaken for the Self on account of ignorance. Just as an iron piece moves in the presence of a magnet so also the mind and the intellect which are insentient move and function in the presence of the Supreme Self. Just as the moon borrows its light from the sun? so also the mind and the intellect borrow their light from the Supreme Self. The Supreme Self is selfluminous. Mind and intellect have no selfluminosity. In the Vedas also He is called the Supreme Self. Lord Krishna says in verse 17 of the fifteenth chapter But distinct is the Highest Purusha spoken of as the Supreme Self.Do thou also know Me as the knower of the field in all the fields? has been described in detial and the subject is concluded in this verse.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.23 He who is the Witness, the Permitter, the Sustainer, the Experiencer, the great Lord, and who is also spoken of as the transcendental Self is the supreme Person in this body.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.23 Thus in the body of man dwells the Supreme God; He who sees and permits, upholds and enjoys, the Highest God and the Highest Self.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Ahimsa (Non-violence / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Maitri (Friendship / Goodwill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 15.17 BG 18.61 BG 9.10 SB 3.26.18 SB 11.7.51 SB 6.4.24 CC Ādi 2.18 CC Madhya 20.165 CC Madhya 24.74 Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 3.1.1Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.11
Yet in this body there is another, transcendental enjoyer, the Lord Himself — the supreme proprietor, the witness, the permitter.
Practical Applications
  • Recognize the Supersoul as inner witness who permits.
  • Cultivate awareness of His permission in your acts.
  • Don't act as if you alone authorize.
Reflection Questions
  • Where do I act as if I alone authorize?
  • What changes when permission becomes shared?

Inside the body, two birds perch on the tree (as the Upaniṣad says) — one tastes the fruits, sweet and bitter; the other watches without tasting. The watcher is the Lord, overseer and permitter. Every act you perform is performed in His sight, with His silent consent. Acknowledge the second bird and the first bird's anxieties grow lighter.

The two birds of the Muṇḍaka

The Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad pictures two birds, close friends, perched on the same tree. One eats the tree's fruits — sweet and sour, alternately delighted and troubled. The other watches, eating nothing.

When the eating bird at last turns and notices its silent companion, sorrow falls away. The verse Kṛṣṇa speaks here names that companion as upadraṣṭā, anumantā — the overseer, the permitter. The Gītā is restating the Upaniṣadic image in technical Sāṅkhya vocabulary. Recognize the watcher and you stop being only the eater.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.24

↗
య ఏవం వేత్తి పురుషం ప్రకృతిం చ గుణై: సహ । సర్వథా వర్తమానోఽపి న స భూయోఽభిజాయతే ॥ ౨౪ ॥
ya evaṁ vetti puruṣaṁ
[ya evam vetti purusham]
prakṛtiṁ ca guṇaiḥ saha
[prakritim cha gunaih saha]
sarvathā vartamāno ’pi
[sarvathaa vartamaano ’pi]
na sa bhūyo ’bhijāyate
[na sa bhooyo ’bhijaayate]
yaḥ — anyone who evam — thus vetti — understands puruṣam — the living entity prakṛtim — material nature ca — and guṇaiḥ — the modes of material nature saha — with sarvathā — in all ways vartamānaḥ — being situated api — in spite of na — never saḥ — he bhūyaḥ — again abhijāyate — takes his birth .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
ya evaṁ vetti puruṣaṁ
yaḥ
anyone who
evam
thus
vetti
understands
puruṣam
the living entity
prakṛtiṁ ca guṇaiḥ saha
prakṛtim
material nature
ca
and
guṇaiḥ
the modes of material nature
saha
with
sarvathā vartamāno ’pi
sarvathā
in all ways
vartamānaḥ
being situated
api
in spite of
na sa bhūyo ’bhijāyate
na
never
saḥ
he
bhūyaḥ
again
abhijāyate
takes his birth .
  • evam — thus
    Refers back to verses 20–23. The liberating knowledge is specifically the framework just laid out: prakṛti as cause, puruṣa as enjoyer, Paramātmā as overseer. Not just any "understanding" qualifies.
  • vetti — understands
    From √vid — "to know," with the sense of seeing-through. Not memorization but realization. The same root as veda.
  • sarvathā — in all ways
    Adverb. *Whatever* condition the seer happens to be in — householder, renunciate, learned, illiterate — the result is the same. Liberation is condition-independent once knowledge is real.
  • vartamānaḥ — being situated
    Present participle from √vṛt — "continuing to function." Even while life goes on, even while the body continues its prakṛti-driven activity, liberation has already happened.
  • abhijāyate — takes his birth
    Abhi- + √jan. Birth as the soul's repeated descent into prakṛti. With na in front, the verse promises: no more births. The whole point of the path.
One who understands this philosophy concerning material nature, the living entity and the interaction of the modes of nature is sure to attain liberation. He will not take birth here again, regardless of his present position.

Clear understanding of material nature, the Supersoul, the individual soul and their interrelation makes one eligible to become liberated and turn to the spiritual atmosphere without being forced to return to this material nature. This is the result of knowledge. The purpose of knowledge is to understand distinctly that the living entity has by chance fallen into this material existence. By his personal endeavor in association with authorities, saintly persons and a spiritual master, he has to understand his position and then revert to spiritual consciousness or Kṛṣṇa consciousness by understanding Bhagavad-gītā as it is explained by the Personality of Godhead. Then it is certain that he will never come again into this material existence; he will be transferred into the spiritual world for a blissful eternal life of knowledge.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
24. He who knows the Paramātmā, prakṛti, and the jīva, along with the guṇas, does not take birth again, though encountering all sorts of circumstances.
Commentary

The results of this knowledge are stated in this verse. He who knows Paramātmā (puruṣam), prakṛti or māyā-śakti (along with its qualities), and the jīva (indicated only by the word ca), does not take birth again, even though in this life he may be situated in all sorts of unfavorable circumstances (sarvataḥ vartamāno ’pi), such as being overcome by sleep and having uncontrolled mind or other such problems.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
24. He who knows the paramātmā, prakṛti along with the guṇas, and the jīva, does not take birth again, though encountering all sorts of circumstances in this world.
Commentary

This verse speaks of the results of this knowledge. That person who knows the Lord, prakṛti belonging to the Lord, and the jīva (indicated by ca), according to the description given by Me with differentiation of the three (evam), does not take birth again though living in the material world (sarvathā) doing actions to support his body. He is liberated.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Translation
One who understands this philosophy concerning material nature, the living entity and the interaction of the modes of nature is sure to attain liberation. He will not take birth here again, regardless of his present position. (cn/DS) The result of this knowledge is that one becomes a man of descrimination, then one can become liberated from this world, no more birth and death, because one will not act according to the ditaction of the body, he will act according to the ditaction of the Supersoul and thus he will not be subject to the law of Karma. If one understands why he is in the material world, then he will have the desire to get out and by that personal endeavor, in the association with proper authorities, then one will become liberated.
Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Knowing the philosophy explained in Bg. 13.20 – 13.23 causes liberation – no more births

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.24 Sah yah, he who; vetti, knows, in the manner described; the purusam, Person, that Self possessed of the characteristics stated above, as 'I myself (am That)'; and knows prakrtim, Nature as described above, which is characterized as ignorance; to have been eradicated by Knowledge, saha, along with; gunaih, the alities which are its modifications; na abhijayate, will not be born; bhuyah, again-after the fall of this body of the man of realization, he does not become born again for (taking) another body, i.e. he does not take up another body; sarvatha api, in whatever way; vartamanah, he may live. From the word api it is understood that, it goes without saying that one who is firm in his own duty is not rorn. Objection: Though it has been said that there is absence of rirth after the dawn of Knowledge, still is not illogical that actions done (in the present life) before the rise of Knowledge and those done subseently, as also those done in the many past lives, should be destroyed without yielding their results? Hence there should be three births! For destruction of acired merit is not logical, to the same extent as actions that have produced the present birth and are yielding their proper results (cannot be destroyed). Besides, it is not understood that actions have distinctions [Since all actions arise from ignorance, they are on the same level so far so they are opposed to Knowledge; i.e., there can be no such distinction among actions as 'those which have started yielding results' and 'those that have not'.]. Therefore, the actions of the three kinds, without exception, will produce three births or they all collectively will produce one birth. Otherwise, if the acired merits become destroyed, it will lead to loss of faith everywhere as well as to the purposelessness of scriptures. Therefore it has been illogical to say, 'he will not be born again.' Reply: No, for the burning away of all the actions of the man of knowledge has been stated in hundreds of Upanisadic texts such as: 'And all one's actions become dissipated' (Mu. 2.2.8); 'Anyone who knows (that supreme) Brahman, becomes Brahman' (op. cit. 3.2.9); 'For him the delay is for so long only (as he does not become freed)' (Ch. 6.14.2); 'As the fibres at the tip of a blade of reed (become completely burnt৷৷.,' so) all actions 'get completely burnt' (op. cit. 5.24.3). Here too the burning of all actions has been stated in, 'as a blazing fire reduces pieces of wood to ashes,৷৷.'etc. (4.37), and He will also say so (later) [See 18.66: 'I shall free you from all sins,' etc.-Tr.]. This accords with reason also. Verily, actions, which arise from the seed of evils [Klesas, evils-see note under 8.19-Tr.] like ignorance and desires, germinate the sprout of rirth. Here also it has been said by the Lord in various places that actions which are associated with egoism and desire for results bear fruits, not the others. And there is also the verse: 'As seeds burnt by fire do not germinate, so also the Self does not acire another body due to evils that have been burnt by Knowledge (cf. Mbh. Va. 199. 107). Objection: It may be granted for the present that actions performed after the rise of Knowledge are burnt by Knowledge, since they coexist with Knowledge. But the burning away of actions done in this life prior to the rise of Knowledge and those done in the many past lives is not reasonable. Reply: No, because of the alification, 'all actions' (4.37). Objection: May it not be that 'all actions' means those that are undertaken after Illumination? Reply: No, for there is no reason for the restriction (of the meaning). On the other hand, as for the statement, 'just as actions that have produced the present birth and are already active in producing their results do not get dissipated even after Illumination, similarly it is not reasonable that actions which have not commenced producing their results should get dissipated,'-that is wrong. Objection: Why? Reply: Since they have already begun producing results, like an arrow that has been shot: As an arrow, freed earlier from a bow for hitting a target, even after piercing through the target comes to a stop only after falling down as a result of the dissipation of its initial momentum, similarly, actions that produced the (present) body verily continue, even after fulfilling the purpose of maintaining the body, to exist as before until the dissipation of their inherent tendencies. But, as that very arrow, when it has not acired the momentum, needed for action, when it has not been shot even though fixed on the bow, can be withdrawn, similarly, actions which have not begun yielding their results may be rendered unproductive by Knowledge, even while existing in their receptacle. [The internal organ bearing the reflection of Consciousness.] Hence, it is established that , it has been reasonable to state that on the fall of the present body of an enlightened person, 'He is not born again.' Here are being presented these meditation etc. which are the alternative means for the realization of the Self:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.24 He who 'understands', namely, knows truly with discrimination, the self to be thus, and also the Prakrti as having the aforesaid nature along with Sattva and other Gunas, whose nature will be later examined, is never born again, i.e., is never rorn conjointly with Prakrti again in 'whatever state he may be placed,' i.e., in whatever painful condition he may be placed in the bodies of divinities, men etc. The meaning is that at the time when the body ceases to exist, the self will attain the purified state characterised by boundless knowledge devoid of evil.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.24 Ya evam etc. a men of Yoga who knows the Material Cause, the Soul, the Strands and their modifications in this manner i.e., by means of this above mentioned Brahman-perception which is in the form 'All are identical with It' - he is certainly emancipated eventhough he behaves in different ways i.e., in whatever manner [he chooses].
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.24 He who thus knows the Spirit and Matter together with the alities, in whatever condition he may be, he is not born again.
Commentary

13.24 यः who? एवम् thus? वेत्ति knows? पुरुषम् Purusha? प्रकृतिम् Prakriti? च and? गुणैः alities? सह with? सर्वथा in all ways? वर्तमानः living? अपि also? न not? सः he? भूयः again? अभिजायते is born.Commentary One who knows the Soul and Nature with its alities? whatever his conduct may be? frees himself from the cycle of births and deaths. Such is the advantage he gains from the discriminative knowledge of Spirit and Matter. He knows that he is eternal and changeless and that all changes are due to the modifications of Nature on account of its alities. The self through ignorance identifies itself with the body and suffers rirth.In whatsoever condition he may be? whether he is engaged in prescribed or forbidden acts (like Indra who killed the Purohita Visvarupa and many Sannyasins)? he is not born again? because the,actions (which are the seeds of rirth)? of one who knows the Spirit and Matter? who has gained the knowledge of the Self? are burnt by the fire of that knowledge. Just as the seeds that are fried in fire do not sprout again? so also the actions burnt in the fire of knowledge cannot produce new bodies or further births. In his case they are Karmabhasa (mere semblance of Karma). They are not effective causes and cannot produce further births. A burnt cloth cannot serve the purpose of the cloth.Those actions which are done with egoism and desire (expectation of fruits) will produce fruits or results. In the case of a wise man? the seeds of evil? viz.? ignorance? egoism? attachment? etc.? are burnt by the fire of knowledge. Therefore he cannot have rirths.The Karmas (Prarabdha) which have already started their operation by producing this present birth do not perish? notwithstanding the dawn of the knowledge of the Self. When an arrow is once sent out from a bow at a mark? it pierces the mark and continues to act till it falls to the ground when the full force with which it was dischared is exhausted. Even so the Prarabdha Karma which has given rise to the body continues to act till the inherent force is fully exhausted? although the sage has attained Selfrealisation through his body. But he is not in the least affected by this? because he has no identification with the body? and as he has identified himelf with Brahman or the Absolute. If a carbuncle or cancer arises in the body on account of Prarabdha Karma? he will not suffer a bit as he has risen above bodyconsciousness? and as he stands as a witness of his body. But a bystander or a spectator wrongly imagines that the liberated sage is also suffering like an ordinary worldly man. This is a serious and sad mistake. From the viewpoint of the liberated sage he has neither body nor Prarabdha Karma.An arrow that is placed ready on the bow but not discharged with force can be withdrawn. Similarly? the Karmas which have not begun to generate their fruits or effects can be neutralised or destroyed by the knowledge of the Self. Therefore it is proper to say that the liberated sage is not born again. He will not take another body when the body through which he attained knowledge perishes. As ignorance? the cause of this body? is destroyed by the knowledge of the Self? birth? the effect of ignorance? is also destroyed. As one takes birth through virtuous and vicious actions? a sage will not take birth as his virtuous and visiouc actions (the whole Sanchita or accumulated Karmas of his previous births) are destroyed by the knowledge of the Self. The Karmas done by him after he has attained Selfrealisation cannot touch him at all as he has neither egoism (agency) nor desires. (Cf.XIII.32)

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.24 He who knows thus the Person and Nature along with the alities will not be born again, in whatever way he may live.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.24 He who understands God and Nature along with her qualities, whatever be his condition in life, he comes not again to earth.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 4.9 BG 8.16 BG 15.20 SB 3.25.43 SB 11.24.29 SB 10.14.58 CC Madhya 20.140 CC Madhya 22.41 CC Madhya 24.196 Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 3.8Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 3.2.9
Concepts
Maya
One who understands this philosophy of nature, the soul, and the modes — whatever his condition — does not take birth again.
Practical Applications
  • Trust philosophy's liberating power when truly grasped.
  • Don't underestimate intellectual clarity as a step.
  • Pair philosophy with practice for full liberation.
Reflection Questions
  • What philosophy have I read but not really grasped?
  • What would real grasping require?

A traveler who has finally read the map correctly will not lose his way again, no matter what road he takes. Understand prakṛti, puruṣa, and the guṇas, and the soul will not be born again, no matter what circumstance it finds itself in at death. Right understanding is itself the road home.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.25

↗
ధ్యానేనాత్మని పశ్యన్తి కేచిదాత్మానమాత్మనా । అన్యే సాంఖ్యేన యోగేన కర్మయోగేన చాపరే ॥ ౨౫ ॥
dhyānenātmani paśyanti
[dhyaanenaatmani pashyanti]
kecid ātmānam ātmanā
[kechid aatmaanam aatmanaa]
anye sāṅkhyena yogena
[anye saankhyena yogena]
karma-yogena cāpare
[karma-yogena chaapare]
dhyānena — by meditation ātmani — within the self paśyanti — see kecit — some ātmānam — the Supersoul ātmanā — by the mind anye — others sāṅkhyena — of philosophical discussion yogena — by the yoga system karma - yogena — by activities without fruitive desire ca — also apare — others .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
dhyānenātmani paśyanti
dhyānena
by meditation
ātmani
within the self
paśyanti
see
kecid ātmānam ātmanā
kecit
some
ātmānam
the Supersoul
ātmanā
by the mind
anye sāṅkhyena yogena
anye
others
sāṅkhyena
of philosophical discussion
yogena
by the yoga system
karma-yogena cāpare
karma - yogena
by activities without fruitive desire
ca
also
apare
others .
  • dhyānena — by meditation
    The first path named — aṣṭāṅga-yoga, the contemplative direct seeing of the Paramātmā within. The path of the rare yogī.
  • sāṅkhyena — of philosophical discussion
    The second path — the analytical discrimination between matter and spirit. Sāṅkhya here means the *discriminative-knowledge* path, not necessarily the school of Kapila.
  • yogena — by the yoga system
    Paired with sāṅkhyena — together they name the jñāna-yoga path of cultivated discrimination.
  • karma - yogena — by activities without fruitive desire
    The third path — work offered without attachment to fruit. The path of Arjuna, of Janaka, of every active person who cannot retreat into meditation.
  • kecit — some
    Indefinite plural — "a few here and there." The contemplative path is for some, not for all. Honest about its rarity.
  • apare — others
    Each path gets its own pronoun — kecit, anye, apare. Three groups, three roads, one destination. The grammar honors the diversity.
Some perceive the Supersoul within themselves through meditation, others through the cultivation of knowledge, and still others through working without fruitive desires.

The Lord informs Arjuna that the conditioned souls can be divided into two classes as far as man’s search for self-realization is concerned. Those who are atheists, agnostics and skeptics are beyond the sense of spiritual understanding. But there are others, who are faithful in their understanding of spiritual life, and they are called introspective devotees, philosophers, and workers who have renounced fruitive results. Those who always try to establish the doctrine of monism are also counted among the atheists and agnostics. In other words, only the devotees of the Supreme Personality of Godhead are best situated in spiritual understanding, because they understand that beyond this material nature are the spiritual world and the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is expanded as the Paramātmā, the Supersoul in everyone, the all-pervading Godhead. Of course there are those who try to understand the Supreme Absolute Truth by cultivation of knowledge, and they can be counted in the class of the faithful. The Sāṅkhya philosophers analyze this material world into twenty-four elements, and they place the individual soul as the twenty-fifth item. When they are able to understand the nature of the individual soul to be transcendental to the material elements, they are able to understand also that above the individual soul there is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is the twenty-sixth element. Thus gradually they also come to the standard of devotional service in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Those who work without fruitive results are also perfect in their attitude. They are given a chance to advance to the platform of devotional service in Kṛṣṇa consciousness. Here it is stated that there are some people who are pure in consciousness and who try to find out the Supersoul by meditation, and when they discover the Supersoul within themselves, they become transcendentally situated. Similarly, there are others who also try to understand the Supreme Soul by cultivation of knowledge, and there are others who cultivate the haṭha-yoga system and who try to satisfy the Supreme Personality of Godhead by childish activities.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
25. Some see Paramātmā through meditation in bhakti-yoga. Others practice jṣāna-yoga or aṣṭāṅga-yoga, and others practice niṣkāma-karma-yoga.
Commentary

Alternative methods are mentioned in two verses. Some devotees, by contemplation of the Lord (dhyānena) in the mind (atmani) without help from any other process, spontaneously (ātmanā), not by any other process except bhakti, see the Paramātmā. This is understood from a later verse: bhaktyā mām abhijānāti (BG 18.55), only by devotion am I known. Others (anye), jṣānīs, by distinguishing soul from body (sāṅkhyena), and others (apare), yogīs , by aṣṭāṅga-yoga (yogena), and others by niṣkāma-karma (karma-yogena), see Paramātmā. In this regard, jṣāna-yoga, aṣṭāṅga-yoga and niṣkāma-karma-yoga are successive causes of each other and not direct causes of seeing Paramātmā. That is because their nature is sattvic (and thus the result can only be sattvic) but the nature of Paramātmā is beyond the guṇas. Moreover, it is said by the Lord: jṣānaṁ ca mayi sannyaset A self-realized person who has cultivated scriptural knowledge up to the point of enlightenment and who is free from impersonal speculation, understanding the material universe to be simply illusion, should surrender unto Me both that knowledge and the means by which he achieved it. SB 11.19.1 bhakyāham ekayā grāhyaḥ Only by practicing unalloyed devotional service with full faith in Me can one obtain Me, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. S 11.14.21 Thus, after giving up jṣāna, indicated in the first of the verses quoted, becoming free from jṣāna, one sees Paramātmā by bhakti alone, indicated in the second verse.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
25. Some see paramātmā through meditation. Others see Him by jṣāna yoga, astāṅga yoga and niṣkāma karma yoga.
Commentary

For attaining the great Lord, various practices are described in two verses. Some people, with pure consciousness, directly see Me, the great Lord (ātmānam), situated in the mind (ātmani), by meditation with knowledge as a secondary element (dhyānena), without help form anything else (ātmanā). Others see Me by sāṅkhya, by knowledge with meditation as a secondary element. Others see Me by aṣṭāṅga yoga with knowledge as a secondary element. Others see Me by niṣkāma karma, with knowledge and meditation included in it. [Note: The point seems to be that all these methods need some jṣāna in order to reach the realization of paramātmā.]

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

The Supersoul is jneyam, is the object of knowledge, He is the Purusa. This verse shows three different ways to attain Him. This was so much discussed in the first six chapters. The idea is that through yoga or dhyana (meditation) or through jnana (the cultivation of knowledge) and working without fruitive result ,karma (niskama karma yoga), the only goal to be obtained is the Supersoul.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

One can achieve this understanding (Texts 13.20 – 13.23) through various types of yogas

Some perceive the Supersoul through meditation (Dhyana)
Others through the cultivation of knowledge (Sankhya-yoga)
Still others through working without fruitive desire (Karma-yoga) LINK BETWEEN TEXTS 13.25 & 13.26: Can one advance if he cannot meditate, pursue sankhya or practice niskama-karma-yoga.

Focus of Learning

(a) Lord explains two classes of conditioned souls (Based on search for self-realization)

Faithful in spiritual life – Introspective devotees, philosophers and workers who have renounced fruitive results
Atheists, agnostics and skeptics are beyond the sense of spiritual understanding
It also includes those who establish the doctrine of monism

(b) Devotees of the Lord are best situated in spiritual understanding – Because

They know that beyond the material nature are spiritual world and Supreme Personality of Godhead, who expands as Paramatma

(c) Sankhya philosophers are also in the class of faithful

They analyze material world in twenty-four elements
They place the soul as the twenty-fifth element – gradually realize soul as transcendental to material elements
Realise the entity above the soul is Supersoul – the twenty-sixth element
Finally comes to devotional service in Krishna consciousness

(d) Renounced workers are also in the category of faithful and are perfect in their attitude

Also given a chance to progress in Krishna consciousness

(a) This verse indicates the result of knowledge – Knowledge of truly understanding the relationship

between soul and Supersoul

Liberation and return to the spiritual world

(b) The purpose of knowledge – To understand how the living entity has fallen into this material

world in a precarious condition

(c) Understand your position

Understand by personal endeavor in association with guru, sadhu and sastra
Revert to Krishna consciousness by understanding Bhagavad-gita as it is explained by the Supreme Personality of Godhead
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.25 Dhyanena, through meditation: Meditation means contemplation (on the Self) after withdrawing into the mind with concentration the organs of hearing etc. from the objects like sound etc., and then withdrawing the mind into the indwelling conscious Self. Thus, from the citation of such illustrations as, 'the crane meditates, as it were, 'the earth meditates, as it were; the mountains meditate, as it were' (Ch. 7.6.1), it follows that meditation is a constant and uninterrupted current of thought like a line of pouring oil. Through that meditation, kecit, some yogis; pasyanti, realize; the indwelling conscious atmanam, Self; atmani, in (their) intellect; atmana, with the help of the internal organ that has been purified by meditation. Anye, others; sankhyena yogena, through Sankhya-yoga: Sankhya means thinking, 'These alities, viz sattva, rajas and tamas, are objects of my perception; I am the Self, distinct from them, a witness of their functions, eternal and different from the alities.' This Sankhya is Yoga. [By Sankhya is meant that knowledge which arises from the foregoing reflection. This knowledge is itself called Yoga (concentration of mind) inasmuch as it is similar to Yoga in leading to the realization of the Self.] Through that they realize the Self with the help of the internal organ. This is how it is to be construed. And anye, others; karma-yogena, through Karma-yoga-action itself being the Yoga: Action performed with the idea of dedication to God is figuratively called Yoga since it leads to Yoga. (others realize) with the help of that (action), through purification of the mind and rise of Knowledge. [The best among the yogis are competent for meditation (dhyana); the modiocre for reflection (Sankhya); and the lowest for Karma-yoga.]
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.25 The different type of Yogis are described herein: (1) Some with perfect Yoga perceive the self (Atmanam) in the body with the mind (Atmana) by meditation. (2) Others with imperfect Yoga see the self, with mind rendered fit for Yoga, by Sankhya Yoga, namely, Jnana Yoga, (3) Still others, (a) unalified to practise Jnana Yoga, and (b alified but preferring an easier method, and (c) also distinguished persons like Janaka - all these perceive the self after being alified for Yoga by Karma Yoga which contains within itself knowledge (Jnana).
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.25 See Comment under 13.26
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.25 Some by meditation behold the Self in the self by the self, others by the Yoga of knowledge, and still others by the Yoga of action.
Commentary

13.25 ध्यानेन by meditation? आत्मनि in the self? पश्यन्ति behold? केचित् some? आत्मानम् the Self? आत्मना by the self? अन्ये others? सांख्येन योगेन by the Yoga of knowledge (by the Sankhya Yoga)? कर्मयोगेन by Karma Yoga? च and? अपरे others.Commentary There are severla paths to reach the knowledge of the Self according to the nature or temperament and capacity of the individual. The first path is the Yoga of meditation taught by Maharshi Patanjali. The Raja Yogins behold the Supreme Self in the self (Buddhi) by the self (purified mind). Meditation is a continous and unbroken flow of thought of the Self like the flow of oil from one vessel to another. Through concentration hearing and the other senses are withdrawn into the mind. The senses are not allowed to run towards their respective sensual objects. They are kept under proper check and control through the process of abstraction. Then the mind itself is made to abide in the Self through constant meditation on the Self. The mind is refined or purified by meditation. The mind that is rendered pure will naturally move towards the Self. It is not attracted by nor is it attached to the sensual objects.Sankhya Yoga is Jnana Yoga. The aspirant does Vichara (analysis? reflection) and separates himself from the three alities of Nature? the three bodies and the five sheaths and identifies himself with the witness (Self). He thinks and feels? I am distinct from the three alities. I am the silent witness. I am unattached. I am nondoer. I am nonenjoyer. I am immortal? eternal? selfexistent? selfluminous? indivisible? unborn and unchanging.The Karma Yogi surrenders his actions and their fruits to the Lord. He has Isvarapana Buddhi (intelligence that offers everything to God). This produces purity of mind which gives rise to knowledge of the Self. Karma Yoga brings about concentration of the mind through the purification of the mind. It leads to Yoga through the purification of the mind and so it is spoken of as Yoga itself.Those who practise Sankhya Yoga are the highest class of spiritual aspirants. Those who practise the Yoga of meditation are aspirants of the middling class. Those who practise Karma Yoga are the lowest class of spiritual aspirants. The aspirants of the middling and lowest class soon become aspirants of the highest class through rigorous Sadhana or spiritual practices. (Cf.V.5VI.46)

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.25 Through meditation some realize the Self in (their) intellect with the help of the internal organ; others through Sankhya-yoga, and others through Karma-yoga.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.25 Some realise the Supreme by meditating, by its aid, on the Self within, others by pure reason, others by right action.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Ahimsa (Non-violence / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)
Related verses
BG 6.10 BG 4.18 BG 5.4 SB 11.20.6 SB 3.32.32 SB 11.13.27 CC Madhya 19.149 CC Madhya 24.106 CC Madhya 25.103 Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.3Kaṭha Upaniṣad 1.2.23
Some perceive the Supersoul within by meditation; others by cultivation of knowledge; others by working without fruitive desires.
Practical Applications
  • Honor the multiple paths and find your fit.
  • Don't envy those whose path differs.
  • Work your path with fidelity.
Reflection Questions
  • Which path fits my nature?
  • Where am I trying to imitate a different path?

Three pilgrims set out for the same shrine. One takes the mountain road through silence; one the river road through chant; one the forest road through service. They arrive in the same courtyard at the same hour. The shrine is one; the roads are three. Choose your road by the gait of your feet, not by anyone else's praise of their own.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.26

↗
అన్యే త్వేవమజానన్త: శ్రుత్వాన్యేభ్య ఉపాసతే । తేఽపి చాతితరన్త్యేవ మృత్యుం శ్రుతిపరాయణా: ॥ ౨౬ ॥
anye tv evam ajānantaḥ
[anye tv evam ajaanantah]
śrutvānyebhya upāsate
[shrutvaanyebhya upaasate]
te ’pi cātitaranty eva
[te ’pi chaatitaranty eva]
mṛtyuṁ śruti-parāyaṇāḥ
[mrityum shruti-paraayanaah]
anye — others tu — but evam — thus ajānantaḥ — without spiritual knowledge śrutvā — by hearing anyebhyaḥ — from others upāsate — begin to worship te — they api — also ca — and atitaranti — transcend eva — certainly mṛtyum — the path of death śruti - parāyaṇāḥ — inclined to the process of hearing .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
anye tv evam ajānantaḥ
anye
others
tu
but
evam
thus
ajānantaḥ
without spiritual knowledge
śrutvānyebhya upāsate
śrutvā
by hearing
anyebhyaḥ
from others
upāsate
begin to worship
te ’pi cātitaranty eva
te
they
api
also
ca
and
atitaranti
transcend
eva
certainly
mṛtyuṁ śruti-parāyaṇāḥ
mṛtyum
the path of death
śruti - parāyaṇāḥ
inclined to the process of hearing .
  • ajānantaḥ — without spiritual knowledge
    Present participle. Kṛṣṇa specifically honors those who *do not* possess prior knowledge. Hearing is not a consolation prize — it is a complete path in its own right.
  • śrutvā — by hearing
    Gerund from √śru. The first of the navadhā-bhakti list. The Vedānta literature calls itself śruti for this reason — what is *heard* carries the tradition.
  • anyebhyaḥ — from others
    Ablative plural. From sādhus, from the guru, from devotees. The *source* of hearing matters. Anyebhyaḥ implicitly requires that the others be authentic — hearing from anyone is not the path; hearing from devotees is.
  • upāsate — begin to worship
    Upa- + √ās — "sitting near, attending upon." Hearing is not passive consumption; it becomes upāsana, devotional service. The faithful hearer becomes the worshiper.
  • atitaranti — transcend
    Ati- + √tṝ — "to cross over." The same root as tīrtha (a crossing-place). Hearing is itself a tīrtha; the listener crosses the ocean of birth and death by audition alone.
  • śruti - parāyaṇāḥ — inclined to the process of hearing
    Compound: śruti (hearing) + parāyaṇa (devoted, given over to). The whole life-orientation is hearing. This is a vocation, not a hobby.
Again there are those who, although not conversant in spiritual knowledge, begin to worship the Supreme Person upon hearing about Him from others. Because of their tendency to hear from authorities, they also transcend the path of birth and death.

This verse is particularly applicable to modern society because in modern society there is practically no education in spiritual matters. Some of the people may appear to be atheistic or agnostic or philosophical, but actually there is no knowledge of philosophy. As for the common man, if he is a good soul, then there is a chance for advancement by hearing. This hearing process is very important. Lord Caitanya, who preached Kṛṣṇa consciousness in the modern world, gave great stress to hearing because if the common man simply hears from authoritative sources he can progress, especially, according to Lord Caitanya, if he hears the transcendental vibration Hare Kṛṣṇa, Hare Kṛṣṇa, Kṛṣṇa Kṛṣṇa, Hare Hare/ Hare Rāma, Hare Rāma, Rāma Rāma, Hare Hare. It is stated, therefore, that all men should take advantage of hearing from realized souls and gradually become able to understand everything. The worship of the Supreme Lord will then undoubtedly take place. Lord Caitanya has said that in this age no one needs to change his position, but one should give up the endeavor to understand the Absolute Truth by speculative reasoning. One should learn to become the servant of those who are in knowledge of the Supreme Lord. If one is fortunate enough to take shelter of a pure devotee, hear from him about self-realization and follow in his footsteps, one will be gradually elevated to the position of a pure devotee. In this verse particularly, the process of hearing is strongly recommended, and this is very appropriate. Although the common man is often not as capable as so-called philosophers, faithful hearing from an authoritative person will help one transcend this material existence and go back to Godhead, back to home.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
26. Others who perform worship, though not knowing, but hearing from others, also surpass death, being intent on hearing.
Commentary

Others, who worship Paramātmā, hearing talks from various sources, also surpass death.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
26. Others with faith in the Vedas, though not knowing these methods, hear about them from others, and then worship Me. They also surpass death.
Commentary

Others, though not knowing these methods, having faith in hearing the topics of the Veda (śruti parāyaṇāḥ), are thus qualified. Hearing those methods from speakers of the methods (anyebhyaḥ), they worship that great Lord. Even they, from that association (ca), gradually, after understanding and practicing (ca), definitely (eva) surpass death. The great power of hearing the subject of the Lord is here shown.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

'They transcend', why? Because they hear with faith. That is what means to hear from authorities ‑ to hear with faith and without any material desires. Therefore, just by that process of hearing with faith, without material desires, they will attain liberation, they will transcend the path of birth and death. (DS) For those who cannot cultivate knowledge or practice yoga, or renunciation of the fruits of work, in order to attain the Supersoul, for them an alternative is given herein: 'just by hearing of Him from authorities.

[F. JNANA CAKSUSA: THE VISION OF KNOWLEDGE (13. 27‑35) 1. Everything that we see is a combination of the field and the knower of the field. (27) ]

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Bhakti is the easiest and the best path to understand this science

This verse talks about those who, although not conversant with spiritual knowledge:
They begin to worship the Supreme Person upon hearing about him from others
Because of tendency to hear, they also transcend the path of birth and death
Conclusion: Hearing with faith from authorities has great potency
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.26 Anye tu, others again; ajanantah, who do not know the Self as described above; evam, thus, even in one of these alternative ways; upasate, take to thinking, take to reflection, being imbued with faith; srutva, after hearing; anyhyah, from others, from the teachers, having been told, 'Think only of this.' Te api ca, they, too; sruti-parayanah, who are devoted to hearing, to whom hearing is the supreme course, the best discipline for starting on the path to Liberation, i.e., those who, themselves lacking in discrimination, accept only others' advice as most authoritative; eva, certainly; ati-taranti, overcome; mrtyum, death, i.e. the mundane existence which is fraught with death. The implication is; It goes without saying that those discriminating people who are idenpendent in the application of the valid means of knowledge, cross over death. That the knowledge of the identity of the Knower of the field and God leads to Liberation has been stated in, '৷৷.by realizing which one attains Immortality' (12). For what reason is it so? To point out that reason the (next) verse is begun:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.26 But some, namely, those who are not alified for Karma Yoga etc., for realising the self, listen to Jnanins who know the truth, and meditate on the self through Karma Yoga, etc. - they too pass beyond death. It means that those who are devoted to what they hear only, even they, intent on hearing and devoid of evils, begin in due course, the practice of Karma Yoga etc., and pass beyond death. By the term 'too' (api), the difference in levels is made out. Now, in order to teach the contemplation on the distinctness of the self conjoined with the Prakrti, he says that all entities, movables and immovables, are the product of combination between the conscient and the non-conscient:
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.25-26 Dhyanena etc., Anye etc. A knowledge of this sort is the main. [For this end] some practise religious meditation of the Self as Self; others [try] by means of the Sankhya (knowledge) mentioned already (Ch. V, 5ff), while still others [strive] through action. Still others, bent upon hearing [from the preceptors etc.] practise the religious meditation as they have heard, even though they do not themselves know, (have) the knowledge of this kind. They too cross over the death, i.e., the cycyle of birth and death. What is conveyed here is this : The category Bhagavat, if mentally reflected upon by one means or the other, does transport across [the ocean of death circle]. Therefore , let one remain in this fashion by all means.
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.26 Others also, not knowing thus, worship, having heard of It from others; they, too, cross beyond death, regarding what they have heard as the Supreme refuge.
Commentary

13.26 अन्ये others? तु indeed? एवम् thus? अजानन्तः not knowing? श्रुत्वा having heard? अन्येभ्यः from others? उपासते worship? ते they? अपि also? च and? अतितरन्ति cross beyond? एव even? मृत्युम् death? श्रुतिपरायणाः regarding what they have heard as the Supreme refuge.Commentary The three paths? viz.? the Yoga of meditation? the Yoga of knowledge? and the Yoga of action to attain the knowledge of the Self were described in the previous verse. In this verse the Yoga of worship is described.Some who are ignorant of the methods described in the previous verse listen to the teachings of the spiritual preceptors regarding this great Truth or the Self with intense and unshakable faith? solely depending upon the authority of others instructions? and through constant remembrance and contemplation of them attain immortality. They are devoted to their preceptor. Some study the books written by realised seers? stick with great faith to the teachings contained therein and live according to them. They also overcome death. Whichever path one follows? one eventually attains the knowledge of the Self and final liberation from birth and death? -- salvation (Moksha). There are several paths to suit aspirants of different temperaments and eipments.Freeing oneself from ignorance with its effects through the knowledge of the Self? is crossing the Samsara or attaining immortality or overcoming death or obtaining release or salvation.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.26 Others, agian, who do not know thus, take to thinking after hearing from others; they, too, who are devoted to hearing, certainly overcome death.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.26 Others again, having no direct knowledge but only hearing from others, nevertheless worship, and they, too, if true to the teachings, cross the sea of death.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Ahimsa (Non-violence / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
Others, hearing about the Supreme from others, begin to worship Him — they too cross beyond birth and death by faithful hearing.
Practical Applications
  • Recognize hearing as a complete path on its own.
  • Don't disqualify yourself if you can't meditate or philosophize — hear.
  • Cultivate śravaṇam as primary practice.
Reflection Questions
  • What is my śravaṇam discipline?
  • What would deepening hearing offer?

A man too weak to climb the mountain himself sits by the road and listens, as travelers returning from the summit describe the view. By the end of many evenings he can sketch the summit better than some who climbed. Hearing alone has carried him. So the simple soul, hearing of Kṛṣṇa from devotees, transcends death.

Parīkṣit hears the Bhāgavatam

Cursed to die within seven days, Mahārāja Parīkṣit sat by the Ganges and heard the Bhāgavatam from Śukadeva Gosvāmī. He did not meditate. He did not philosophize. He listened.

At the appointed hour, when the snake-bird Takṣaka came, Parīkṣit's mind was so absorbed in hari-kathā that death had nothing to take. The Bhāgavatam frames its entire structure around this listener. Śravaṇa alone, the verse promises, ferries the soul across mṛtyu — and Parīkṣit's seven days are the demonstration.

📝 My note

Section 5 (13.27–13.35)
JNANA-CHAKSHU: THE VISION OF KNOWLEDGE
Section overview
Those who see the distinction between the body, its owner and the Supersoul, and who recognize the process of liberation, can attain the Supreme goal (13.35)

LINK BETWEEN SECTION IV & SECTION V: In this chapter, the Lord described how to understand the

position of prakriti, purusa, ksetra, ksetra-jna, jnana and jneyan. Now He will describe the vision of one

who can understand them in the proper perspective

Bhagavad-gītā 13.27

↗
యావత్సఞ్జాయతే కిఞ్చిత్సత్త్వం స్థావరజఙ్గమమ్ । క్షేత్రక్షేత్రజ్ఞసంయోగాత్తద్విద్ధి భరతర్షభ ॥ ౨౭ ॥
yāvat sañjāyate kiñcit
[yaavat sanjaayate kinchit]
sattvaṁ sthāvara-jaṅgamam
[sattvam sthaavara-jangamam]
kṣetra-kṣetrajña-saṁyogāt
[kshetra-kshetrajna-samyogaat]
tad viddhi bharatarṣabha
[tad viddhi bharatarshabha]
yāvat — whatever sañjāyate — comes into being kiñcit — anything sattvam — existence sthāvara — not moving jaṅgamam — moving kṣetra — of the body kṣetra - jña — and the knower of the body saṁyogāt — by the union between tat viddhi — you must know it bharata - ṛṣabha — O chief of the Bhāratas .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
yāvat sañjāyate kiñcit
yāvat
whatever
sañjāyate
comes into being
kiñcit
anything
sattvaṁ sthāvara-jaṅgamam
sattvam
existence
sthāvara
not moving
jaṅgamam
moving
kṣetra-kṣetrajña-saṁyogāt
kṣetra
of the body
kṣetra - jña
and the knower of the body
saṁyogāt
by the union between
tad viddhi bharatarṣabha
tat viddhi
you must know it
bharata - ṛṣabha
O chief of the Bhāratas .
  • yāvat — whatever
    Sweeping inclusive — *whatever* comes into being. No exception. The principle covers gods, humans, animals, plants, microbes.
  • sthāvara — not moving
    Trees, stones, fungi. Even the seemingly inert is a union of field and knower. The Gītā's vision of life is far wider than the modern biological one.
  • jaṅgamam — moving
    Animals, humans, gods. Paired with sthāvara to leave no entity unincluded.
  • kṣetra - jña — and the knower of the body
    The chapter's central term, returning at the close paired with kṣetra as the unifying formula. Every being is *this* union of field and knower. The whole theology of equal vision rests on this pairing.
  • saṁyogāt — by the union between
    Ablative — "out of the union." Saṁ- + √yuj. Existence is born from the *yoking* of soul and matter. Even Brahmā's creative act is finally just this yoking.
O chief of the Bhāratas, know that whatever you see in existence, both the moving and the nonmoving, is only a combination of the field of activities and the knower of the field.

Both material nature and the living entity, which were existing before the creation of the cosmos, are explained in this verse. Whatever is created is but a combination of the living entity and material nature. There are many manifestations like trees, mountains and hills which are not moving, and there are many existences which are moving, and all of them are but combinations of material nature and the superior nature, the living entity. Without the touch of the superior nature, the living entity, nothing can grow. The relationship between material nature and spiritual nature is eternally going on, and this combination is effected by the Supreme Lord; therefore He is the controller of both the superior and inferior natures. The material nature is created by Him, and the superior nature is placed in this material nature, and thus all these activities and manifestations take place.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
27. Know that all entities, whether moving or non-moving, high or low, appear from the combination for matter and jīva, O best of Bharata’s lineage.
Commentary

From this verse till the end, the Lord expands on the meaning of what He already spoke. Know that all living entities (sattvam), whether low or high, non-moving or moving, are born from the combination of field and knower of the field.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
27. Know that all entities, whether moving or non-moving, high or low, appear from the combination of matter and jīva, O best of Bharata.
Commentary

The Lord speaks of extent of the creation of the living entities that takes place through a combination of the jīva and prakṛti, in order to search out how to separate the two which have been associating since beginningless time. To whatever extent living entities (sattvam) exist, in high or low bodies, in moving and non-moving forms, know that they appear from a combination of the field and the knower of the field. Know they arise from the combination of the two knowers of the field with prakṛti. The Lord, controlling the jīva and prakṛti, puts them in motion. Jīva and prakṛti then mutually bind themselves up. It is understood that the “creation” of living entities in this universe takes place by appearance of their material bodies.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

In this Section the Lord explains how to separate the ksetra and ksetrajna. This is going to summarize everything that is needed to transcend 'thinking oneself identifyied with his 'playground'. (DS) Even though the material energy and the spiritual soul are described as beginningless, that doesn't mean that their relat ionship is eternal.

[2. Neither the Supersoul nor the soul within the body are destroyed. (29) ]

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Realised person can distinguish between spirit and matter in all circumstances

Whatever one sees in material existence, moving or non-moving is only a combination of the field of activities and the knower of the field
This verse explains that all species are a combination of material nature and living entity (purport)
Combination is effected by the Supreme Lord, controller of both, Superior and inferior energies

PRACTICAL APPLICATION SECTION V

One who can see Supersoul, living entities and material nature

in their proper perspective, sees through the eyes of knowledge

Focus of Learning

(a) This verse especially applies to modern society

Because in modern society – There is practically no education in spiritual matters
Some people appear atheistic, agnostic or philosophical, but actually they have no knowledge of philosophy

(b) Qualification – Any common man, if a good soul – has a chance of advancing by hearing

(c) Lord Caitanya stresses “hearing” as important process

Simply hear from authority and especially hearing Hare Krishna Maha-mantra
He also recommends as per SB. 10.14.3 that there is no need to change your position but
Only give up the endeavor to know Absolute Truth by speculative reasonings, and
Learn to become servant of those in knowledge of the Supreme Lord

(d) Benediction

If one takes advantage of hearing from realized souls, he gradually understands everything
Automatically leads to Supreme Lord’s worship

(e) Conclusive advice

By good fortune, take shelter of pure devotee
Hear from him and follow his footsteps
Thus gradual elevation to pure devotion
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.27 Bharatarsabha, O scion of the Bharata dynasty; yavat kincit, whatever; sattvam, object;-as to whether they are without exception the Lord says-sthavara-jangamam, moving or non-moving; sanjayate, comes into being; viddhi, know; tat, that; as originating ksetra-ksetrajna-samyogat, from the association of the field and the Knower of the field. Objection: What, again, is meant by this 'association of the field and the Knower of the field'? Since the Knower of the field is partless like space, therefore Its conjunction with the field cannot be a kind of relationship like coming together of a rope and a pot through the contact of their parts. Nor can it be an intimate and inseparable relation as between a thread and a cloth, since it is not admitted that the field and the Knower of the field are mutually related by way of being cause and effect. Reply: The answer is: The association of the field and the Knower of the field-which are the object and the subject, respectively, and are of different natures-is in the form of superimposition of each on the other an also of their alities, as a conseence of the absence of discrimination between the real natures of the field and the Knower of the field. This is like the association of a rope, nacre, etc. with the superimposed snake, silver, etc. owing to the absence of discrimination between them. This association of the field and the Knower of the field in the form of superimposition is described as false knowledge. After having known the distinction between and the characteristics of the field and the Knower of the field according to the scriptures, and having separated, like a stalk from the Munjagrass, the above-described Knower of the field from the field whose characteristics have been shown earlier, he who realizes the Knowable (i.e. the Knower of the field)-which, in accordance with 'That is neither called being nor non-being' (12), is devoid of all distinctions created by adjuncts- as identical with Brahman; and he who has the firm realization that the field is surely unreal like an elephant created by magic, a thing seen in a dream, an imaginary city seen in the sky, etc., and it appears as though real-for him false knowledge becomes eradicated, since it is opposed to the right knowledge described above. Since the cause of his rirth has been eliminated. therefore what was said in, 'He who knows thus the Person and Nature along with the alities৷৷.', that the man of realization is not born again (23), has been a reasonable statement. In 'He৷৷.will not be born again' (23) has been stated the result of right knowledge, which is the absence of birth owing to the destruction of ignorance etc., the seeds of worldly existence. The cause of birth, viz the association of the field and the Knower of the field brought about by ignorance, has also been stated. Hence, although right knowledge, which is the remover of that ignorance, has been spoken of, still it is being stated over again in other words:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.27 Whatever being is born, whether it be movable or stationary, it is born only from the mutual combination of the Ksetra and Ksetrajna. The sense is that it is born only from this combination, i.e., is born as a compound of the two and never in their separateness.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.27 Yavat etc. Whatever is a thing, whether moving or unmoving - all this is born not as something altogether different from the Field and the Field-sensitizer. Therefore -
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.27 Wherever a being is born, whether unmoving or moving, know thou, O best of the Bharatas (Arjuna), that it is from the union between the field and its knower.
Commentary

13.27 यावत् whatever? सञ्जायते is born? किञ्चित् any? सत्त्वम् being? स्थावरजङ्गमम् the unmoving and the moving? क्षेत्रक्षेत्रज्ञसंयोगात् from the union between the field and the knower of the field? तत् that? विद्धि know? भरतर्षभ O best of the Bharatas.Commentary O Arjuna? remember that whatever is born? unmoving or moving? know thou that to be done to the union between the body and the Self.The knower of the field is like the ether without parts. Therefore? there cannot be a union of the field and the knower of the field through contact of each others parts like the contact of the drum and the stick or a rope and a vessel. There cannot be the inseparable connection between them like the connection that exists between the head and the neck? or the arm and the shoulder? because the field and its knower are not related to each other as cause and effect.Then? what sort of union is there between the field and its knower It is of the nature of mutual superimposition or illusion. This consists in confounding the one with the other as well as their attributes? like the union of a rope with a snake? and motherofpearl with silver? on account of lack of discrimination of their real nature. The attributes of the Self are transferred to the body and vice versa. The insentient body is mistaken for the sentient Self. The activities of the body or Nature are transferred to the silent? actionless Self. This sort of illusion or superimposition will disappear when one attains knowledge of the Self? when he is able to separate the field from the knower like the reed from the Munja grass? when he realises that Brahman which is free from all limiting adjuncts is his own immortal Self? and that the field is a mere appearance like the snake in the rope? silver in motherofpearl? an imaginary city in the sky? and is like an object seen in a dream or like the horses? places and forests projected by ajuggler. A sage who has the knowledge of the Self is not born again.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.27 O scion of the Bharata dynasty, whatever object, moving or non-moving, comes into being, know that to be from the association of the field and the Knower of the field!
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.27 Wherever life is seen in things movable or immovable, it is the joint product of Matter and Spirit.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 7.6 BG 10.39 BG 13.1-2 SB 1.5.20 SB 11.7.7 SB 2.10.32 CC Ādi 5.62 CC Madhya 20.270 CC Madhya 20.276 Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 1.9Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 2.1.1
Whatever is born — moving or unmoving — know it is from the union of field and knower.
Practical Applications
  • See every being as a union of field and knower.
  • Don't forget the soul-presence in any creature.
  • Use this seeing as compassion-training.
Reflection Questions
  • Whose 'knower' have I overlooked, treating them as mere field?
  • What does restored vision require?

Every embroidered cloth is two things at once — the thread (knower) and the pattern (field). Neither alone is the embroidery. So every being you encounter, from the ant on the step to the elder at the temple gate, is this same union: a soul woven into a body. See both threads and you see truly.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.28

↗
సమం సర్వేషు భూతేషు తిష్ఠన్తం పరమేశ్వరమ్ । వినశ్యత్స్వవినశ్యన్తం య: పశ్యతి స పశ్యతి ॥ ౨౮ ॥
samaṁ sarveṣu bhūteṣu
[samam sarveshu bhooteshu]
tiṣṭhantaṁ parameśvaram
[tishthantam parameshvaram]
vinaśyatsv avinaśyantaṁ
[vinashyatsv avinashyantam]
yaḥ paśyati sa paśyati
[yah pashyati sa pashyati]
samam — equally sarveṣu — in all bhūteṣu — living entities tiṣṭhan tam — residing parama - īśvaram — the Supersoul vinaśyatsu — in the destructible avinaśyantam — not destroyed yaḥ — anyone who paśyati — sees saḥ — he paśyati — actually sees .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
samaṁ sarveṣu bhūteṣu
samam
equally
sarveṣu
in all
bhūteṣu
living entities
tiṣṭhantaṁ parameśvaram
tiṣṭhan tam
residing
parama - īśvaram
the Supersoul
vinaśyatsv avinaśyantaṁ
vinaśyatsu
in the destructible
avinaśyantam
not destroyed
yaḥ paśyati sa paśyati
yaḥ
anyone who
paśyati
sees
saḥ
he
paśyati
actually sees .
  • samam — equally
    Adverb. *Equally* — not more in one being, less in another. The Supersoul does not favor sattva-dominated bodies; He stands in all alike.
  • bhūteṣu — living entities
    Locative plural — "in all beings." Paired with sarveṣu (in all). The doctrine's whole demand: *all* beings, including those one finds difficult to honor.
  • parama - īśvaram — the Supersoul (Supreme Lord)
    Compound: parama (supreme) + īśvara (controller). Not just *any* īśvara — the parama-īśvara. This is the Supersoul as God Himself, not a lesser indwelling agent.
  • vinaśyatsu — in the destructible
    Present participle locative — "in those things being destroyed." Bodies are *now* dying; the soul *now* is not. The grammar pins the contrast to the present moment.
  • avinaśyantam — not destroyed
    A- + present participle of √naś. The Supersoul is never not-being-destroyed — i.e., never destroyed. The double negative carries the eternity claim.
  • paśyati — sees
    Repeated twice in the verse: "sees ... actually sees." The first paśyati is ordinary seeing; the second is real seeing. Most so-called seeing is half-seeing.
One who sees the Supersoul accompanying the individual soul in all bodies, and who understands that neither the soul nor the Supersoul within the destructible body is ever destroyed, actually sees.

Anyone who by good association can see three things combined together – the body, the proprietor of the body, or individual soul, and the friend of the individual soul – is actually in knowledge. Unless one has the association of a real knower of spiritual subjects, one cannot see these three things. Those who do not have such association are ignorant; they simply see the body, and they think that when the body is destroyed everything is finished. But actually it is not so. After the destruction of the body, both the soul and the Supersoul exist, and they go on eternally in many various moving and nonmoving forms. The Sanskrit word parameśvara is sometimes translated as “the individual soul” because the soul is the master of the body and after the destruction of the body he transfers to another form. In that way he is master. But there are others who interpret this parameśvara to be the Supersoul. In either case, both the Supersoul and the individual soul continue. They are not destroyed. One who can see in this way can actually see what is happening.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
27. One who sees the indestructible Paramātmā situated in all destructible bodies actually sees.
Commentary

One should therefore know Paramātmā. He who sees the Paramātmā situated in the destructible bodies (vinaśyatsu) of all beings, actually sees. He is an actual jṣānī.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
28. One who sees the indestructible paramātmā situated equally in all destructible bodies actually sees.
Commentary

One should see the Supreme Lord, distinct from the jīvas, but situated in the jīvas who are combined with prakṛti. He who, associating with those who know the truth, sees the outstanding quality— that the Supreme Lord, though situated with equal favor in all jīvas having bodies either moving or non-moving, is not destructible in those jīvas who experience destruction with the dissolution of their bodies (vinaśyatsu), actually sees. He is a seer of the truth. According, he sees that the Supreme Lord, being indestructible and equally favoring all, is distinct from the jīvas who are combined with prakṛti, and are subject to various destructions.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

One who sees the indestructible Supersoul always accompanying the indestructible individual soul

in all bodies, is the “actual seer”

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.28 Sah, he; pasyati, sees; yah, who; pasyati, sees;-whom?-parameswaram, the supreme Lord-the Lord who is supreme as compared with the body, organs, mind, intellect, the Unmanifest and the individual soul; as tisthantam, existing, having His presence; samam, eally, without distinction;-where?-sarvesu, in all; bhutesu, beings, all living things from Brahma to the non-moving;-he who sees Him existing eally in all living things. The Lord specifies them by the word vinasyatsu, among the perishable; and He also specifies Him, the supreme Lord, by the word avinasyantam, the Imperishable. This is meant for showing the absolute difference between the living things and God. How? For, all the modifications [See note 3 on p.38.-Tr.] of an existing thing have as their root that modification of an existing thing described as birth. All other modifications of existing things that follow birth end with destruction. After destruction there is no modification of an existing thing, because the object itself becomes nonexistent. Indeed, alities can exist so long as the thing alified exists. Therefore, by the reiteration of the absence of the last modification of an existing thing, all its preceding modifications become negated along with their effects. Hence it is established that the supreme Lord is very greatly different from all beings, and is also Unconditioned [Free from all modifications that things are subject to.] and One. He sees who thus sees the supreme Lord as described. Objection: Is it not that all poeple see? What is the need of specification? Reply: True, they see; but they see contrarily! Hence the Lord specifies, 'He alone sees'. As in comparison with one who, suffering from the (eye) disease called Timira, sees many moons, the person who sees one moon is distingusihed by saying, 'He alone sees,' similarly, here as well, the man who sees the one undivided Self as described above is distinguished from those who contrarily see many and differentiated selves, by saying 'He alone sees'. Others, though seeing, do not see because they see contrarily like the person who sees many moons. This is the meaning. The obove-described true knowledge has to be praised by stating its result. Hence the verse begins:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.28 He who sees the Atman as It really is - he is the one who sees the Atman as a distinct entity in all embodied beings that are composed of Prakrti and Purusa, even in bodies of diverse nature of gods, men etc. The true seer is one who sees the Atman as the supreme ruler in all these bodies as the imperishable self, though the bodies are subject to destruction. Conversely the purport is that he who sees the Atman, only as characterised by the uneal forms of the bodies as men, gods etc., and as possessed of birth, death etc. - such a person is perpetually caught up in transmigratory existence.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.28 Sri Abhinavagupta did not comment upon this sloka.
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.28 He sees, who sees the Supreme Lord, existing eally in all beings, the unperishing within the perishing.
Commentary

13.28 समम् eally? सर्वेषु (in) all? भूतेषु in beings? तिष्ठन्तम् existing? परमेश्वरम् the Supreme Lord? विनश्यस्तु among the perishing? अविनश्यन्तम् the unperishing? यः who? पश्यति sees? सः he? पश्यति sees.Commentary He who beholds the Supreme Lord through the inner eye of wisdom? Him Who is seated in all beings from the Creator down to the unmoving objects and Who is not destroyed even when all beings are destroyed? he is said to have realised the Self.In different kinds of fire? the heat is the same. Gold is the same in different forms of ornaments. The light from many lamps is the same. So also in all living being?s the soul is the same. The soul or the Self is uniform everywhere. The Self is the same in ants? elephants? kings? beggars? saints and rogues.The Self is indestructible all living beings are perishable. It is the Supreme Lord when compared to the body? senses? mind? intellect? the Unmanifested Nature and the individual soul.Birth is the root cause of the BhavaVikaras or the modifications? viz.? change? growth? decay and death. The other changes of state manifest themselves after the birth of the body.The Supreme Lord is one and changeless as He is birthless? decayless and deathless. He is the one common consciousness in all beings. He sees rightly who sees the Supreme Lord as now described. He is a Jivanmukta. He has knowledge of the knower of the field or the immortal Self. He is the real seer or a liberated sage.The sage alone sees properly on account of knowledge. The whole world sees erroneously on account of ignorance. He who is suffering from defective vision beholds many moons. He sees erroneously. But he who sees one moon only sees in the proper manner? correctly. Even so he who beholds the one immortal indivisible Self in all beings really sees the Truth. He alone sees. He who sees many distinct selves erroneously does not really see though he sees. He is like the man who beholds many moons. (Cf.VIII.20

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.28 He sees who sees the supreme Lord as existing eally in all beings, and as the Imperishable among the perishable.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.28 He who can see the Supreme Lord in all beings, the Imperishable amidst the perishable, he it is who really sees.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Ahimsa (Non-violence / Compassion)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)Vairagya (Detachment / Dispassion)
Related verses
He who sees the Supersoul equally present in all beings, undestroyed in the destroyed — he sees truly.
Practical Applications
  • Cultivate the seeing of equal Supersoul presence.
  • Don't apply this only when convenient.
  • Use it as the lens for difficult relationships.
Reflection Questions
  • In whom do I struggle to see the Supersoul?
  • What practice would aid that seeing?

When the city is burning, the air above it is not burned. The Supersoul stands so above the body's destruction — present in it, untouched by it. To see this — to see the body dying and the Supersoul not — is to see at last with the right eye. All other sight is half-sight.

Vidura instructs Dhṛtarāṣṭra

When the Pāṇḍavas had been killed (as Dhṛtarāṣṭra heard from his ministers), the blind king mourned for his sons too — knowing the war was his own making. Vidura came and taught him: the body falls, but the soul cannot fall. The Supersoul in every chest is untouched by the destruction of the chest.

The Mahābhārata records the slow turning of Dhṛtarāṣṭra's heart through Vidura's repeated instruction in this very principle. Equal-vision begins with the recognition that what truly *is* in another cannot be killed.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.29

↗
సమం పశ్యన్హి సర్వత్ర సమవస్థితమీశ్వరమ్ । న హినస్త్యాత్మనాత్మానం తతో యాతి పరాం గతిమ్ ॥ ౨౯ ॥
samaṁ paśyan hi sarvatra
[samam pashyan hi sarvatra]
samavasthitam īśvaram
[samavasthitam eeshvaram]
na hinasty ātmanātmānaṁ
[na hinasty aatmanaatmaanam]
tato yāti parāṁ gatim
[tato yaati paraam gatim]
samam — equally paśyan — seeing hi — certainly sarvatra — everywhere samavasthitam — equally situated īśvaram — the Supersoul na — does not hinasti — degrade ātmanā — by the mind ātmānam — the soul tataḥ — then yāti — reaches parām — the transcendental gatim — destination .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
samaṁ paśyan hi sarvatra
samam
equally
paśyan
seeing
hi
certainly
sarvatra
everywhere
samavasthitam īśvaram
samavasthitam
equally situated
īśvaram
the Supersoul
na hinasty ātmanātmānaṁ
na
does not
hinasti
degrade
ātmanā
by the mind
ātmānam
the soul
tato yāti parāṁ gatim
tataḥ
then
yāti
reaches
parām
the transcendental
gatim
destination .
  • samam — equally
    Repeated from verse 28. Sanskrit poetry's pattern of confirming the previous teaching by recurrence at the start of the next verse. The doctrine is now lived practice.
  • sarvatra — everywhere
    Adverb. Spatial universalization of the equality. Every place, every body, every situation — the same Lord.
  • samavasthitam — equally situated
    Sam- + ava- + sthita — "established equally." Not just present everywhere but *equally* established — same intensity, same intimacy. The Supersoul does not partial His presence.
  • hinasti — degrade
    From √hiṁs — "to harm." Same root as ahiṁsā. With *na* in front, the seer does not *harm* his own soul by his mind. Wrong vision is self-injury; right vision is self-protection.
  • ātmānam — the soul
    Paired with ātmanā ("by the mind"). The lower self (mind) can either lift or degrade the higher self (soul). The same word at two registers — the Gītā is fond of this device.
  • gatim — destination
    Qualified by *parām* — the supreme destination. The same phrase (parām gatim) that closes 8.13 and 8.21. The Gītā's standing term for the soul's final arrival.
One who sees the Supersoul equally present everywhere, in every living being, does not degrade himself by his mind. Thus he approaches the transcendental destination.

The living entity, by accepting his material existence, has become situated differently than in his spiritual existence. But if one understands that the Supreme is situated in His Paramātmā manifestation everywhere, that is, if one can see the presence of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in every living thing, he does not degrade himself by a destructive mentality, and he therefore gradually advances to the spiritual world. The mind is generally addicted to sense gratifying processes; but when the mind turns to the Supersoul, one becomes advanced in spiritual understanding.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
28. He who sees Paramātmā situated everywhere equally does not degrade the soul by the deviating mind, and attains to the supreme goal.
Commentary

He who sees Me situated everywhere does not make the soul (ātmānam) fall down (hinasti) by the mind (ātmanā), which wanders on the wrong path.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
29. He who sees paramātmā situated everywhere equally does not degrade the soul by the deviating mind, and attains the excellent path.
Commentary

Seeing the Lord distinct from jīva and prakṛti by the above mentioned method, that person attains power to discriminate himself from the transformations of prakṛti, by the power of seeing that Lord. He who sees the Lord situated distinctly (samyak avasithitam) with permanent qualities and form, such that He treats all living entities equally (samam), does not cause degradation of himself (ātmanam) by a mind which distinguishes the transformations of prakṛti and is lusty for the taste of sense objects (ātmanā). He attains the excellent path (parām gatim), knowledge of discriminating the self from the transformations of prakṛti, by disgust with the taste for prakṛti.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Translation
One who sees the Supersoul equally present everywhere, in every living being, does not degrade himself by his mind. Thus he approaches the transcendental destination. (cn/DS) One who has knowledge sees things as they are. He sees the body, sees the soul and sees the Supersoul.
Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Thus seeing in proper knowledge, one does not degrade himself by pursuing selfish desires of the

mind; but one approaches the transcendental destination

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.29 Hi, since; pasyan, by seeing, by realizing; samam, eally; isvaram, God, i.e., (by realizing Him) as described in the immediately preceding verse; who is samavasthitam, present alike; sarvatra, everywhere, in all beings;-what follows from seeing eally?-he na, does not; hinasti, injure; his own atmanam, Self; atmana, by the Self, by his own Self; tatah, therefore, as a result of that non-injuring; yati, he attains; the param, supreme; gatim, Goal, called Liberation. Objection: Is it not that no creature whatsoever injures himself by himself? Why do you refer to an irrelevant thing by saying, 'He does not injure৷৷.,which is like saying, 'Fire should neither be lit on the earth nor in the sky,' etc.? Reply: This defect does not arise, because it is logical with reference to an unenlightened person's ignoring the Self. For, all unillumined people ignore the very wellknown Self which is manifest and directly perceptible, and regard the non-Self as the Self. By performing righteous and unrighteous acts they destroy even that self which has been accepted, and adopt another new self. And destroying even that, they take up another. Similarly, destroying even that, they adopt another. In this way they destroy the self that had been accepted successively. Thus, all unillumined persons are destroyers of the Self. But that which is the Self in reality, even that remains as though destroyed for ever by ignorance, because of the absence of any benefit from Its presence. So, all unenlightened persons are, verily, destroyers of the Self. On the contrary, the other person who has realized the Self as described does not injure in either way [i.e. either through superimposition or through non-super-imposition.] the Self by his own Self. Therefore he attains the supreme Goal, i.e., the result stated above comes to him. Lest it be doubted that what was said in, 'seeing eally God who is present in all beings, he does not injure the Self by the Self, is improper with regard to the selves which are diverse according to the differences created by the variety in their own alities and actions, the Lord says:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.29 'The ruler' (the self) abides in the bodies of divinities and the rest as their supporter, controller and as their Sesin (principal). He who sees the self free from dissimilar shapes of divinities etc., and as being of the same form of knowledge, he does not injure himself by 'himself', namely, by his mind. Therefore, as a result of seeing the sameness of the nature of the self in every place as a knower, he attains the 'highest goal.' What is to be reached is called 'goal'. He attains the supreme, namely, the self in its pure form. On the contrary, if he should view the self as dissimilar in every place, i.e., identifies It with the bodies, then he 'injure the self, namely, hurls It into the middle of the ocean of Samsara.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.29 Samam etc. A man of Yoga, who's thought is on what is eal in one and all, does not harm the Self i.e, does not fell the Self down in the ocean of the cycle [of birth and death], difficult to cross over.
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.29 Because he who sees the same Lord eally dwelling everywhere does not destroy the Self by the self; he goes to the highest goal.
Commentary

13.29 समम् eally? पश्यन् seeing? हि indeed? सर्वत्र everywhere? समवस्थितम् eally dwelling? ईश्वरम् the Lord? न not? हिनस्ति destroys? आत्मना by the self? आत्मानम् the Self? ततः then? याति goes? पराम् the highest? गतिम् the goal.Commentary This is the vision of a liberated sage. The Supreme Self abides in all forms. There is nothing apart from It.An ignorant man destroyes the Self by identifying himself with the body and the modifications of the mind and by not seeing the one Self in all beings. He has a blurred vision. His mind is very gross. He cannot think of the subtle Self. He is swayed by the force of ignorance. He mistakes the impure body for the pure Self. He has false knowledge. But the sage has knowledge of the Self or true knowledge and so he beholds the one Self in all beings. An ignorant man is the slayer of his Self. He destroys this body and takes another body and so on. But he who beholds the one Self in all beings does not destroy the Self by the self. Therefore he attains the Supreme Goal? i.e.? he attains release from the round of birth and death. Knowledge of the Self leads to liberation or salvation. Knowledge of the Absolute annihilates the ignorance in toto. If the ignorance is destroyed and false knowledge is also destroyed? all evils are simultaneously destroyed.Those who have realised that unity of the Self in all these diverse forms are never caught in the meshes of birth and death. They attain the state of Turiya (the fourth state beyond waking? dreaming and deep sleep) where form and sound do not exist.The self is everybodys friend and also his enemy as well. The idea first expressed in chapter VI? verses 5 and 6 is repeated here. (Cf.XVIII.20)

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.29 Since by seeing eally God who is present alike everywhere he does not injure the Self by the Self, therefore he attains the supreme Goal.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.29 Beholding the Lord in all things equally, his actions do not mar his spiritual life but lead him to the height of Bliss.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
Seeing the same Lord equally present everywhere, he does not degrade himself by his mind — he attains the supreme destination.
Practical Applications
  • Trust that equal-vision protects from self-degradation.
  • Use the seeing as armor against discriminating-mind injuries.
  • Cultivate the destination orientation.
Reflection Questions
  • Where has discriminating mind degraded me?
  • What does equal vision shield?

A judge who treats every plaintiff alike cannot be bribed against himself; his evenness protects him as much as it protects the court. So the seer who sees the same Lord in every being cannot use his own mind to hurt himself — the equal vision is its own shield. He arrives at the destination intact.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.30

↗
ప్రకృత్యైవ చ కర్మాణి క్రియమాణాని సర్వశ: । య: పశ్యతి తథాత్మానమకర్తారం స పశ్యతి ॥ ౩౦ ॥
prakṛtyaiva ca karmāṇi
[prakrityaiva cha karmaani]
kriyamāṇāni sarvaśaḥ
[kriyamaanaani sarvashah]
yaḥ paśyati tathātmānam
[yah pashyati tathaatmaanam]
akartāraṁ sa paśyati
[akartaaram sa pashyati]
prakṛtyā — by material nature eva — certainly ca — also karmāṇi — activities kriyamāṇāni — being performed sarvaśaḥ — in all respects yaḥ — anyone who paśyati — sees tathā — also ātmānam — himself akartāram — the nondoer saḥ — he paśyati — sees perfectly .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
prakṛtyaiva ca karmāṇi
prakṛtyā
by material nature
eva
certainly
ca
also
karmāṇi
activities
kriyamāṇāni sarvaśaḥ
kriyamāṇāni
being performed
sarvaśaḥ
in all respects
yaḥ paśyati tathātmānam
yaḥ
anyone who
paśyati
sees
tathā
also
ātmānam
himself
akartāraṁ sa paśyati
akartāram
the nondoer
saḥ
he
paśyati
sees perfectly .
  • prakṛtyā — by material nature
    Instrumental case — "by means of nature." The activities are *prakṛti-driven*, not soul-driven. Every act is finally an act of the three guṇas, not of the witness.
  • karmāṇi — activities
    Neuter plural. *All* activities — sleeping, eating, breathing, fighting — fall under prakṛti's regime. The soul performs none of them. This is the deepest cut of the verse.
  • kriyamāṇāni — being performed
    Present passive participle from √kṛ. *Being performed* — not *being performed by the soul*. The passive voice is the doctrine. Activities happen; the soul does not author them.
  • akartāram — the nondoer
    A- + kartṛ. The soul is the *non-doer*. This single word, properly seen, dissolves both pride ("I accomplished it") and despair ("I failed at it"). Neither was ever true.
  • paśyati — sees perfectly
    Repeated. The verse closes with the same verb 28 and 29 closed with. Right seeing is the chapter's recurring crown.
One who can see that all activities are performed by the body, which is created of material nature, and sees that the self does nothing, actually sees.

This body is made by material nature under the direction of the Supersoul, and whatever activities are going on in respect to one’s body are not his doing. Whatever one is supposed to do, either for happiness or for distress, one is forced to do because of the bodily constitution. The self, however, is outside all these bodily activities. This body is given according to one’s past desires. To fulfill desires, one is given the body, with which he acts accordingly. Practically speaking, the body is a machine, designed by the Supreme Lord, to fulfill desires. Because of desires, one is put into difficult circumstances to suffer or to enjoy. This transcendental vision of the living entity, when developed, makes one separate from bodily activities. One who has such a vision is an actual seer.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
30. He who sees all activities being done by matter alone, and sees the soul as doing nothing, actually sees.
Commentary

One who sees that all actions are done by prakṛti in the form of body and senses, and who sees that the jīva (ātmānam) is the doer only by thinking himself the body, but is not actually the doer, actually sees.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
30. He who sees all activities being done by matter alone, and sees the soul as doing nothing, actually sees.
Commentary

How does he perform this distinction of the individual self from prakṛti? [Note: In the previous verse the person distinguished the Lord from everything, by which he developed the power of discriminating himself from prakṛti.] The Lord explains in two verses. He who sees that all activities are being done by prakṛti alone, and impelled by the Lord, by My superintendence (indicated by the word ca), and sees the ātmā as not doing those activities, he alone sees himself as he truly is. This is the meaning. I, a jīva, having a nature of knowledge and bliss, do not actually perform the actions which produce suffering, such as fighting or sacrifice. Inspired by the Supreme Lord according to my desires for fulfilling my enjoyment, and superintended by me who have lost discrimination and possess beginningless impressions for enjoyment, this prakṛti alone with the nature of happiness, distress and illusion does the actions, through my body and senses. Because of supplying the body and senses, prakṛti is the doer of the actions. Prakṛti is the doer of the actions because of being the instrument. The pure jīva, the non-doer, is separate from prakṛti which accomplishes that action. By this (since he sees the jīva as non-doer in material acts) it is clear that such a person also sees that the pure jiva is also a doer.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

'Aham khara' = I am the doer.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Further describes the man who “actually sees” in real knowledge

He sees that “Neither he nor others are acting”
All activities are performed by the body, which is created by material nature (purport)
Body (like a machine) is given by the Lord according to past desires and karma
All acts are forced according to bodily constitution
Soul is outside bodily activities
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.30 And yah, he who; pasyati, sees, realizes; karmani, actions, those performed through speech, mind and body; as kriyamanani, being done, being accomplished; sarvasah, in various ways; prakrtya, by Nature-Nature is God's Maya consisting of the three alities, as is said in the Upanisadic text, 'However, know Maya as Nature' (Sv. 4.10); by that Nature; eva, itself-not by the other [Not by the Pradhana of the Sankhyas, known otherwise as prakrti.] which transforms itself in the form of cause and effects such as Mahat etc.; tatha, and also; atmanam, the Self, the Knower of the field; as akartaram, the non-agent, devoid of all adjuncts; sah, he; pasyati, sees-he is the one who has realized the supreme Reality. This is the idea. What is implied is that there is no valid proof about differences in the Non-agent who is devoid of alities and is unconditioned like space. The Lord elaborates again in other words that very true knowledge:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.30 When he perceives that 'all acts are performed by the Prakrti' in the manner previously stated in, 'Prakrti is said to be the cause of agency to the body and sense-organs' (13.20), and perceive also that 'the self, being of the form of knowledge, is not the doer,' and that the self's conjunction with the Prakrti, Its direction of the body and Its experiences of happiness and misery are the result of ignorance of the nature of Karma - then indeed he perceives the pure self.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.30 Prakrtya etc. He whose firm conviction is of this nature 'The Material Cause alone performs (or creates) this; I do nothing' - he, though he performs (or creates) all, does not perform (or create) anything [in fact]. In this manner, is the absence of doership in him.
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.30 He sees, who sees that all actions are performed by Nature alone and that the Self is actionless.
Commentary

13.30 प्रकृत्या by Nature? एव alone? च and? कर्माणि actions? क्रियमाणानि being performed? सर्वशः all? यः who? पश्यति sees? तथा so also? आत्मानम् the Self? अकर्तारम् actionless? सः he? पश्यति sees.Commentary Nature is responsible for all activities. The Self is beyond all action. It is the silent witness only. He who experiences thus is the real seer or sage.He who knows that all actions proceeding from the five organs of knowledge? the five organs of action? the mind and the intellect are prompted by Nature and that the Self is actionless? really sees. He alone sees. He who identifies himself with the body? the mind and the senses and foolishly thinks that the Self is the actor is an ignorant man. He sees only with the physical eyes. He has no inner eye of intuition. The sky remains motionless but the clouds move across the sky. Even so the Self is actionless but Nature does everythin. The Self is destitute of any limiting adjunct. Just as there is no variety in ether? so also there is no variety in the Self. It is one homogeneous essence. It is free from any kind of characteristics. (Cf.III.27XIV.19XVIII.16)

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.30 And he who sees actions as being done in various ways by Nature itself, and also the Self as the non-agent,-he sees.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.30 He who understands that it is only the Law of Nature that brings action to fruition, and that the Self never acts, alone knows the Truth.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Maitri (Friendship / Goodwill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 3.27 BG 5.8-9 BG 14.19 SB 11.22.51 SB 3.27.1 SB 1.7.5 CC Madhya 20.122 CC Madhya 24.135 CC Antya 5.79 Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 3.1.1Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.11
One who sees that all activities are performed by the body, born of nature, while the self is non-doing — sees rightly.
Practical Applications
  • Practice the perception: body acts, self witnesses.
  • Use during pride and during shame both — neither belongs to the self.
  • Cultivate non-doer consciousness.
Reflection Questions
  • Where do I claim doership for what nature is doing?
  • Where do I take blame the self never deserves?

A pen lies on the desk while the writer's hand moves it across the page. From the page's perspective, the pen is writing; from the truer view, the hand is. The body, like the pen, is the visible mover; the self, the truer agent, does not write at all — and the soul, deeper still, only watches the writing happen.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.31

↗
యదా భూతపృథగ్భావమేకస్థమనుపశ్యతి । తత ఏవ చ విస్తారం బ్రహ్మ సమ్పద్యతే తదా ॥ ౩౧ ॥
yadā bhūta-pṛthag-bhāvam
[yadaa bhoota-prithag-bhaavam]
eka-stham anupaśyati
[eka-stham anupashyati]
tata eva ca vistāraṁ
[tata eva cha vistaaram]
brahma sampadyate tadā
[brahma sampadyate tadaa]
yadā — when bhūta — of living entities pṛthak - bhāvam — separated identities eka - stham — situated in one anupaśyati — one tries to see through authority tataḥ eva — thereafter ca — also vistāram — the expansion brahma — the Absolute sampadyate — he attains tadā — at that time .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
yadā bhūta-pṛthag-bhāvam
yadā
when
bhūta
of living entities
pṛthak - bhāvam
separated identities
eka-stham anupaśyati
eka - stham
situated in one
anupaśyati
one tries to see through authority
tata eva ca vistāraṁ
tataḥ eva
thereafter
ca
also
vistāram
the expansion
brahma sampadyate tadā
brahma
the Absolute
sampadyate
he attains
tadā
at that time .
  • pṛthak - bhāvam — separated identities
    Compound: pṛthak (separate) + bhāva (existence, nature). Ordinary perception fragments reality into countless distinct beings. The whole verse's argument is that this fragmentation is a phase of seeing, not its end.
  • eka - stham — situated in one
    Compound: eka (one) + stha (situated). The many identities are finally rooted in one source. This is the moment Brahman-realization opens.
  • anupaśyati — one tries to see through authority
    Anu- + √dṛś. The prefix anu carries the sense of *following* — seeing in line with, in the wake of, the seers who saw before. Realization here is not invention but inheritance.
  • vistāram — the expansion
    From vi- + √str — "spread out, expand." The one source *expands* into the many. Diversity is not opposed to unity; it is unity unfurled.
  • sampadyate — he attains
    Sam- + √pad — "to arrive, to enter into." The verb of arrival. Brahman-attainment is *consequent* on the unifying vision — not a separate practice. The seeing is itself the attainment.
When a sensible man ceases to see different identities due to different material bodies and he sees how beings are expanded everywhere, he attains to the Brahman conception.

When one can see that the various bodies of living entities arise due to the different desires of the individual soul and do not actually belong to the soul itself, one actually sees. In the material conception of life, we find someone a demigod, someone a human being, a dog, a cat, etc. This is material vision, not actual vision. This material differentiation is due to a material conception of life. After the destruction of the material body, the spirit soul is one. The spirit soul, due to contact with material nature, gets different types of bodies. When one can see this, he attains spiritual vision; thus being freed from differentiations like man, animal, big, low, etc., one becomes purified in his consciousness and able to develop Kṛṣṇa consciousness in his spiritual identity. How he then sees things will be explained in the next verse.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
31. When one sees that all separate beings are situated in one prakṛti at the time of dissolution, and arise from that prakṛti at the time of creation, the person becomes Brahman.
Commentary

When one perceives that the various forms of the living beings, moving and non- moving (pṛthag-bhāvam), are situated in the one prakṛti at the time of pralaya, and sees at the time of creation the expansion of living entities from prakṛti, he becomes Brahman (brahma saṁpadyate). [Note: Brahman would here mean that the jīva attains qualities similar to the Lord.]

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
31. When one sees that all separate beings are situated in one prakṛti at the time of dissolution, and arise from that prakṛti at the time of creation, he realizes ātmā.
Commentary

That jīva sees that all living entities, who have assumed various forms such as devas and men (bhūta pṛthag bhāvam), lose those distinctions of deva and men and variations of big and small and become one by entering prakṛti (ekastham) at the time of universal destruction. He sees that they disperse again from prakṛti as many forms at the time of creation. It is not that he sees that all the forms enter into himself and then disperse into many forms from himself. In other words when the jīva sees his ātmā distinct from prakṛti, he realizes (sampadyate) himself (brahma), manifesting the eight great qualities such as freedom from sin, distinct from prakṛti.

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

When one is looking around and he sees so many material bodies and he ceases to see them as their field of activities, but one sees them for what they are ‑ the ksetrajna, the soul ‑ that is Brahman vision.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Only the body acts – Living entity is distinct from the field of activities

Focus of Learning

(a) A sensible man ceases to see different identities due to different material bodies

Thus absence of any material differentiation because of different bodies

(b) Sees how beings are expanded everywhere, and thus attains to the “Brahman conception”

Purified consciousness can thus develop Krishna consciousness

(a) Current situation of living entity – One has situated himself differently than in spiritual world

(b) Role of mind – Mind is generally addicted to sense gratification; When the mind turns to the

Supersoul, one becomes advanced

(a) Explains the man in real knowledge – To see the three things i.e. the body, its proprietor and the

Supersoul as the friend of the soul, in their proper perspective

(b) How such vision is possible – By good association with real knower of spiritual subjects

(c) Two meanings of “paramesvara”

Maybe used for individual soul because he is the master of the body and remains unaffected with the destruction of the body
Also refers to Supersoul – In any case both the soul and the Supersoul are indestructible

LINK BETWEEN TEXTS 13.31 & 13.32:

What does a person with Brahman vision see?

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.31 Yada, when, at the time when; anupasyati, one realizes-having reflected in accordance with the instructions of the scriptures and the teachers, one realizes as a matter of one's own direct experience that 'All this is but the Self' (Ch. 7.25.2); that bhuta-prthak-bhavam, the state of diversity of living things; is ekastham, rooted in the One, existing in the one Self; and their vistaram, manifestation, origination; tatah, eva, is also from That-when he realizes that origination in such diverse ways as, 'the vital force is from the Self, hope is from the Self, memory [Smara, memory; see Sankaracarya's Comm. on Ch. 7.13.1.-Tr.] is from the Self, space is from the Self, fire is from the Self, water is from the Self, coming into being and withdrawal are owing to the Self, food is from the Self' (op. cit. 7.26.1); tada, then, at that time; brahma sampadyate, one becomes identified with Brahman Itself. This is the import. If the same Self be the Self in all the bodies, then there arises the possiblity of Its association with their defects. Hence this is said:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.31 When he perceives that the diversified 'modes of existence' of all beings as men, divinities etc., are founded on the two principles of Prakrti and Purusa; when he perceives that their existence as divine, human, short, tall etc., is rooted in 'one' common foundation, namely, in the Prakrti, and not in the self; when he sees that 'their expansion', i.e., the successive proliferaton into sons, grandsons and such varieties of beings, is from Prakrti alone - then he reaches the brahman. The meaning is that he attains the self devoid of limitations, in Its pure form of knowledge.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.31 See Comment under 13.34
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.31 When a man sees the whole variety of beings as resting in the One, and spreading forth from That alone, he then becomes Brahman.
Commentary

13.31 यदा when? भूतपृथग्भावम् the whole variety of beings? एकस्थम् resting in the One? अनुपश्यति sees? ततः from that? एव alone? च and? विस्तारम् the spreading? ब्रह्म Brahman? सम्पद्यते (he) becomes? तदा then.Commentary A man attains to unity with the Supreme when he knows or realises through intuition that all these manifold forms are rooted in the One. As waves in water? atoms in the earth? rays in the sun? organs in the body? emotions in the mind? sparks in the fire? so verily are all forms rooted in the One. Wherever he turns his gaze he beholds only the one Self and enjoys the bliss of the Self.When he beholds the diversity of beings rooted in the One in accordance with the teachings of the scriptures and the preceptor? he realises through intuitive experience that all that he beholds is nothing but the Self and that the origin and the evolution of all is from That One alone. Compare with the Chhandogya Upanishad? 7.26.1.आत्मतः प्राण आत्मत आशा आत्मतः स्मरआत्मत आकाश आत्मतस्तेज आत्मत आपःआत्मत आविर्भावतिरोभावावात्मतोऽन्नम्।।Atmatah prana atmata asa atmatah smaraAtmata akasa atmatasteja atmata apahAtmata avirbhavatirobhavavatmatonnam.From the Self is life from the Self is desire from the Self is love from the Self is ether from the Self is light from the Self are the waters from the Self is appearance and disappearance from the Self is food.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.31 When one realizes that the state of diversity of living things is rooted in the One, and that their manifestation is also from That, then one becomes identified with Brahman.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.31 He who sees the diverse forms of life all rooted in One, and growing forth from Him, he shall indeed find the Absolute.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
Concepts
Bhava
When one sees that all the diversity of beings is one, expanding from one source — at that moment, he attains Brahman.
Practical Applications
  • Cultivate expansion-from-one-source vision.
  • Honor diversity as expression of unity, not opposition.
  • Use this verse against polarized thinking.
Reflection Questions
  • Where does my polarized thinking miss the underlying unity?
  • What practice trains the unifying view?

Walk through a forest and you see ten thousand leaves — but they grow from a few trees, and the trees stand on one piece of ground. Walk through the species of life and you see ten thousand identities — but they grow from one source, and that source is Brahman. The sage's eye sees the ground beneath the leaves.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.32

↗
అనాదిత్వాన్నిర్గుణత్వాత్పరమాత్మాయమవ్యయ: । శరీరస్థోఽపి కౌన్తేయ న కరోతి న లిప్యతే ॥ ౩౨ ॥
anāditvān nirguṇatvāt
[anaaditvaan nirgunatvaat]
paramātmāyam avyayaḥ
[paramaatmaayam avyayah]
śarīra-stho ’pi kaunteya
[shareera-stho ’pi kaunteya]
na karoti na lipyate
[na karoti na lipyate]
anāditvāt — due to eternity nirguṇatvāt — due to being transcendental parama — beyond material nature ātmā — spirit ayam — this avyayaḥ — inexhaustible śarīra - sthaḥ — dwelling in the body api — though kaunteya — O son of Kuntī na karoti — never does anything na lipyate — nor is he entangled .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
anāditvān nirguṇatvāt
anāditvāt
due to eternity
nirguṇatvāt
due to being transcendental
paramātmāyam avyayaḥ
parama
beyond material nature
ātmā
spirit
ayam
this
avyayaḥ
inexhaustible
śarīra-stho ’pi kaunteya
śarīra - sthaḥ
dwelling in the body
api
though
kaunteya
O son of Kuntī
na karoti na lipyate
na karoti
never does anything
na lipyate
nor is he entangled .
  • anāditvāt — due to eternity
    Ablative — *because* the soul is beginningless. Eternity is the *reason* for non-entanglement, not just a separate fact. A thing that has no beginning cannot be the kind of thing that gets stuck.
  • nirguṇatvāt — due to being transcendental
    Ablative — *because* the soul is beyond the modes. Two ablatives in a row stack the reasoning: anāditvāt + nirguṇatvāt = no entanglement is even possible.
  • ātmā — spirit
    Qualified by *parama* — beyond material nature. The Gauḍīya reading distinguishes: in 23 paramātmā named the Lord Himself; here, in context with anāditvāt/nirguṇatvāt, it names the eternal-by-nature soul-principle, which shares the Supersoul's transcendental quality without identity.
  • avyayaḥ — inexhaustible
    A- + √vī (to wear out) — "not subject to decay." The soul's energy does not deplete with use. This word reassures the soul that spiritual effort costs it nothing of itself.
  • na karoti — never does anything
    Reaffirming verse 30's akartāram. The soul does not act. Even in the body.
  • na lipyate — nor is he entangled
    From √lip — "to smear, to stain." The soul is not *stained* by anything the body does. This is the verse's strongest assurance: there is a way out of the residue of every action.
Those with the vision of eternity can see that the imperishable soul is transcendental, eternal, and beyond the modes of nature. Despite contact with the material body, O Arjuna, the soul neither does anything nor is entangled.

A living entity appears to be born because of the birth of the material body, but actually the living entity is eternal; he is not born, and in spite of his being situated in a material body, he is transcendental and eternal. Thus he cannot be destroyed. By nature he is full of bliss. He does not engage himself in any material activities; therefore the activities performed due to his contact with material bodies do not entangle him.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
32. Because He is the supreme cause and everything arises from Him, this indestructible Paramātmā, though situated in the body, does not think Himself the doer and is not contaminated.
Commentary

“You have said that the jīva in contact with his body takes repeated birth (verse 22). The jīva, by thinking himself the body by being in the body, becomes contaminated by the guṇas and takes repeated birth. But the Paramātmā does not become contaminated. Why?” He is called anādi because He has no original cause. But just as anuttama can mean parama uttama taking the ablative sense of the word (no one higher than Him), so anādi, “having no cause”, can mean the supreme cause (no other cause than Him). Therefore because He is the final cause (anāditvāt), and because the guṇas such as creation and destruction arise out of Him (nirgataḥ + guṇa = nirguṇatvāt), this Paramātmā is distinguished from the jīva. At all times, in all circumstances, He is without decrease in His own knowledge, bliss and other qualities. Though situated in the body, because He does not take up the qualities of the body, He does not think He is a doer like the jīva (na karoti)— He does not become an enjoyer—nor does He get contaminated by the guṇas of the material body (na lipyate).

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
32. Though situated in the body, as well as being without beginning, the ātmā is without destruction. Because the ātmā is beyond the guṇas, he is not the agent of action nor is he contaminated.
Commentary

“It is not correct to say that one reaches perfection by seeing the distinction of the Lord and ātmā from prakṛti. The śruti says: etebhya eva bhūtebhyaḥ samutthāya tāny evānu vinaśyati na pretya saṁjṣāsti Rising out of the elements, this ātmā vanishes in them. After destruction, there is no definition. Bṛhad Āraṇyaka Upaniṣad 2.4.12 From this śruti statement it is understood that the jīva is created and destroyed along with his body.” No, this jīva (ayam ātmā), even though situated in a body, as well as being without beginning (anāditvāt param), is avyaya. Having this prominent quality of being without change (avyaya), he is thus without destruction. He does not perform actions such as fighting or sacrifice, because he is without material guṇas, being pure knowledge and bliss (nirguṇatvāt). He is not touched by the qualities of destruction arising from the nature of the senses and body. The meaning of the śruti statement quoted should not be taken literally.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

Vision of eternity is further explained – One can see that the soul never mixes with the body

Imperishable soul is transcendental, eternal and beyond the modes
Despite contact with material body, the soul neither does anything nor is entangled
This fact is explained by two analogies in Texts 13.33 – 13.34 LINK BETWEEN TEXTS 13.32 & 13.33: QUESTION: Krishna states clearly in Text 13.32 that only the body changes. The soul is eternal and changeless. As the soul is nevertheless within the body, does he combine with it? ANSWER: Krishna answers in Text 13.33 by saying that matter and spirit do not mix. He

explains this with two analogies in Text 13.33 and 13.34 respectively

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.32 Anadivat, being without beginning: Adih means cause; that which has no cause is anadih. That which has a cause undergoes loss of its own characteristics. But this One, being causeless, has no parts. This being so, It does not suffer loss. So also, nirgunatvat, being without alities: indeed, It si only something possessing alities that perishes owing to the losss of its alities. But this One, being without alities, does not perish. Hence, ayam, this; paramatma, supreme Self; is avyayah, immutable. It suffers no depletion. Therefore It is immutable. Since this is so, therefore, api, although; sarira-sthah, existing in the body-since the perception of the Self occurs in the bodies, It is said to be 'existing in the body'; even then, It na, does not; karoti, act. From the very fact that It does not act, It na, is not; lipyate, affected by the result of any action. For, one who is an agent of action becomes affected by its result. But this One is not an agent. Hence It is not affected by any result. This is the meaning. Objection: Who is it, again, that acts in the body and becomes affected? On the one hand, if there be some embodied being other than the supreme Self who acts and becomes affected, then it has been improper to say in, 'And also understand Me to be the Knower of the field,' etc., that the Knower of the field and God are one. Again, if there be no embodied being who is different from God, then it has to be stated who is it that acts and gets affected. Or it has to be asserted that the supreme One does not exist. [If the supreme One also acts like us, then He is no God.] Thus, since the Upanisadic philosophy as stated by the Lord is in every way difficult to understand and difficult to explain, it has therefore been abandoned by the Vaisesikas, the Sankhyas, the Jainas and the Buddhists. Reply: As to that, the following refutation has been stated by the Lord Himself in, 'But it is Nature that acts' (5.14). Indeed, Nature, which is nothing but ignorance, acts and becomes affected. In this way empirical dealing becomes possible; but in reality it does not occur in the one supreme Self. It has been accordingly shown by the Lord in various places that there is no duty to be performed by those who adhere to this philosophy of discriminating knowledge of the supreme Reality, who are steadfast in Knowledge, who have spurned actions arising out of ignorance, and who are mendicants belonging to the highest Order of monks. The Lord cites an illustration to show like what It does not act and is not affected:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.32 This 'supreme self' (Atman) has been defined as having a nature different from that of the body. While existing in the body, It is 'immutable', i.e., It is not liable to decay as It is 'without a beginning,' i.e., never created at any point of time. Because It is 'free from Gunas,' being devoid of Sattva and other Gunas of Prakrti, It neither acts nor gets tainted; It is not tainted by the alities of the body. Granted that the self being without Gunas, does not act; but how is it possible that the Atman is not tainted by Its constant association with the alities of the body? To this, Sri Krsna replies:
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.32 See Comment under 13.34
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.32 Being without beginning and being devoid of (any) alities, the Supreme Self, imperishable, though dwelling in the body, O Arjuna, neither acts nor is tainted.
Commentary

13.32 अनादित्वात् being without beginning? निर्गुणत्वात् being devoid of alities? परमात्मा the Supreme Self? अयम् this? अव्ययः imperishable? शरीरस्थः dwelling in this body? अपि though? कौन्तेय O son of Kunti (Arjuna)? न not करोति acts? न not? लिप्यते is tainted.Commentary The Supreme Self is beyond Nature. Therefore It is without alities. It is Nirguna. The activity in Nature is really due to its own alities which inhere in it. The Supreme Self existed before the body came into being and will continue to be after its dissolution. It is eternally the same and imperishable.Avyaya That which is free from the changes of birth and death or appearance and destruction. That which has a beginning has birth. After the object is born it is subject to the changes of being (growth? decay? etc.). As the Self is birthless? It is free from the changes of state (existence? birth? growth? change? decay and death). As the Self is free from all sorts of functions? It is Avyaya. Even if the reflection of the sun in the water moves? the sun does not move a bit. Even so the Supreme Self is not touched by the fruits of action as It is not the doer? as It is without the alities of Nature? or limbs? indivisible? devoid of parts? without action? beginningless and unattached and causeless.This Supreme Self is free from the three kinds of differences? viz.? Sajatiyabheda? Vijatiyabheda and Svagatabheda. A mango tree is different from a fig tree. This is Sajatiyabheda. A mango tree is different from a stone. This is Vijatiyabheda. In the same mango tree there is difference between leaves? flowers and fruits. This is Svagatabheda. But the Supreme Self is one without a second. There is no other Brahman Which is eal to It. Therefore? there cannot be Sajatiyabheda in Brahman. This world is a mere appearance. It is a mere figment of our imagination. It is superimposed on the Absolute on account of ignorance. An imaginary object has no independent existence apart from its substratum? just as the snake in the rope has no independent existence apart from its substratum? the rope. Therefore? there cannot be Vijatiyabheda in Brahman. Brahman is indivisible? partless? without alities? without form and without any limbs. Therefore there cannot be Svagatabheda in Brahman.Brahman or the Supreme Self is beginningless. It is without a cause. It is selfexistent. It is without parts. It is without alities. Therefore Brahman is imperishable. As It is unattached? It is neither the doer nor the enjoyer. If Brahman also is the doer and enjoyer. It is no longer Brahman. It is in no way better than ourselves. This cannot be. Agency and enjoyment are attributed to the ego on account of ignorance. It is Nature that acts. (Cf.V.14XV.9)

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.32 Being without beginning and without alities, O son of Kunti, this immutable, supreme Self does not act. nor is It affected [Also translated as tainted.-Tr.], although existing in the body.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.32 The Supreme Spirit, O Prince, is without beginning, without Qualities and Imperishable, and though it be within the body, yet It does not act, nor is It affected by action.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 2.23 BG 9.9 BG 4.14 SB 10.84.24 SB 11.13.27 SB 11.7.7 CC Madhya 20.108 CC Madhya 24.74 CC Antya 4.180 Kaṭha Upaniṣad 1.2.18Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 6.11
Because of his eternal nature and beyond the modes, the Supersoul, although in the body, neither acts nor is entangled.
Practical Applications
  • Recognize the Supersoul's untouched quality even in your own body.
  • Use this as solace when you feel entangled.
  • Trust the eternal-nature-in-body realization.
Reflection Questions
  • When have I felt the untouched quality?
  • What practice keeps it accessible?

Sunlight passes through a stained glass window and falls onto a stone floor. The light takes on the window's colors briefly, yet the sun itself is untouched, undyed, blazing white above. The soul, eternal and beyond the guṇas, is so untouched by the body it appears within. Color shows on the floor; the sun keeps its purity.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.33

↗
యథా సర్వగతం సౌక్ష్మ్యాదాకాశం నోపలిప్యతే । సర్వత్రావస్థితో దేహే తథాత్మా నోపలిప్యతే ॥ ౩౩ ॥
yathā sarva-gataṁ saukṣmyād
[yathaa sarva-gatam saukshmyaad]
ākāśaṁ nopalipyate
[aakaasham nopalipyate]
sarvatrāvasthito dehe
[sarvatraavasthito dehe]
tathātmā nopalipyate
[tathaatmaa nopalipyate]
yathā — as sarva - gatam — all-pervading saukṣmyāt — due to being subtle ākāśam — the sky na — never upalipyate — mixes sarvatra — everywhere avasthitaḥ — situated dehe — in the body tathā — so ātmā — the self na — never upalipyate — mixes .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
yathā sarva-gataṁ saukṣmyād
yathā
as
sarva - gatam
all-pervading
saukṣmyāt
due to being subtle
ākāśaṁ nopalipyate
ākāśam
the sky
na
never
upalipyate
mixes
sarvatrāvasthito dehe
sarvatra
everywhere
avasthitaḥ
situated
dehe
in the body
tathātmā nopalipyate
tathā
so
ātmā
the self
na
never
upalipyate
mixes .
  • sarva - gatam — all-pervading
    Compound. The sky is *everywhere*. The simile requires this universality — otherwise the comparison would not extend to the soul's pervasion of the body.
  • saukṣmyāt — due to being subtle
    Ablative from sūkṣma. *Because of* its subtlety, the sky does not mix. Subtlety is the *reason* for non-contamination. The same logic applies to the soul.
  • ākāśam — the sky
    The fifth great element. Of the five, ākāśa is the most subtle. Kṛṣṇa picks it precisely because it best models the soul's relation to matter.
  • upalipyate — mixes (lit. is smeared)
    Upa- + √lip. Same root as lipyate in verse 32. The repetition is deliberate — the previous verse stated the doctrine; this one illustrates it with the sky-image. Both verses say: the soul is not smeared.
The sky, due to its subtle nature, does not mix with anything, although it is all-pervading. Similarly, the soul situated in Brahman vision does not mix with the body, though situated in that body.

The air enters into water, mud, stool and whatever else is there; still it does not mix with anything. Similarly, the living entity, even though situated in varieties of bodies, is aloof from them due to his subtle nature. Therefore it is impossible to see with the material eyes how the living entity is in contact with this body and how he is out of it after the destruction of the body. No one in science can ascertain this.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
33. Just as the ether, which spreads everywhere, is not contaminated, because of its subtle nature, the Paramātmā, though situated everywhere in the body, is not contaminated.
Commentary

In this verse the Lord gives an example. Just as the ether, situated in mud and other places, is not contaminated because it is most subtle—not contacting the mud at all, the Paramātmā is not connected with the guṇas or faults of the material body, and therefore is not contaminated.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
33. Just as the ether, which spreads everywhere, is not contaminated, the ātmā, though situated everywhere in the body, is not contaminated, because of his subtle nature.
Commentary

“If the jīva is situated in the body, how is it that he is not contaminated by its qualities?” Just as ether, though entering everywhere, into mud or other impure items, is not touched by their qualities because of being very subtle, so the jīva, though situated in all high and low bodies of devas and men, is not contaminated by those qualities, because he is very subtle.

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

1st Analogy: Like the sky (because of its subtle nature) does not mix with anything, although it is all

pervading; similarly the soul in Brahman vision does not mix with the body, though situated in the body

e.g. Air enters mud, stool, water but does not mix with anything
Similarly the living entity is situated in varieties of bodies but remains aloof
Scientists cannot ascertain this
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.33 Yatha, as; sarva-gatam, the all-pervading; akasam, space;-though pervasive, still, na upalipyate, is not defiled, does not come into contact; saukmyat, because of its subtlety; tatha, similarly; atma, the Self; avasthitah, present, sarvatra, everywhere; dehe, in the body; na, is not; upalipyate, defiled. Further,
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.33 As the 'all-pervading ether,' though in contact with all substances, is 'not tainted' by the alities of all these substances, as it is 'subtle' - even so the self, though 'present in all the bodies,' everywhere, namely, in divinities, men etc., is not contaminated by these bodies by reason of Its extreme subtleness.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.33 See Comment under 13.34
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.33 As the all-pervading ether is not tainted, because of its subtlety, so the Self seated everywhere in the body is not tainted.
Commentary

13.33 यथा as? सर्वगतम् the allpervading? सौक्ष्म्यात् because of its subtlety? आकाशम् ether? न not? उपलिप्यते is tainted? सर्वत्र everywhere? अवस्थितः seated? देहे in the body? तथा so? आत्मा the Self? न not? उपलिप्यते is tainted.Commentary Ether pervades everything. All are immersed in it. There is no point whereunto ether does not penetrate and pervade and yet it is not tainted by anything. Even so the Self pervades the whole body and the whole world. Being subtler than the body the Self is never tainted by it or anything else. It is unattached and actionless. It has no parts or limbs. So virtuous and vicious actions cannot contaminate the Self. It is ever pure and stainless.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.33 As the all-pervading space is not defiled, because of its subtlety, similarly the Self, present everywhere in the body [The singular number is used to denote a class, i.e. all bodies. See S.-Tr.], is not defiled.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.33 As space, though present everywhere, remains by reason of its subtlety unaffected, so the Self, though present in all forms, retains its purity unalloyed.
Related values
Anahankarah (Freedom from False Ego)
Related verses
BG 9.6 BG 2.70 BG 5.10 SB 1.11.38 SB 11.7.41 SB 11.9.12 CC Madhya 23.106 CC Madhya 8.232 CC Antya 5.79 Bṛhadāraṇyaka Upaniṣad 4.3.15Chāndogya Upaniṣad 8.12.1
As the all-pervading sky is not contaminated due to its subtlety — so the soul, situated in Brahman vision, is not contaminated by the body.
Practical Applications
  • Use the sky-analogy to understand soul's non-contamination.
  • When you feel contaminated by what you've encountered, return to the sky-perception.
  • Cultivate sky-mind.
Reflection Questions
  • When did I last feel contaminated?
  • What sky-perception would have helped?

The sky fills the room, the cave, the lung, the pot — yet take any of them away and the sky has lost nothing, gained nothing, been altered by nothing. The soul lives in the body with that same untouchability. Whatever the body has done or had done to it, the soul is the sky inside the room.

Sītā in Aśoka-vana

Held captive in Rāvaṇa's garden, surrounded by demonesses, threatened daily — Sītā's outer circumstances were dire. Yet her inner life remained unstained. She refused even to look at Rāvaṇa; her mind dwelt always on Rāma.

The Rāmāyaṇa portrays her as the embodiment of this verse's truth. The body was in Laṅkā; the soul was in Ayodhyā. Like the sky in a polluted city — present everywhere, contaminated nowhere — her self was untouched by what surrounded it. Brahman-vision is portable; the captor cannot reach it.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.34

↗
యథా ప్రకాశయత్యేక: కృత్స్‍నం లోకమిమం రవి: । క్షేత్రం క్షేత్రీ తథా కృత్స్‍నం ప్రకాశయతి భారత ॥ ౩౪ ॥
yathā prakāśayaty ekaḥ
[yathaa prakaashayaty ekah]
kṛtsnaṁ lokam imaṁ raviḥ
[kritsnam lokam imam ravih]
kṣetraṁ kṣetrī tathā kṛtsnaṁ
[kshetram kshetree tathaa kritsnam]
prakāśayati bhārata
[prakaashayati bhaarata]
yathā — as prakāśayati — illuminates ekaḥ — one kṛtsnam — the whole lokam — universe imam — this raviḥ — sun kṣetram — this body kṣetrī — the soul tathā — similarly kṛtsnam — all prakāśayati — illuminates bhārata — O son of Bharata .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
yathā prakāśayaty ekaḥ
yathā
as
prakāśayati
illuminates
ekaḥ
one
kṛtsnaṁ lokam imaṁ raviḥ
kṛtsnam
the whole
lokam
universe
imam
this
raviḥ
sun
kṣetraṁ kṣetrī tathā kṛtsnaṁ
kṣetram
this body
kṣetrī
the soul
tathā
similarly
kṛtsnam
all
prakāśayati bhārata
prakāśayati
illuminates
bhārata
O son of Bharata .
  • ekaḥ — one
    One sun, one soul per body. The simile depends on this *singleness*. Many cells, many organs, many functions — but one consciousness illuminating them all.
  • kṛtsnam — the whole
    Repeated twice in the verse — once for the universe, once for the body. The *entire* universe by one sun; the *entire* body by one soul. The repetition is the doctrine: scale differs, principle is identical.
  • raviḥ — sun
    From a root meaning "to praise, to roar." The sun *is* the praised one of the cosmos, the indispensable luminary. Kṛṣṇa's choice of analogy assumes the listener's reverence for solar imagery.
  • kṣetrī — the soul (owner of the field)
    From kṣetra + -in. The *possessor* of the field. The whole chapter, which began calling the soul kṣetra-jña (knower of the field), here renames him kṣetrī — owner of the field. Knowing graduates to owning.
  • prakāśayati — illuminates
    Pra- + √kāś — "to shine forth." Repeated twice in the verse (sun illuminates universe; soul illuminates body). The verb itself is the doctrine: consciousness is illumination, not content.
O son of Bharata, as the sun alone illuminates all this universe, so does the living entity, one within the body, illuminate the entire body by consciousness.

There are various theories regarding consciousness. Here in Bhagavad-gītā the example of the sun and the sunshine is given. As the sun is situated in one place but is illuminating the whole universe, so a small particle of spirit soul, although situated in the heart of this body, is illuminating the whole body by consciousness. Thus consciousness is the proof of the presence of the soul, as sunshine or light is the proof of the presence of the sun. When the soul is present in the body, there is consciousness all over the body, and as soon as the soul has passed from the body there is no more consciousness. This can be easily understood by any intelligent man. Therefore consciousness is not a product of the combinations of matter. It is the symptom of the living entity. The consciousness of the living entity, although qualitatively one with the supreme consciousness, is not supreme, because the consciousness of one particular body does not share that of another body. But the Supersoul, which is situated in all bodies as the friend of the individual soul, is conscious of all bodies. That is the difference between supreme consciousness and individual consciousness.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
34. Just as one sun lights up the whole world, this Paramātmā illumines the whole body, O descendent of Bharata.
Commentary

Using an example, the Lord shows how the Paramātmā, being the source of illumination, is not connected with the qualities of what He illuminates. Just as the sun, the illuminator, is not connected to the qualities of what He illuminates, the Paramātmā (kṣetrī) illumines everything and is not affected. The śruti says: sūryo yathā sarva-lokasya cakṣur na lipyate cākṣuṣair bāhya-doṣaiḥ ekas tathā sarva-bhūtāntarātmā na lipyate śoka-duḥkhena bāhyaḥ

Just as the sun is the eye of all people but is not contaminated by the material faults of the eyes, so the Paramātmā within all beings is not contaminated by lamentation and suffering of the material world. Kaṭha Upaniṣad 5.11

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
34. Just as one sun lights up the whole world, this ātmā illumines the whole body, O descendent of Bharata.
Commentary

This ātmā, not contaminated by the qualities of the body, nourishes the body by its qualities. Just as the one sun illuminates the whole world with its light, so the jīva (kṣetrī) illuminates, or gives consciousness (prakāśayati) to the whole body (kṣetram) from head to foot by its consciousness. The author of Vedānta says guṇād vā lokavad: as a flame pervades a room by its rays, the soul pervades the whole body by its quality. (Vedānta Sūtra 2.3.24)

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

Krsna, in this last few verses, is giving examples to help us to understand.

[5. Summary: One who sees the distinction between the body, its owner, and the Supersoul, and one who recognize the process of liberation, can attain the supreme goal. (35) ]

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

2nd Analogy: As the sun alone illuminates all this universe, similarly the living entity illuminates the

entire body by consciousness

Focus of Learning

(a) Consciousness is the proof of presence of soul – e.g. Sunshine is the proof of sun

Consciousness is not a product of a combination of matter – Because
When soul leaves there is no more consciousness

(b) Difference between “Supreme consciousness” and “individual consciousness”

Living entity is only conscious of one body, although he is qualitative one with the Supreme
Supersoul is conscious of all bodies

PRACTICAL APPLICATION OF TEXTS 13.29 – 13.31

One should be neither disturbed, nor envious. He must act properly and see the Supersoul – The ultimate sanctioning agent – present in all beings (13.29)
Text 13.30 explains further the knowledge given in Text 13.21: “I, the soul, am the cause of various sufferings and enjoyments, but I do nothing; only material nature acts.” For the purpose of engendering humility, it is stressed herein that the individual soul does nothing (13.30)
All bodies must one day cease to exist. Therefore, when we see many different individuals, we should stop seeing them as their fields of activity; the ksetra-jna—both the soul and the Supersoul—have nothing to do with matter. That is Brahman vision. (13.31)
Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.34 Yatha, as; ekam, the one; ravih, sun; prakasayati, illumines; imam, this; krtsnam, whole; lokam, world tatha, similarly;-who?-ksetri, the Knower of the field, i.e. the supreme Self, though one; prakasayati, illumines; krtsnam, the whole; ksetram, field, from the 'great elements' to 'fortitude' (cf. 5-6). Here the illustration of the sun serves to highlight two aspects of the Self, viz that, like the sun, the Self is one in all the fields, and that It remains unaffected. This verse is meant for summarizing the idea of the whole of this chapter:
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.34 As the 'one sun' illumines 'all this world' by his radiance, so the 'knower of the body' illumines the entire Ksetra, i.e., the body, by Its own knowledge, within and without and from head to toe, by conceiving 'This my body is of this nature.' This self of the said nature is totally different from the body, because It is the knower of the body. The body is the object of Its knowledge and is therefore different from It, even as the illuminating sun is totally different from the illumined world.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.31-34 Yada etc. upto na upalipyate. When [a man of Yoga] perceives the mutual difference i.e., separateness of all beings (all mutually different beings) in the very Self on account of Its all pervasive nature and realises the said difference as having sprung up from the Self alone - even then he does not get any stain. For [in that case] he would be the creator (or performer) of all. For, he is none but the Supreme Self; and though residing in the body, he is not stained just as the Eather is [not stained].
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.34 Just as the one sun illumines the whole world, so also the Lord of the field (Supreme Self) illumines the whole field, O Arjuna.
Commentary

13.34 यथा as? प्रकाशयति illumines? एकः one? कृत्स्नम् the whole? लोकम् world? इमम् this? रविः sun? क्षेत्रम् the field? क्षेत्री the Lord of the field (Paramatma)? तथा so? कृत्स्नम् the whole? प्रकाशयति illumines? भारत O descendant of Bharata (Arjuna).Commentary The Supreme Self is one. It illumines the whole matter from the Unmanifested down to the blade of grass or a lump of clay? from the great elements down to firmness or fortitude. (Cf. verses 5 and 6.) Just as the sun is one? just as the sun illumines the whole world? just as the sun is not tainted? so also the Self is One in all bodies? It illumines all the bodies and It is not contaminated.

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.34 As the single sun illumines this whole world, similarly, O descendant of the Bharata dynasty, the Knower of the field illumines the whole field.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.34 As the one Sun illuminates the whole earth, so the Lord illumines the whole universe.
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 2.17 BG 15.7 BG 13.18 SB 11.7.45 SB 10.84.24 SB 11.10.8 CC Madhya 20.108-109 CC Madhya 20.281 CC Ādi 2.18 Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 5.9Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 3.1.9
As the sun illuminates the entire universe, so the embodied soul illuminates the entire body with consciousness.
Practical Applications
  • Recognize consciousness as the soul's illumination of the body.
  • Use this analogy in self-perception.
  • Treat consciousness as evidence of the soul.
Reflection Questions
  • When did I last sense consciousness as illumination, not as content?
  • What does that perception teach?

One sun, ninety-three million miles away, sends light into every blade of grass, every wave, every windowpane in the city — and the city wakes. So the soul, one alone in the body, sends consciousness into every cell, every limb, every thought — and the body becomes alive. Withdraw the sun and the city is dark. Withdraw the soul and the body is corpse.

📝 My note

Bhagavad-gītā 13.35

↗
క్షేత్రక్షేత్రజ్ఞయోరేవమన్తరం జ్ఞానచక్షుషా । భూతప్రకృతిమోక్షం చ యే విదుర్యాన్తి తే పరమ్ ॥ ౩౫ ॥
kṣetra-kṣetrajñayor evam
[kshetra-kshetrajnayor evam]
antaraṁ jñāna-cakṣuṣā
[antaram jnaana-chakshushaa]
bhūta-prakṛti-mokṣaṁ ca
[bhoota-prakriti-moksham cha]
ye vidur yānti te param
[ye vidur yaanti te param]
kṣetra — of the body kṣetra - jñayoḥ — of the proprietor of the body evam — thus antaram — the difference jñāna - cakṣuṣā — by the vision of knowledge bhūta — of the living entity prakṛti — from material nature mokṣam — the liberation ca — also ye — those who viduḥ — know yānti — approach te — they param — the Supreme .
Blended reading (Sanskrit + English inline)
kṣetra-kṣetrajñayor evam
kṣetra
of the body
kṣetra - jñayoḥ
of the proprietor of the body
evam
thus
antaraṁ jñāna-cakṣuṣā
antaram
the difference
jñāna - cakṣuṣā
by the vision of knowledge
bhūta-prakṛti-mokṣaṁ ca
bhūta
of the living entity
prakṛti
from material nature
mokṣam
the liberation
ca
also
ye vidur yānti te param
ye
those who
viduḥ
know
yānti
approach
te
they
param
the Supreme .
  • antaram — the difference
    From antara — "interior, interval, distinction." The entire chapter, all 35 verses, served to make *this antaram* visible. Without it, no liberation; with it, liberation is already underway.
  • jñāna - cakṣuṣā — by the vision of knowledge
    Compound. Instrumental case. *By means of* knowledge-eyes. Liberation comes through a particular *organ* — and that organ is not the physical eye but the eye that knowledge opens.
  • mokṣam — the liberation
    From √muc — "to release." Paired in the verse with prakṛti ("from material nature"). Mokṣa is *from prakṛti* — not from the body in some violent sense, but from entanglement in the field. The body remains; the bondage falls away.
  • viduḥ — know
    Perfect tense from √vid. *Have known* — established realization, not fresh acquaintance. The chapter rewards seasoned knowing, not novice curiosity.
  • yānti — approach
    From √yā — "to go." Present tense. They *are going* — already moving toward the supreme. Liberation is not a future event for the realized; it is the current direction of their walking.
  • param — the Supreme
    The chapter's final word: the Supreme. Whether read as Brahman or as Kṛṣṇa, the destination is named. The whole 35-verse architecture points to this single syllable.
Those who see with eyes of knowledge the difference between the body and the knower of the body, and can also understand the process of liberation from bondage in material nature, attain to the supreme goal.

The purport of this Thirteenth Chapter is that one should know the distinction between the body, the owner of the body, and the Supersoul. One should recognize the process of liberation, as described in verses 8 through 12. Then one can go on to the supreme destination. A faithful person should at first have some good association to hear of God and thus gradually become enlightened. If one accepts a spiritual master, one can learn to distinguish between matter and spirit, and that becomes the stepping-stone for further spiritual realization. A spiritual master, by various instructions, teaches his students to get free from the material concept of life. For instance, in Bhagavad-gītā we find Kṛṣṇa instructing Arjuna to free him from materialistic considerations. One can understand that this body is matter; it can be analyzed with its twenty-four elements. The body is the gross manifestation. And the subtle manifestation is the mind and psychological effects. And the symptoms of life are the interaction of these features. But over and above this, there is the soul, and there is also the Supersoul. The soul and the Supersoul are two. This material world is working by the conjunction of the soul and the twenty-four material elements. One who can see the constitution of the whole material manifestation as this combination of the soul and material elements and can also see the situation of the Supreme Soul becomes eligible for transfer to the spiritual world. These things are meant for contemplation and for realization, and one should have a complete understanding of this chapter with the help of the spiritual master. Thus end the Bhaktivedanta Purports to the Thirteenth Chapter of the Śrīmad Bhagavad-gītā in the matter of Nature, the Enjoyer and Consciousness.

— A.C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupāda
Viśvanātha Cakravartī Ṭhākura Gauḍīya
Translation
35. Those who know the difference between the two knowers of the field as well as their difference from the field, and also the process for liberation from prakṛti for the living entities, attain the supreme goal.
Commentary

The Lord summarizes the contents of the chapter. Those who know the difference between two knowers of the field (kṣetra-jṣayoḥ), the jīva and Paramātmā, along with the field, and also the method of liberation (mokṣa) from prakṛti for the living entities (bhūta), such as meditation, achieve the supreme goal. Among the knowers of the field, the jīva, enjoying the qualities of the field, is bound up, but is also liberated by knowledge. This is the meaning of the chapter. Thus end the commentaries on the thirteen chapter of the Gītā for the pleasure of the devotees’ minds, by the mercy of the ācāryas.

Baladeva Vidyābhūṣaṇa Gauḍīya
Translation
35. Those who know the difference between the two knowers of the field as well as their difference from the field, and who also know the process for liberation from prakṛti for the living entities, attain the supreme goal.
Commentary

Concluding the contents of this chapter, the Lord speaks of the results of such knowledge. Those who know by eyes which see the differences (jṣāna cakṣuṣā)—the difference (antaram) of the jīva and the Lord from the field of prakṛti, by the method discussed by Me, and who know the process for liberation of the living entities from prakṛti (bhūta prakṛti mokṣam), starting with amānitvā, go to My supreme attractive abode called the spiritual sky (param). Both the jīva and the Lord are situated in the body. The jīva, joined to the qualities of the body, is bound up, but is liberated by understanding the Lord. This is the knowledge of the thirteenth chapter. Chapter 14

Bhūrijana Dāsa Gauḍīya
Commentary

Srila Prabhupada says in his Purport: "The purport of this Thirteenth Chapter is that one should know the distinction between the body, the owner of the body, and the Supersoul. One should recognize the process of liberation, as described in verses eight through twelve. Then one can go on to the supreme destination. A faithful person should at first have some good association to hear of God and thus gradually become enlightened. If one accepts a spiritual master, one can learn to distinguish between matter and spirit, and that becomes the steppingstone for further spiritual realization. A spiritual master, by various instructions, teaches his students to get free fro material concept of life. For instance, in Bhagavad‑gita we find Krsna instructing Arjuna to free him from materialistic considerations. One can understand that this body is matter; it can be analyzed with its twenty‑four elements. The body is the gross manifestation. And the subtle manifestation is the mind and psychological effects. And the symptoms of life are the interaction of these features. But over and above this, there is the soul, and there is also the Supersoul. The soul and the Supersoul are two. This material world is working by the conjunction of the soul and the twenty‑four material elements. One who can see the constitution of the whole material manifestation as this combination of the soul and mat elements and can also see the situation of the Supreme Soul becomes eligible for transfer to the spiritual world. These things are meant for contemplation and for realization, and one should have a complete understanding of this chapter with the help of the spiritual master."

THUS ENDS THE STUDY OF CHAPTER THIRTEEN.

page \* arabic6

Gauranga Priya Dāsa Study
Bhakti-śāstrī Notes, ISKCON Chowpatty (2009)
Theme

A one verse chapter summary

THEME: Seeing with the eyes of knowledge, the following things, one attains the Supreme Goal

The difference between the body and the knower of the body
The process of liberation from bondage in material nature
END OF CHAPTER 13 

SUMMARIZED THEME 13C

THE VISION OF KNOWLEDGE

A) One can distinguish between spirit and matter in all circumstances (13.27)

One sees all moving and non-moving as a combination of the field and knower of the field

B) One sees indestructible Supersoul accompanying the indestructible individual soul in all the bodies

(13.28)

C) One sees the Supersoul equally present everywhere (13.29)

D) One sees that all activities are performed by the body and the self does nothing (13.30)

E) One sees the living entity as distinct from the field of activities (13.31)

F) One sees that soul never mixes with the body, but is transcendental and eternal (13.32)

Focus of Learning

(a) Purport of Chapter 13

One should know the distinction between the body, owner and the Supersoul
Recognize the process of liberation as per Texts 13.8 – 13.12
Then one can go to the Supreme destination

(b) How the process works

Faithful person should have some good association
Hearing in good association
Accepts a spiritual master
Know the difference between body and matter as the stepping stone for further realisation
Analyze the body with twenty-four elements
Then analyze soul and Supersoul as separate

(c) Conclusion and Suggestion

These things are meant for contemplation and for realization
Have a complete understanding of this chapter with the help of the spiritual master

Bhagavad Gita Notes

CHAPTER 13 Appendix

Selected Texts extracted from “Surrender unto Me”

Śrī Śaṅkarācārya Classical
Translation
13.35 Ye, those who; viduh, know; evam, thus, in the manner described above; jnana-caksusa, through the eye of wisdom-the eye is the realization in the form of the knowledge of the Self, which arises from following the instructions of the scriptures and teachers; through that eye of wisdom; antaram, the distinction, the particular mutual distinction; ksetra-ksetrajnayoh, beween the field and the Knower of the field as they have been explained; and bhuta-prakrti-moksam, the annihilation of the Matrix of beings-the Matrix of beings is that which is described as ignorance and is called the Unmanifest; (those who know) the annihilation (moksanam) of that Matrix of beings; te, they; yanti, reach, go to; param, the Supreme, to Brahman, the Reality which is the suprme Goal. The idea is that they do not take up a body again.
Śrī Rāmānujācārya Classical
Translation
13.35 Those who 'discern thus' in the described manner the 'difference', namely, the difference between the body and the knower of the body with 'the eye of knowledge' or discrimination, and also the 'means of deliverance from manifested Prakrti' - they attain the 'highest', namely, the self. They are completely delivered from bondage. Moksa is that by which deliverance is effected. The means of deliverance as already stated consists of alities beginning with modesty (13.7). They, through the knowledge already imparted concerning the differences between the body and the self, know those differences existing between them. Then learning about modesty etc., which form the means of deliverance from Prakrti that has devleoped into material elements constituting the body, they have to practise these virtues, and they will thery be absolutely delivered from bondage and will reach the self marked by infinite knowledge abiding in Its own form.
Śrī Abhinavagupta Classical
Translation
13.35 Yatha etc. But, how is it that a single Supreme Self pervades many a Field ? This doubt has even been removed by the well known example, the sun. The entire Field : It means [all] the movable and immovable Fields.
Swami Sivananda Classical
Translation
13.35 They who, by the eye of knowledge, perceive the distinction between the field and its knower and also the liberation from the Nature of being, go to the Supreme.
Commentary

13.35 क्षेत्रक्षेत्रज्ञयोः between the Kshetra and the Kshetrajna? एवम् thus? अन्तरम् distinction? ज्ञानचक्षुषा by the eye of knowledge? भूतप्रकृतिमोक्षम् the liberation from the Prakriti of being? च and? ये who? विदुः know? यान्ति go? ते they? परम् the Supreme.Commentary They who know through the eye of intuition opened by meditation and the instructions of the spiritual preceptor and the scriptures? that the field is insentient? the doer? changing and finite? and that the knower of the field (the Self) is pure consciousness? the nondoer? unchanging and infinite? and who also perceive the nonexistence of Nature? ignorance? the Unmanifested? the material cause of being -- they attain the Supreme. Through the attainment of Selfrealisation or knowledge of the Self? they are entirely liberated from the clutches or the influence of Maya (delusion) and ignorance. They do not assume any more bodies. They are not born again. They attain Kaivalya Moksha.In accordance with the doctrine of the Sankhyas? bondage and freedom do not pertain to the Self because It is always unattached and it is the nondoer and nonenjoyer and also without limbs or parts. But on account of Its union with Nature? It assumes agency through superimposition. When ignorance is annihilated through the knowledge of the Self? Nature which is conjoined with the Self is liberated. Then She gives up Her play or dance in front of the Spirit. She has discharged all Her duties well for the sake of the enjoyment and the release (Bhoga and Apavarga) of the Purusha (Spirit). Therefore the Sankhyas declare that bondage and freedom are states of Nature only. Some interpret that the Self is emancipated from the shackles of Nature and Her modifications.(This chapter is known by the name PrakritiPurushaVibhagaYoga also.)Thus in the Upanishads of the glorious Bhagavad Gita? the science of the Eternal? the scripture of Yoga? the dialogue between Sri Krishna and Arjuna? ends the thirteenth discourse entitledThe Yoga of the Distinction BetweenThe Field and the Knower of the Field. ,

Swami Gambhīrānanda Classical
Translation
13.35 Those who know thus through the eye of wisdom the distinction between the field and the Knower of the field, and the annihilation of the Matrix of beings,-they reach the Supreme.
Shri Purohit Swami Classical
Translation
13.35 Those who with the eyes of wisdom thus see the difference between Matter and Spirit, and know how to liberate Life from the Law of Nature, they attain the Supreme."
Related values
Tyaga (Renunciation / Letting Go)Karuna (Kindness / Compassion)Ahimsa (Non-violence / Compassion)Tapas (Austerity / Discipline)Guru Bhakti (Reverence for Teacher)Atma Nigraha (Self-control)Maitri (Friendship / Goodwill)Daksya (Resourcefulness / Skill)Abhaya (Fearlessness)
Related verses
BG 4.34 BG 5.16 BG 7.14 SB 3.25.43 SB 11.20.32 SB 10.14.58 CC Madhya 20.140-143 CC Madhya 24.196 CC Antya 5.78 Śvetāśvatara Upaniṣad 3.8Muṇḍaka Upaniṣad 2.2.8
Those who understand with the eyes of knowledge the difference between body and soul, and the process of liberation from material nature — attain the supreme.
Practical Applications
  • Cultivate the 'eyes of knowledge' — discrimination between body and soul.
  • Use this discrimination daily.
  • Trust that 'attaining the supreme' follows.
Reflection Questions
  • Where am I still seeing through 'body-eyes' instead of 'knowledge-eyes'?
  • What practice trains the new sight?

A pair of new eyeglasses, ground correctly, makes a blurred world snap into focus. The 'eyes of knowledge' (jñāna-cakṣus) work like that — what was an undifferentiated tangle of body and self resolves into two clear things, and the path of liberation appears in sharp outline. Those who put on these glasses arrive. Those who refuse them keep stumbling.

Jaḍa Bharata's silent teaching

Jaḍa Bharata, reborn after his deer-attachment, hid his realization behind the manner of an idiot. When the king Rahūgaṇa pressed him into palanquin service and rebuked him for his clumsy gait, Jaḍa Bharata at last spoke — and what came out was this exact chapter's vision: "You speak to whom? To the body? The body cannot hear. To the soul? The soul has no body to carry palanquins."

The Bhāgavatam preserves the discourse in the Fifth Canto. With his jñāna-cakṣus opened, Jaḍa Bharata saw cleanly through the king's confusion. Rahūgaṇa fell at his feet. The verse's promise — *they attain the supreme* — was already true of the speaker.

📝 My note